EN - Complete Sinumerik Operate Milling - v26

Operating and Programming Documentation
Milling 828D/840Dsl Sinumerik operate
Edition 2011.1 Training Manual

This document was produced for training purposes. Siemens assumes no responsibility for its contents.
SINUMERIK 828D 840D sl SINUMERIK Operate Operating and Programming Manual for Milling machines
Valid for:
Sinumerik 828D Software 4.3 840D sl Sinumerik Operate Software 2.6
Start
B551 General Technology basics
Contents
B552 Geometry Basics B553 Simple Contour Elements B554 Mathematical Principles B555 Zero offset and Reference Points
B556 Program Structure B559 Loops, Jumps, and Repetitions B560 Mirror - offset rotate - scale when milling B558 Program of Subroutines B557 Cutting Edge Radius Correction
B565 Basics B566 Operating Elements B567 Switching on the Machine B568 Basic Operations B569 Operating Area MACHINE
B570 Operating Mode JOG B573 Operating Area PARAMETER B574 Operating Area Program B572 Operating Mode AUTO B571 Operating Mode MDA
B575 Operating Area Program Manager B576 Operating Area Diagnostics B577 Operating Area Start-Up
B604 Basics of Programming with programGUIDE
B609 Drilling programGUIDE
B616 Milling programGUIDE B600 Basics of Programming with Shopmill B656 Measure Milling programGUIDE B624 Contour Milling programGUIDE
B608 Drilling Shopmill
B500 Cycles B615 Milling Shopmill B623 Contour Milling Shopmill B639 Straight Circle Shopmill B655 Measure Milling Shopmill B700 Drawings of programming Examples
End
B551
General technology basics
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working through this module you become familiar with the most important technological aspects and machine functions. Description of the module: This module explains the general layout of a program, with respect to the technological commands as per DIN 66025 for turning and milling. Content: Layout of a CNC-program Programming of the technology data Switching commands Programmable presettings Summary
828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate Page 1
B551
B551
B551
Page 2
B551
General technology basics: Description This module explains the general layout of a program, with respect to the technological commands as per DIN 66025 for turning and milling.
General technological aspect: START
Layout of a CNC-program
Programming of the technology data
Switching commands
Programmable presettings
Summary
General technological aspect: END
Notes :
Page 3
B551
Section 2
Notes:
Layout of a CNC-program
A CNC-program, also known as part program, consists of a logical sequence of commands, which are executed step-by-step by the control unit after the program has been started. The manufacturers of control units recognize and apply the guidelines as per DIN 66025. Each program is compiled and stored under a program name in the control unit. The name can contain letters as well as numbers. A block starts with a block number followed by the commands. Each command consists of command words, which in turn consist of an address letter (A-Z) and an associated numerical value (both upper or lower case characters are permissible). Program layout: Departure information
Block Nr.. Auxiliary command Interpolation parameter
Switching information
Misc. function
Coordinate axes
Feed
Speed
Tool
Geometrical data
Technological data
The block number is a program-technical assignment, which is not evaluated by the control unit as a command. It is usually programmed to go up in steps of 10 and serves the user only for a better oversight. It has no effect on the program execution. The geometrical data include all instructions that clearly define mathematically the motion of the tool or the axes. The technological data are used for instance to activate the required tool and to pre-select the necessary cutting parameters feed rate and spindle speed. Miscellaneous functions can control for example such things as direction of rotation and auxiliary appliances. Programming example: . N80 T1; Roughing tool N90 M6 N100 G54 F0.2 S180 M4 N110 G00 X20 Y0 Z2 D1 N120 . In order to improve the oversight within a program, comments can be optionally added at the end of a block. These must be preceded by a semicolon; Any characters that follow thereafter will not be taken account of by the control unit.
B551
Page 4
Programming of the technology data

Before every technological working step in a CNC-Program the respective tool must be selected by means of the addresses T and D. The address T is followed by the name of the tool, which may be stated either with numbers or letters (here only the variant using numbers will be dealt with). All applicable tool data (e.g. tool type, length, radius, etc.) are activated in the program with the address D. Here a complete set of data D is referred to as Cutting edge. Several cutting edge numbers (D1 D9) may be generated for each tool. Programming example: N10 T17 ; Drill N20 M6 N30 D1 Explanation: Block 10, call-up of tool 17, Commentary to the tool Tool change, The cutting edge D... must be activated in the block with the first axis movement.
Section 3
Notes:
After the call-up of the tool, follows the selection of the optimum cutting values with the addresses F and S. The feed rate vf with the address F can be entered either as feed per min (in mm/min) or as feed per revolution (in mm/rev). The Cutting speed vc with the address S can be entered either as spindle speed in revolutions per minute (rev/min) or direct as cutting speed in meters per minute (m/min). Default status of the machines when they are powered up are as follows: Milling machines with feed rate F in mm/min Turning machines with feed per revolution F in mm/rev Selection of cutting speed: Constant cutting speed S in m/min (Relative to workpiece ) Deactivate constant cutting speed S spindle speed in rev/min (default) Code G96 Code G97 Code G94 Code G95
Programming example 1: N10 T20 ; Endmill N20 M6 N30 G94 F200 S1000 M3 D1 N40 . Programming example 2: N10 T2; Turning tool, finishing N20 G96 F0.1 S200 M4 D1 N30 .
Explanation:
vf = 200 mm/min, n = 1000 min-1 Explanation: vf = 0,1 mm/rev , vc = 200 m/min
Page 5
B551
Section 4
Notes:
Switching commands
There are different commands to control the direction of rotation of the work spindle. Additional auxiliary functions can for example control cooling circuits, clamping devices, auxiliary functions and running of the program. But the presence of these additional functions depends entirely on the technology and the machine design. The following list should be only considered as an example of commands: Instruction M00 M03 M04 M05 M06 M08 M09 M30 Meaning Programmed Halt Work spindle ON, clockwise Work spindle ON, anti-clockwise Work spindle Halt (however, the program continues) Tool change Coolant ON Coolant OFF End of program; jump back to the start of the program
Programming example: N10 T1; Face mill N20 M6 N30 G94 G97 F600 S2500 D1 N40 M3 M8 .. N90 M30
Explanation: Tool change vf = 600 mm/min, n = 2500 min-1 Spindle ON clockwise, coolant ON End of program
(Note: Further functions can be found in the annexure of this manual)
Effect of the switching commands M3 and M4 Example Milling Example Turning
M3
M4 M3 Viewing direction
M4
B551
Page 6
When starting a part program the basic settings as defined by the manufacturer will be activated. These depend on the individual machine specification and apply thereafter for the whole of the program run (modal) unless they are changed by the operator in the program. This section describes just a few of the possible selections for turning- and milling machines that deserve highlighting. Note: Codes that have already been dealt with are no longer included
Section 5
Notes:
Continuous path behaviour: Exact stop Code G09 block-by-block Code G60 * modal
In order to reach the final position precisely the path velocity is reduced at the end of the block towards zero. This is useful, for instance, to obtain relatively sharp edges when machining around contour corners. However, it must be borne in mind that, if there are too many positioning sequences, it will result in increased machining time and cannot be neglected.
Continuous control operation
Code G64
In this case the tool moves as much as possible with constant velocity without deceleration at the end of a block. Hence the machining time is less than under the continuous path status Exact stop. The corners of contours are machined without any relief and therefore the corners are not so sharply defined. With this function the control works with a speed control taking into account several blocks ahead (Look Ahead). The even speed in this instance results in better cutting conditions and also a better surface quality. The following image compares the frequent braking and accelerating sequences between the individual blocks in case of G60 and the constant speed in case of G64.
Feed rate
G64 Continuous path mode with Look Ahead Programmed feed rate
G60 Exact stop
Block path
Usual preset starting status
Page 7
B551
Section 5
Notes:
The continuous path behaviour Exact stop with the Codes G09 or G60 respectively does not entirely ensure dimension-wise as to how precisely a corner point between two positioning blocks is attained. If an exact stop has been activated in a program, the codes described below can be used to specify a very precise braking behaviour at the end of blocks. By this it is possible to determine as to how precisely the programmed corner point will be attained. Change-over when the positioning window fine is reached Code G601 The tool motion changes to the next block when the tool has reached the fine positioning window. Sharp contour corners result at the programmed destination points. Change-over when the positioning window coarse is reached Code G602 This code can be used to obtain a defined rounding of the programmed contour corners. The block change-over occurs already at the coarse positioning window. Block change-over Destination point of the programmed path Actual tool paths depending on the positioning window
G601 G60
Tool
A dimensional definition of the positioning windows coarse and fine is preset by means of machine datum. Please find out the values preset on your machine by the machine manufacturer from his operation manual if you are going to use the described codes.
B551
Page 8
There is yet another means of influencing the continuous path behaviour by changing over to the next positioning block depending on the programmed path velocity of the tool. Change-over when the setpoint position is reached: Code G603
Section 5
Notes:
The block change-over is initiated as soon as the control has calculated the setpoint speed for all axes to be equal to zero. Since the physical tool position lags behind the calculated value by a certain amount, the effect in this case is that the axis changes direction before the end of the interpolation is reached. The greater the feed rate, the greater is also the lag of the tool behind the evaluated value and therefore the rounding radius. This permits the contour corners to be formed in dependence on the path velocity.
Destination point of the programmed path (Interpolation ends) Actual tool path with smaller feed rates Actual tool path with greater feed rates
Workpiece
Hint: The rounding radius depends on the programmed path velocity as swell as the drive dynamics of the machine. The codes G601, G602 and G603 are modal. They only have an effect in conjunction with active exact stop with G09 or G60.
Page 9
B551
Section 6
Notes:
Summary
Address T D F S Meaning Tool number Cutting edge (tool data) Feed/Feed rate Speed/Cutting speed
Path information/departure commands Instruction G09 G60 G64 G601 G602 G603 G70 G71 G94 G95 G96 G97 Meaning Exact stop, operative block-by-block Exact stop, modal function Continuous path control Change-over when positioning window fine is reached Change-over when positioning window coarse is reached Change-over when the interpolation end is reached Input system in inches Input system metrical Linear feed in mm/min * Feed per revolution in mm ** Constant cutting speed in m/min ** Spindle speed in min-1 * * ** Switching-ON status for milling machines Switching-ON status for turning machines
Switching information Instruction M00 M03 M04 M05 M06 M08 M09 M17 M18 Meaning Programmed halt Work spindle ON, clockwise Work spindle ON, anti-clockwise Work spindle Stop Tool change Coolant ON Coolant OFF End of subprogram End of program, jump back to the beginning of program
All instructions (except G09) mentioned above are modal, until they are programmed to deactivate with different set of instructions. Furthermore there are instructions that are operative only block-by-block, e.g. G09. These are automatically reset by the control unit with the succeeding block.
B551
Page 10
B552
General geometry basics
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working through this module you learn to understand the programming planes and also how to specify points in a DIN conforming coordinate system. Description of the module: This module explains the assignment of the axis and plane descriptions to the coordinate system of the machine and also teaches the definition of points in relation to the work space. Content: Right hand rule Explanation of the axis assignments Points and distances in the work space Programming planes

B552
B552
B552
Page 2
B552
General geometry basics: Description This module explains the assignment of the axis and plane descriptions to the coordinate system of the machine and also teaches the definition of points in relation to the work space.
General geometry basics: START
Right hand rule
Explanation of the axis assignments
Points and distances in the work space
Programming planes
General geometry basics: END
Notes :
Page 3
B552
Section 2
Notes:
Right hand rule

Explanation: According to DIN standard the various axes of motion within work space of CNC machines are addressed by alphabets. The rules for the assignment of the axes are determined in this DIN-standard. The machine coordinate system that is derived from the DIN-standard is the base for the geometrical description of work pieces which allows us to clearly determine the points in a plane or in space. The cartesian (rectangular) spatial coordinate system can be best described with the Right hand rule. Here the fingers of the right hand represent the axes: X (thumb), Y (first finger) and Z (middle finger). The finger tips point in the positive direction.
Vertical turning machine
Horizontal milling machine
The position of the machine coordinate system is specified by the machine manufacturer keeping the following in mind:
Definition of axis according to DIN-standard: Z-Axis: Is aligned parallel to the working spindle or coincides with it. The positive direction points away from the work piece. In case of more than one spindle, one of them will be declared as the main spindle. X-Axis: Is aligned parallel to the set-up plane or coincides with it. If the Z-axis is vertical, the positive X-axis is directed towards the right. If the Z-axis is horizontal, the positive X-axis is directed towards the left. Y-Axis: Is perpendicular to the X- and Z-axis, in such a way that a spatial cartesian coordinate system results. The direction FROM the work piece TO the tool is PLUS The tool movement is ALWAYS to be programmed!
B552
Page 4
Defining of axis within a workspace

Explanation as per DIN 66217 or ISO 841: However defining only three axes is not enough on modern machine tools. For instance if the milling head of a milling machine is to be swivelled by a certain angle or the quill of a tailstock is to be moved, a further definition of these axes is required. The DIN standard provides the following variants for such cases.
Section 3
Notes:
Here the rotational axes A/B/C are associated with the X/Y/Z axes. Looking in the positive direction of the linear axis, a clockwise rotation equals a positive rotation of the associated rotary axis.
The axes U/V/W are parallel to the axes X/Y/Z.

V
The positive direction is that of the associated main axis.
X Z
Page 5
B552
Section 4
Notes:
Points and distances within the work space

Explanation: For the determination of all points within the work space, the control unit requires a zero point of the coordinate system. This has been determined by the machine manufacturer. All other points have either fixed distances from the machine zero point or else the distance must be defined. The machine zero point (M) is determined by the machine manufacturer and cannot be altered. On milling machines point is usually set on the work table, and on turning machines on the spindle flange. The work piece zero point (W) is the origin of the work piece coordinate system. This can be specified by the programmer and should always be chosen in a way that the least calculation work is required to determine points on the contour given the dimensioning of the drawing. For turning work it lies mostly on the turning axis and the right hand planar face. The reference point (R) is approached for initializing the path measuring system, which means that at this point all axes are set to zero. This is necessary since generally speaking the machine zero point cannot be approached. The tool carrier reference point (F) is of prime importance for the adjustment of preset tools. The lengths L (XPF) and offset O (ZPF) shown in the image below are used as tool calculation values for instance for the tool radius correction and must be entered into the tool memory of the control unit. ZMR ZMF
Example: 2-axis turning machine
XPF
XMF
ZMW
ZPF
B552
Page 6
XMR
Points and distances within the work space
Section 4
Notes:
Example: 3-axis milling machine
ZPF
ZMW
XMR XMW
YMW
XMR = YMR = ZMR =
Distances from the reference point to the machine zero point. These are set by the machine manufacturer during commissioning and are transferred to the control unit when the reference point is reached.
XMW = YMW = ZMW =
These represent distances from the machine zero point to the work piece zero point. The work piece zero point must be determined by the operator by scratching or probing and entered into the tool correction memory.
XPF = ZPF =
Distances from the tool carrier reference point to the tool point on the cutting edge or the front face of the milling cutter.
XMF = ZMF =
Distances from the machine zero point to the tool carrier reference point. The distance is determined by the machine manufacturer and entered into the control unit (only relevant on turning machines).
YMR
ZMR
Page 7
B552
Section 5
Notes:
Programming planes
Continuous path control units can control slides and tool carriers simultaneously along 2 or more axes at a programmed feed rate. For this the speed of the individual drives must be matched to one another. This job is taken over by the interpolator of the CNC-control unit. This is a software program for the evaluation of intermediate positions and speed conditions of the individual axes such that the slides can follow the programmed path. Starting with a 2 -D Continuous path control unit the interpolation can be switched between the three different planes.
+Z
G18 G19 -Y G17 +X
A selection of the plane is made with the associated programming instruction: XY-Plane - programming command G17 XZ-Plane - programming command G18 YZ-Plane - programming command G19 Note: The standard plane being used for working with CNC-Turning machines is G18. With CNC-Milling machines the programming plane G17 is being used. The working plane should either be programmed at the beginning of the NC-program, or before programming an operation in the relevant working plane. The active programming plane is modal and remains active until changed by another programming instruction.
B552
Page 8
B553
Simple contour elements
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working through this module you learn to program linear and circular interpolation commands both with absolute and incremental dimensions. Description of the module: This module explains the use of absolute, incremental and mixed coordinate points. It also explains the programming of simple geometrical path conditions. Content: Absolute and incremental dimensioning, mixed programming Rapid traverse motion Straight line interpolation Circular interpolation Summary

B553
B553
B553
Page 2
B553
Simple contour elements: Description This module explains the use of absolute, incremental and mixed coordinate points. It also explains the programming of simple geometrical path conditions.
Simple contour elements: START
Absolute and incremental dimensioning, mixed programming
Rapid traverse motion
Straight line interpolation
Circular interpolation
Summary
Simple contour elements: END
Notes :
Page 3
B553
Section 2
Notes:

2. 1 Absolute dimensioning When writing CNC-programs a fundamental differentiation must be made between absolute and incremental coordinates. Which of the two options the programmer chooses depends on the usage of the program and the dimensioning on the drawing. Absolute dimensioning, Code G90 All dimensions always refer to the active work piece zero point. About workpiece zero point refer to Module B555 - reference point, workpiece offset, Section 3. The absolute coordinates in a departure command describe the position, to which the tool is to traverse. Example: Coordinates for milling:
Workpiece zero point
G90 P1 P2 P3
X 20 50 70
Y 35 60 20
Coordinates An example for turning: (All X values are diameter values, DIAMON)
G90 P1 P2 P3 P4
X 25 40 40 60
Z -7.5 -15 -25 -35
Code G90 is usually activated as machine status when switching ON. It is modally active for all axes simultaneously and can be reset to incremental dimensioning with G91.
B553
Page 4

2.2 Incremental dimensioning Code G91 (also known as chain dimensioning). All position statements refer to the current starting position of the tool. The programmed value states the coordinate distance, by which the tool is being traversed. Example: Coordinates for milling:
Section 2
Notes:
G91 P1 P2 P3
X 20 30 20
Y 35 20 -35
Example: Coordinates for turning: (All X values are radius values, DIAMOF)
G91 P1 P2 P3 P4
X 12.5 7.5 0 10
Z -7.5 -7.5 -10 -10
Code G91 is modally active for all axes simultaneously and can be reset to absolute dimensioning with G90.
Page 5
B553
Section 2
Notes:

2.3 Mixed Programming As already mentioned, the destination point coordinates can be stated in the program for all types of interpolation as absolute or incremental values respectively. Depending on the presently activated status (G90 or G91), all further coordinate values will refer then also this type of dimensioning. In practice, however, it is often sensible to mix the two possibilities within a program block. The control unit provides a comfortable means of instruction to utilize this additional possibility. Codes AC() and IC()
Mixed programming:
A dimension value will also be taken as an absolute dimension under G91 if the following syntax is used: AC(numerical value) If a dimension value is to be taken to be an incremental value under G90, it must be written as follows: IC(numerical value) Clarification of mixed programming with an example for milling: G90 P1 P2 P3 X 20 IC(30) 70 Y 35 IC(25) IC(-40)
G91 P1 P2 P3
X AC(20) 30 20
Y AC(35) AC(60) -40
A great number of various possibilities are available to the operator in dealing with a mixture of the two types of dimensioning: Note: The above example describes only a small selection of mixed coordinate inputs. A further selection of examples can be found in the description of interpolation types in this manual.
B553
Page 6
Rapid traverse motion

Code G00 Rapid traverse is used for the quickest possible repositioning of the tool to the contour element or, for instance, for moving the tool to the tool changing position. The highest possible speed along a straight line that the machine is capable of attaining is used, however, no machining is possible here. Hence the control unit does not require a value input under the address F. Repositioning with rapid traverse can be programmed to take place in several axes simultaneously.
Section 3
Notes:
Programming example: N10 T1 ; End mill N20 M6 N30 G00 X200 Y80 Z2 D1
Explanation:
Motion at rapid traverse to the destination point X200, Y80, Z2 (taking into account the tool length) End of program
N90 M30
The above programming example repositions the tool from point P1 to the point P2.
straight line
Page 7
B553
Section 4
Notes:

4.1 Straight line interpolation Code G01 The straight line interpolation is used to move the tool with an exactly defined speed along a straight line from the current position to the programmed destination point. All axes can be traversed simultaneously, in which case the resulting line of motion can lie anywhere at an angle within the working space. For this the control unit requires a specified feed rate which at the latest must be defined under the address F in the block containing the Code G1. The following example describes the milling of a slot with absolute dimensioning as per the drawing shown below. Note: The setup feed rate G94 defines the feed rate in millimetre per minute (mm/min), in comparison to setup feed rate G95 that defines the feed rate in millimetre per revolution (mm/rev). Programming example: Explanation:
N10 T1 ; End mill Tool call-up T1 N20 M6 N30 G94 F300 S2000 M3 D1 Technology block for the tool T1 with the cutting edge D1, N40 G90 G00 X40 Y48 Z2 M8 With rapid traverse to the starting position P1 on the safety plane (absolute dimensions), N50 G01 Z-12 Plunging with feed rate, N60 X20 Y18 Z-10 Milling the slot in 3 axes (G1 is modally active), N70 Z2 F1000 Retraction with increased feed rate N80 G00 Z200 N90 M30 The following program section shows the milling of the same slot using incremental dimensioning (up to N40 see above):
N50 G91 G1 Z-14 N60 G01 X-20 Y-30 Z2 N70 G90 Z2 F1000 N80 G00 Z200 N90 M30
Infeed along Z by 14 mm, Incremental traversing of the axes Retraction with absolute dimensions
B553
Page 8

4.2 Straight line interpolation with mixed programming The example shown below describes the milling of the slot with mixed cordinates input. Program blocks such as the call-up of the tool etc., which have already been dealt with, will not be repeated. Important: If any address letter X, Y, Z is not followed immediately by a numerical value, an equal-sign must be written instead. Syntax: X=IC(), Y=AC(), Z...
Section 4
Notes:
Programming example under G90: . N40 G90 G00 X40 Y48 Z2 M8 N50 G01 Z=IC(-14) N60 X20 Y=IC(-30) Z-10 N70 Z2 F1000 .
Explanation: To starting position absolute Incremental coordinate Z Incremental coordinate Y
Programming example under G91: N10 G91 . N40 G00 X=AC(40) Y=AC(48) Z=AC(2) N50 G01 Z-14 N60 X=AC(20) Y-30 Z2 N70 Z=AC(2) F1000 .
Explanation: Incremental dimensioning, To starting position P1 absolute Incremental coordinate Z Absolute coordinate X Absolute coordinate Z
Page 9
B553
Section 5
Notes:
5.1 Circular interpolation Code Code G02 (clockwise) G03 (anti-clockwise)
A circular interpolation permits the traversing of the tool with a defined speed along a circular path from the present start point to the programmed destination point. Apart from the destination point coordinates, the control unit also needs statements about the sense of rotation and the centre of the circle. The centre is entered with I, J and K with incremental dimensions with the centre point as origin. The following assignment applies: I for the X-axis J for the Y-axis K for the Z-axis Programming example with G02: Explanation: .. N40 G00 X30 Y40 Z2 With rapid traverse to the start point N50 G01 Z-5 Grooving with Z N60 G02 X50 Y40 I10 J-7 Circular interpolation clockwise N70 G01 Z2 F1000 ..
Start point End point
Centre point
The following example describes an anti-clockwise circular interpolation as shown in the sketch above. Note: The endpoint in the sketch is now the starting point for the circular interpolation. Programming example with G03: .. N40 G00 X50 Y40 Z2 N50 G01 Z-5 N60 G03 X40 Y40 I-10 J-7 N70 G01 Z2 F1000 .. Explanation: With rapid traverse to the start point Circular interpolation anti-clockwise
B553
Page 10
5.2 Circular interpolation with mixed programming Particularly the incremental statement of the centre of the circle usually represents some difficulties to the operator in practice, since it must often be evaluated using triangle calculations. This is a prime example of where the mixed coordinate programming of the circle centre point in absolute dimensions comes in useful. Programming example: .. N40 G00 X30 Y40 Z2 N50 G01 Z-5 N60 G02 X50 Y40 I=AC(40) J=AC(33) N70 G01 Z2 F1000 .. Explanation:
Section 5
Notes:
Circle centre absolute
Start point End point
Centre point
Page 11
B553
Section 5
Notes:
5.3 Circular interpolations before and behind the turning axis The sketch below shows once again the principle of direction programming of circular interpolations. Code G02: Circular arc clockwise Code G03: Circular arc anti-clockwise The following sketch shows the circular arc orientation on turning machines with different tool arrangements due to the machine layout.
Tool arrangement behind the turning axis G2 G3
G2 G3
Tool arrangement in front of the turning axis
Note: No matter which tool arrangement is applicable to the particular machine, the program as per DIN ISO always describes the contour of the workpiece behind the turning axis.
B553
Page 12
Summary
Path information Instruction G90 G91 G00 G01 G02 G03 Meaning Coordinate input with absolute dimensions Coordinate input with incremental dimensions Linear motion with rapid traverse Straight line interpolation with defined speed Circular interpolation clockwise Circular interpolation anti-clockwise
Section 6
Notes:
All the above departure commands are modal.
Interpolation parameter I J K
Meaning Circle centre coordinate in X, incremental from starting point Circle centre coordinate in Y, incremental from starting point Circle centre coordinate in Z, incremental from starting point
The interpolation parameters are operative block-by-block
Mixed programming for coordinate input IC() AC() Incremental dimension input Absolute dimension input
The statements IC() and AC() are valid only for the address preceeding them. Example: Instruction X=IC(10) Y=AC(20) Meaning Traverse by 10 mm in X Traverse to 20 mm in Y
Page 13
B553
Section End
Notes:
B553
Page 14
B554
Basic mathematical principles
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working through this module you learn the mathematical approach necessary for the programming and for the calculation of missing contour points. Description of the module: In this module contour points will be calculated using the Pythagorean theorem and trigonometrical functions (sine, cosine and tangent). Content: Types of angles The Pythagorean theorem Trigonometrical functions Example calculations

B554
B554
B554
Page 2
B554
Basic mathematical principles: Description In this module contour points will be calculated using the Pythagorean theorem and trigonometrical functions (sine, cosine and tangent).
Basic mathematical principles: START
Types of angles
The Pythagorean theorem
Trigonometrical functions
Example calculations
Basic mathematical principles: END
Notes :
Page 3
B554
Section 2
Notes:
Types of angles
2.1 Basic principles of coordinate evaluation Almost all of the contours encountered during machining can be traced back to a interface of straight lines and circular arcs. For part programming the respective endpoint of the contour element must be known. In most cases these contour points can be taken directly from the drawing provided dimensioning is NC-suitable. In some cases, however, the an evaluation of coordinates may be necessary. For these calculations a basic knowledge of the types of angles, trigonometrical functions and the Pythagorean theorem is required. 2.2 Types of angles In the case of oblique work piece contours angles with a definite relationship to one another result between the contour sections. Depending on their relative position a differentiation is made between complementary angles, step angles and side angles.
Complementary angles add up to 180
Step angles have always the same value
If a transition is at right angles to the radius centre point it is always a tangential transition, and there is no corner shown on the technical drawing. If a corner line is shown, it is not a tangential transition.
B554
Page 4
The Pythagorean theorem

The right angled triangle has a special meaning in geometry, since the sides of such a triangle exhibit a definite relationship to one another. The various sides of the right angled triangle are named specifically: The longest line opposite the right angle is called the hypotenuse. The two other lines, which form the right angle, are called cathetus. The side opposite an angle is called the opposite side. The bounding side of the angle is called the adjacent side.
Section 3
Notes:
In case of a right angled triangle the missing length of a side can be calculated if the length of the other two sides is known. For this the Pythagorean theorem is used.
Pythagorean theorem: In a right-angled triangle the square of the hypotenuse (the side opposite the right angle), c, is equal to the sum of the squares of the other two sides, b and a - that is: a + b = c.
c= a + b
5x5=25 c 16+9=25 b a 3x3=9
4x4=16
c = b =
a2 b2
c 2 a2
By suitable rearrangement of the equations the respective sides can be calculated.
a =
c 2 b2
Page 5
B554
Section 4
Notes:
Trigonometrical functions
The trigonometrical ratios describe the relationships between the angles and the sides in a right angled triangle. With the aid of these trigonometrical functions it is possible to calculate both angles and sides in a right angled triangle. For this one side and an angle or two sides must be known. The selection of the suitable trigonometrical function, i. e. the sine, cosine or tangent, depends on which sides and angles are known and which side or angle is to be found.
1. Adjacent side (AS) 2. Hypotenuse (H) 3. Opposite side (OS) Angle Angle
2
3 1
By the use of the various trigonometrical functions all sides and angles can be calculated.
Sine function
sin
OS H
OS sin
OS sin * H
Cosine function
cos
AS H
AS cos
OS tan
AS cos * H
Tangent function
tan
OS AS
AS
OS tan * AS
B554
Page 6
5.1 Task
Section 5
Notes:
P1 X Z 25 -20
M1 35 -20
P2
P3
P4 40
M2 30
Evaluate the missing coordinates of the points P1 to P4, as well as M1 and M2 Enter the coordinate values in the table. The values for the spaces shown with a dark background are dimensions that can be taken directly from the drawing. Note: All X values are diameter values See the next page for the solution of this example.
B554
Section 5
Notes:
5.2 Solution for the example calculation
P1 X Z 25 -20
M1 35 -20
P2 27,929 -23,536
P3 37,071 -28,107
P4 40 -31,642
M2 30 -31,642
For the solution method see the following page
B554
Page 8
5.3 Solution method
Section 5
Notes:
Since the two sides are equal, all values can be found using the Pythagorean theorem.
xp2 5 5 / 2 3,5355
zp2 xp2 3,5355
zp4 zp2 * (1) 3,5355

xp3 zp4 3,5355
P2x 25 (2 * (5 xp2)) 25 (2 * (5 3,5355)) 27,929

P2z P1z zp2 20 zp2 20 5 / 2 20 3,5355 23,5355
P3x 40 2 * (5 3,5355) 37,071

a (P3x p2x) / 2 (37,071 27,929) / 2 4,571
zp3 a 4,571
P3z P1z zp 2 zp3 20 3,535 4,571 28,1065
P4z P3z zp2 28,1065 3,5355 31,642

B554
Page 9
Section End
Notes:
B554
Page 10
B555
Zero points, work offset and reference point
Brief description
Objective of the module: In this module you learn to use the various zero points within the working space of a milling machine.
Description of the module: This module describes the call-up of individual work piece zero points on the work piece with reference to various starting conditions. Content: Position of the machine zero point Zero point offset G54 Further zero point offsets Further zero point offsets Summary

B555
B555
B555
Page 2
B555
Zero offsets and reference points: Description This module describes the call-up of individual work piece zero points on the work piece with reference to various starting conditions.
Zero offsets and reference points: START
Position of the machine zero point
Zero point offset G54
Further zero point offsets
Summary
Zero offsets and reference points: END
Notes :
Page 3
B555
Section 2
Notes:
Position of the machine zero point

All axis motions on a CNC-machine tool refer to the right-hand Cartesian coordinate system. Note: See also Module B552 - Geometry basics. The entire path measuring system is initialized by approaching the reference point with all axes. At the same time the control unit activates the coordinate system at the machine zero point.
M Machine zero point
This fixed coordinate point (origin) is determined by the manufacturer and cannot be altered by the operator. It serves as a reference point for the machine coordinate system (MCS) of the machine tool.
Z X
B555
Page 4
Zero point offset G54

For machining the workpiece the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) is available on the machine. This can be freely chosen by the operator depending on the manufacturing conditions or according to the usual workshop practice. By this you define a zero point on the workpiece which is offset from the machine zero point by a defined distance, obtaining a work piece zero point that is directly referred to the workpiece to be machined. W Workpiece zero point
Section 3
Notes:
Zero point offset:
Code G54 (modally operative)
With this command the workpiece zero point can be defined on the machine. The following image shows how the position of the workpiece zero has been shifted with G54 by the operator to the marked corner point, alternatively any other corner can be defined as workpiece zero
The determined zero point on the machine can be set in JOG mode and can be activated in the program with the same comand (G54). By this the coordinate origin for the program and the machine zero point coordinate are now identical. Programming example: N10 G17 G54 ... N20 G00 X200 Z300 N30 T1; Surface cutter ... Explanation: Plane selection, call-up of the zero point offset G54 Approach tool changing point Call-up tool T1
Page 5
B555
Section 4
Notes:

Nevertheless, for the efficient production of parts the availability of several workpiece zero points often makes sense. The control unit manufacturer provides for up to 99 selectable zero point offsets. Note: Depending on the machine parameters this number can be set differently. Please refer to the machine manual regarding the exact number of available zero points.
Further zero point offsets: Codes G55, G56 and G57 Codes G505 to G599 (all stated codes are modally operative)
The application example shows a requirement for a second workpiece zero offset. In the picture below the work piece zero point has been transferred with G55 exactly to the setting plane of the chuck jaws. In the program this must be activated by means of the code G55. G55 G54
The use of several zero point offsets can substantially reduce the setup times particularly in cases of one-off or small series machining. For example: You could define just once a specific setting point for each one of your clamping fixtures or else a specific work piece zero point for various work pieces. In the program the respective zero point offset depending on the clamping fixture or the work piece can then be selected. If an identical work piece is to be machined at a later time, the respective zero point is immediately available under the same code.
Important: Zero point offset instructions or commands are MODAL COMMANDS .i.e. once executed they remain active until they are newly defined with the same command or a different set of commands is activated.
B555
Page 6
Tool changing point

Milling machines usually have a fixed tool change position (TCP). This point is typically chosen in a way, that tools can be changed in a collision-proof area in the work space of the machine. For this the tool carrier is generally retracted well back into the positive range of the work space. Note: Take into account the real traverse ranges of your machine; the values used in the example are only exemplary!
Section 5
Notes:
Programming example 1: N10 G17 G54 ... N20 G00 X300 Z150 N30 T1; Milling cutter ...
Explanation: Approach of the tool changing point Indexing the turret to position T1
On this basis the tool carrier will traverse to various positions depending on the active tool length (Z) and the position of the work piece zero point. Note: It is always the tool tip that is being positioned.
Pos. Z
Pos. X
Pos. Y
On the next page a suggestion for the programming of an independent tool changing point can be found.
Page 7
B555
Section 5
Notes:
Tool changing point

In order to approach a tool changing point that is independent of the length of the tool and the presently active zero point offset, the following conditions must be programmed: Switching OFF of all the active offsets or manipulations of the coordinate system Code SUPA (operative block-byblock) Code D0 (modally operative)
Deactivation of the tool lengths in X and Z
Programming example 2:
Explanation:
N10 G17 G54... N20 G00 X400 Z500 SUPA D0 Approach of tool changing point in the MCS, without tool data, N30 T1; milling cutter Indexing the turret to position T1, N40 D1 Call-up of the tool data for T1
Pos. X Pos. Z
Pos. Y Since with the use of the SUPA command any manipulations of the coordinate system have been deactivated for the programmed block only, they do not need to be reactivated. Keep in mind, to call up the required cutting edge again, after each tool change. Note: The extent of programming for the approach of the tool changing point can be reduced if for this purpose a subprogram is written (see page 8 in this module).
B555
Page 8
Summary
Suggestion of a subprogram for tool changing: Subprogram name: SUBR100.SPF N10 G17 G00 X300 Z500 SUPA G40 D0; Approach of tool changing point, zero point offsets OFF, all tool corrections OFF Return to the main program, without interruption of the feed motion.
Section 6
Notes:
N20 RET;
Explanation of the symbols
M Machine zero point
W Workpiece zero point
MCS WCS
Machine coordinate system Workpiece coordinate system
Instruction G54 to G57 G505 to G599
Meaning Call-up of a selectable zero point offset * Call-up of further zero point offsets * (conditionally available) Deactivation of the tool offsets * Reactivation of the tool offsets after the tool change * Switching-OFF of programmable, selectable and external offsets ** End of subprogram, return jump * ** Modally operative instruction Instruction operative block-by-block
D0 D1 - D9
SUPA
RET
Page 9
B555
Section End
Notes:
B555
Page 10
B556
Program structure
Brief description
Aim of the module: In this module you learn how to structure a part program clearly and functionally.
Description of the module: This module describes the programming structure of NC-programs. Content: Basic principles of programming Program structure of a part program Program structure of a machining sequence Settings at the start of a program

B556
B556
B556
Page 2
B556
Program structure: Description This module describes the programming structure of NC-programs.
Program structure: START
Basic principles of programming
Program structure of a part program
Program structure of a machining sequence
Settings at the start of a program
Program structure: END
Notes :
Page 3
B556
Section 2
Notes:
Basic principles of programming
Certain principles should be followed during the creation of part programs: The program must ensure that an unlimited number of work pieces can be produced with the quality (tolerances, surface quality, form and position deviation, etc.) required on the drawing with a minimum of production time and the least possible material wastage. It is always the motion of the tool along the drawn ideal contour of the work piece. If tolerances are shown, the programming is always referred to the middle of the tolerance. Example: 20 + 0,1 - programmed value = 20,05. Precise dimension corrections can be carried out on the machine by means of the wear correction feature for the tool. The program should exhibit a clear and concise structure and should contain comments wherever possible to ensure that other users can understand the layout easily at later stages.
B556
Page 4

The following flow chart represents a possible suggestion for a suitable structure of the main program.
Section 3
Notes:
Program header
Tool call-up 1
Technology block
Approaching the safety level with the tool
Machining sequence 1
Retraction of the tool
no Workpiece finished
yes
Tool call-up 2
End of program
Technology block
Approaching the safety level with the tool
Machining sequence 2
Page 5
B556
Section 4
Notes:

The programming of the machining sequence can be achieved by means of description of the individual steps using departure commands (e.g. G00, G01, G02, etc.) or by means of machining cycles. The following representation refers to the flow chart in section 2 of this manual and describes a possible machining sequence. Programming with G-Codes Programming using cycles
Activation of radius correction
Input of the individual parameters using the input mask and graphical support
Interpolation to the first destination point
Interpolation to the next destination point
Interpolation to the last destination point
Deactivation of the radius correction
The following criteria should be kept in mind when selecting between the two described possibilities: Availability of the cycles on the respective machine. Machining time required with cycles or with G-codes. The relation of the number of work pieces to the required programming extent.
B556
Page 6
Settings at the start of a program

For the user it may be advantageous to switch on certain settings, that are to be activated in the part program, already in the program heading. If necessary, these modally operative commands can always be reset by other commands at any stage during the program. Suggestion of a program heading for a milling application: Programming example: N10 G17 G54 G64 G71 G90 G94 Explanation: X/Y-plane, 1st ZP-offset, continuous control, metrical system, absolute dimensions, linear feed rate F in mm/min,
Section 5
Notes:
N20. . Suggestion of a program heading for a turning application: Programming example: N10 G18 G54 G64 G71 G90 G96 Explanation: Z/X-plane, 1st ZP-offset, continuous control, metrical system, absolute dimensions, constant cutting speed S in m/ min Diameter input*, speed limitation nmax= 3000 min-1
N20 DIAMON LIMS=3000 N30. .
Note: As the tool progresses towards the centre during facing, the spindle speed evaluated internally in the control unit increases steadily until eventually the maximum possible spindle speed would be attained. Depending on the clamping conditions and the size of the work piece a speed limitation should always be selected for reasons of safety.
Page 7
B556
Section End
Notes:
B556
Page 8
B557
Cutting edge radius correction
Brief description
Objective of the module: In this module you learn to write a simple milling program, taking into account the radius correction.
Description of the module: This module describes the commands for radius correction, the rounding and the chamfering of edges. These commands can be used for writing a simple CNC-program. A explanations of the commands is provided.
Content: Cutter radius compensation Rounding and chamfering of edges Mixed incremental and absolute programming Summary Solutions of the tasks

B557
B557
B557
Page 2
B557
Cutting edge radius correction: Description This module describes the commands for radius correction, the rounding and the chamfering of edges. These commands can be used for writing a simple CNC-program. A explanations of the commands is provided.
Cutting edge radius correction: START
Cutter radius compensation
Rounding and chamfering of edges
Mixed incremental and absolute programming
Summary
Solutions of the tasks
Cutting edge radius correction: END
Notes :
Page 3
B551
Section 2
Notes:

The path programmed with G01, G02 and G03 represents the path taken by the centre of the milling cutter. In this case the radius of the milling cutter must be taken into account. Exercise 1 Open the program editor by pressing the following keys successively:
Write the following program header into the editor. Explain the blocks in the table. While doing this make yourself familiar with the editor. Mark the zero point on the drawing N10 G54 G64 G17 SOFT N20 T1 N30 M6 N40 S1000 F200.M3 M8 D1 N50 G00 X115 Y65 Approach of starting point and safety level (P1) Z2 N60 G01 Z0 N70 X-35 N80 G00 Z2 N90 X115 Y15 N100 G01 Z0 N110 X-35 N120 G00 Z150 N130 X150 Y150 M9 Select tool Nr. 1 (PF60 with tool tips)
Solution see page 13
N70
N50
N110
N90
Motion at feed rate Motion with rapid traverse
B557
Page 4

The instructions G41 or G42 are necessary for the programming of contours. With this the contour shown on the drawing can be described directly. The radius value for the milling cutter entered in the tool management is taken into account. The equidistant path for the cutter centre evaluated by the control unit is such that the required contour results on the cutter circumference. To enable the control unit to evaluate the correct equidistant path it must know whether the milling cutter is on the right or the left of the contour. This is determined by relative to the machining direction. Dimensional deviations can then be compensated for by changing the cutter radius.
Section 2
Notes:
Before activating the radius compensation a starting point should be chosen that is sufficiently far from the contour. If possible this distance should be greater than the cutter radius. The starting and end point must be chosen such that no damage to the contour occurs.
S=starting point E=end point Px=programmed contour points Equidistant path with feed direction
Solution 1: Approach and exit of the contour
Solution 2: Approach and exit from/into open area. The points P0 and P9 do not lie on the contour
Page 5
B557
Section 2
Notes:

The work piece shown on the left is to be machined in the course of this module. First the edge of the contour is to be roughed out. For this the instruction G00, G01, G02, G41 and G40 will be used.
Supplement the program commenced on page 2 in the editor, by the following blocks. Specify the contour in the missing blocks.
N140 T=SF14 ;Endmill 14 mm HSS N150 M6 N160 F280 S1400 M3 M8 D1 N170 G00 X-10 Y3 Z2 S N180 G01 Z-5 N190 G... N200 1 N210 2 N220 3 N230 4 N240 5 N250 6 N260 7 N270 8 N280 9 N290 10 N300 11 N310 12 N320 13 N330 14 N340 G... N350 G01 X-10 Y12 E N360 G00 Z150 N370 X150 Y150 M8
Solution see page 14 B557

Page 6 828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

The activation of the cutting edge radius correction can be supported by means of the commands G247/G248 and G347/G348. By their use the contour can be approached along a circular arc. This is called a soft approach that prevents any contour damage at the point of contact. The function soft approach and exit is a tangential approach at the point of contact independently of the starting point. The function is used predominantly in conjunction with the tool radius correction, however, this is not compulsory. G247/G248 (Tangential approach/departure move with a quarter circle)
Section 2
Notes:
N40 G00 X=P0 Y=P0 N50 G41 G247 DISR=2 X=P1 Y=P1
N60 G01 X=P2 N110 G01 X=Pn-1 Y=Pn-1 N120 G40 G248 DISR=2 X=Pn Y=Pn
Positioning for activation of the radius compensation Radius compensation activation. Approach with a quarter circle with radius 2 to position P1. The values for DISCL, FAD F have not been programmed. Machining the contour. Approach of the last contour point Radius compensation deactivation by leaving with a quarter circle of radius 2 to position P0/Pn
G347/G348 (Tangential approach/ departure move with a semi circle)
N40 G00 X=P0 Y=P0 N50 G41 G347 DISR=2 X=P1 Y=P1
N60 G01 X=P2 N110 G01 X=Pn-1 Y=Pn-1 N120 G40 G348 DISR=2 X=Pn Y=Pn
Positioning for activation of the radius compensation Radius compensation activation. Approach with a half circle with radius 2 to position P1. The values for DISCL, FAD F have not been programmed. Machining the contour.. Approach of the last contour point Radius compensation deactivation by leaving with a quarter circle of radius 2 to position P0/Pn
DISR (Approach/departure radius) is the radius of the tool centre path. If the tool radius correction is activated, an arc is generated with a radius such that also in this case the tool centre path results with the programmed radius.
progr. contour
Page 7
B557
Section 2
Notes:

Possible approach movements: G140 G141 G142 G143 G147 G148 Approach and departure direction depending on the current correction side (basic position value) Approach from the left and departure to the left Approach from the right and departure to the right Approach and departure direction depends on the position of the starting and end point relative to the tangential direction Approach with a straight motion
tool P1 P3 at approaching/leaving with straight line (G147) tool centre path P4 contour
Departure with a straight motion
G247 G248
Approach with a quarter circle Departure with a quarter circle
DISR P0 P3 at approaching/leaving with quarter circle (G247) DISR
tool centre path tool P4 contour
G347 G348
Approach with a half circle Departure with a half circle

P0 P3 at approaching/leaving with half circle (G347)
G340 G341
Approach and leaving in space Approach and departure in a plane
DISR
tool centre path tool P4 contour
Associated parameter values: DISR
Approaching and leaving shown with interpoint P4 (with concurrent activation of the tool radius compensation
Approach and departure with straights (G147/G148). Distance of the cutter edge from the starting point on the contour. Approach and departure with arcs (G247, G347/G248, G348) Radius of the cutter centre path. Caution: In case of REPOS with a semi circle DISR states the circle diameter. DISCL=... Distance of the end point of the rapid approach motion from the machining plane. DISCL=AC (...) Statement of the absolute position of the end point of the rapid approach motion. Speed of the slow feed motion. FAD=... the programmed value works according to the G-Code of group 15 (feed; G93, G94, etc.). FAD=PM (...) the programmed value is interpreted as a linear feed (like G 94) independent of the active G-Code of the group 15.
DISCL
FAD
The soft approach and departure is very well explained in the module B558 Program of subroutines.
B557
Page 8

For the machining of the finished contour the instructions RND, CHR, CHF are to be used for the radii and the chamfers.
Section 3
Notes:
RND: At the programmed intersection between two straights a radius is added. The size of this is defined by RND=7.
CHF: At the programmed intersection between two straights a chamfer is added. The length of the chamfer is defined by CHF=9.
CHR: At the programmed intersection between two straights a chamfer is added. CHR=5 defines the length of the legs of this chamfer.
All not dimensioned radii and chamfers are 2 mm.
Page 9
B557
Section 3
Notes:

Describe the contour using the instructions referred to so far. A milling cutter with a diameter of 8mm is to be used (Name SF8). Start describing the contour at the point X13; Y5.
N380 N390 N400 N410 N420 N430 N440 N450 N460 N470
T=SF8 ;End mill 8 mm HSS M6 F280 S1400 M3 M8 D1 G00 X6 Y-7 G01 Z-5 G... G01 X13 y3 Y G03 X Y I J... G Y ...
N480 X ... N490 Y... N500 G ... X Y I J N510 G X Y ... N520 X Y ... N530 X Y ... N540 X Y N550 Y N560 G X Y I J N570 G X10 N580 G N590 X Y N600 G Z M... N610 X150 Y150
Activation of the radius compensation Traverse close to the contour 1st contour point Milling the radius 8 mm Approach of top left contour point and rounding with 2 mm to the subsequent element Milling the contour corner at the chamfer 4 mm Approach of the stating point for the radius 20 mm Milling the radius 20 mm Approach of the starting point of the pocket and chamfer Approach of the top pocket corner and rounding 4 mm Approach of the bottom pocket corner and rounding 4 mm Approach end point of the pocket and chamfer Approach of starting point with radius7 mm Milling the radius 7 mm Leaving the contour Deactivation of the radius compensation Retraction of the cutter Retraction to the tool changing point, coolant OFF Traverse to the tool changing point
B557
Page 10

Angle ANG= If for a straight only one end point coordinate of the plane is known, or in the case of contours the final end point via several blocks, an angular statement can be used to completely define the straight path section. The angle is always referred to the abscissa of the current plane G17 to G19; e.g.: in case of G17 to the X-axis. Positive angles are taken to be anticlockwise.
Section 4
Notes:
20 15
Ordinate
23
Abscissa G01 X15 G01 X20 ANG=-36 G01 X23 ANG=-72
Mixed programming: Absolute and incremental dimensions (G90/G91) you know already for the programming of contours. These two types can be programmed together in one block. For this the instructions IC (incremental) and AC (absolute) can be used. In this way IC can be used to program incremental dimensions within G90. The instruction G90 is modal. The cutter moves along the X-axis incrementally by 10 mm in the positive direction. Y=AC(12) The cutter will be positioned absolute along the Y-axis to the Coordinate of Y12 . X=IC(10)
20 12
G90 G01 X12 Y25 G01 X=IC(4) Y22 G01 X20 Y=IC(-3)
4
G91 G01 X=AC(12) Y=AC(25) G01 X4 Y=AC(22) G01 X=AC(20) Y-3
22 25
Page 11
B557
Section 4
Notes:

Describe the contour using the instructions referred to so far. A milling cutter with a diameter of 8 mm is to be used (Name SF8).
All radii R4
N620 G00 X17.5 Y60.5 Z2 N630 G... Z M... N640 G... N650 N660 N670 N680 N690 N700 N710 N720 N730 N740 N750 N760 N770 N780 N790 N800 N810 N820 G01 X12 Y60.5 G01 Y... RND=... G01 X=IC(...) G01 X.. ANG= G01 X... RND=... G01 X=...(10) RND=... G... G01 Y... RND=... G01 X=AC(...) CHR=... G01 Y=...(...) RND=... G01 X... RND=... G... G01 X... Y... G... G01 X17.5 Y60.5 G00 Z150 M9 G00 X... Y... M...
Positioning above the centre of left upper pocket Plunging into the pocket and coolant ON Activation of cutter radius compensation (climb milling) Approach of contour 1st corner point with rounding to the next element Approach of starting point for 55 chamfer Oblique 55 2nd corner point with rounding to the next element 3rd corner point with rounding to the next element Switching to incremental dimensions 4th corner point with rounding to the next element 5th corner point with chamfering to the next element 6th corner point with rounding to the next element 7th corner point with rounding to the next element Switching to absolute dimensions Closing of contour Deactivation of cutter radius compensation Retraction of the cutter Leaving the contour and coolant OFF Traverse to tool changing position End of program
B557
Page 12
Summary Path information/path commands

Instruction G40 G41 G42 CHR CHF RND ANG X=IC() Y=AC() Meaning Cutter radius compensation deactivated * ** Cutter radius compensation to left of contour Cutter radius compensation to right of contour Chamfering the contour corner by statement of leg length Chamfering the contour corner by statement of the length of chamfer Rounding the contour corner (radius statement) Straight with an angle Statement of the coordinates with incremental dimensions Statement of the coordinates with absolute dimensions * ** Power-ON status of milling machines Power-ON status of turning machines
Section 5
Notes:
Page 13
B557
Section 6
Notes:
Solution of the tasks

6.1 Cutter radius compensation The path programmed with G01,G02 and G03 represents the path of the cutter centre. In this case the cutter radius must be taken into account by yourself. Exercise 1 Open the editor by pressing the following keys successively:
Write the following program header into the editor. Explain the blocks in the table. While doing this make yourself familiar with the editor. Mark the zero point on the drawing.
N10 G54 G64 G17 SOFT N20 T1 N30 M6 N40 S1000 F200 M3 M8 D1 N50 G00 X115 Y65 Z2 N60 G01 Z0 N70 X-35 N80 G00 Z2 N90 X115 Y15 N100 G01 Z0 N110 X-35 N120 G00 Z150 Zero point offset, continuous control ON, plane selection XY, soft control Select tool Nr. 1 (PF60 with tool tips) Load the selected tool Speed (rpm), feed (mm/min), rotation clockwise, coolant ON, activation of first cutting edge Approach of starting point and safety level (P1) Infeed to command dimension Milling (P2) Lift-off to safety level Approach of starting point for 2nd pass (P3) Infeed to command dimension Milling (P4) Lift-off to tool changing level
N130 X150 Y150 M9 Approach tool changing position, coolant OFF
N70
N50
N110
N90
Motion at feed rate Motion with rapid traverse
B557
Page 14

The work piece shown on the left is to be machined in the course of this module. First of all the edge of the contour is to be roughed out. For this the instruction G00, G01, G02, G41 and G40 will be used.
Section 6
Notes:
In the editor supplement the program commenced on page 2 by the following blocks. Specify the contour In the missing blocks.
N140 T=SF14 ;End mill 14 mm HSS N150 M6 N160 F280 S1400 M3 M8 D1 N170 G00 -10 Y3 Z2 N180 G01 Z-4 N190 G41 N200 G01 X4 Y10 N210 Y74 N220 G02 X6 Y76 I2 Y0 N230 G01 X68 N240 Y63.5 N250 X76 Y50 N260 Y42 N270 X64 N280 Y26 N290 X76 N300 Y12 N310 X68 Y4 N320 X12 N330 X0 Y16 N340 G40 N350 G01 X-10 Y12 N360 G00 Z150 N370 X150 Y150 M8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 E
Page 15
B557
Section 6
Notes:

6.2 Rounding and chamfering of edges Describe the contour using the instructions referred to so far. A milling cutter with a diameter of 8 mm is to be used (Name SF8). Start describing the contour at the point X13; Y5.
N380 N390 N400 N410 N420 N430 N440 N450 N460 N470
T=SF8 ;End mill 8 mm HSS M6 F280 S1400 M3 M8 D1 G00 X6 Y-7 Z2 G01 Z-5 G41 G01 X13 Y3 Y5 G03 X5 Y13 I8 J0 G01 Y75 RND=2
N480 X67 CHF=4 N490 Y65 N500 G03 X75 Y49 I20 J0 N510 G01 X75 Y43 CHR=1.5 N520 X61 Y43 RND=4 N530 X61 Y25 RND=4 N540 X75 Y25 CHR=1.5 N550 Y12 N560 G03 X68 Y5 I0 J-7 N570 G01 X10 N580 G40 N590 X6 Y-7 N600 G00 Z150 M9 N610 X150 Y150 N620 M30
Start point Infeed to depth Activation of radius compensation Approach the contour 1st contour point Milling of radius 8 Approach upper left contour point and rounding 2 mm to the next element Milling of corner of contour at chamfer 4 mm Approach starting point for the radius 20 mm Milling of radius 20 mm Approach of starting point of pocket and chamfering Approach upper corner of pocket and rounding 4 mm Approach lower corner of pocket and rounding 4 mm Approach end point of pocket and chamfering Approach starting point of radius 7mm Milling of radius 7 mm Leaving the contour Deactivation of radius compensation Retraction of cutter Retraction to tool changing level, coolant OFF Traverse to tool changing position
B557
Page 16

6.3 Mixed incremental and absolute programming Describe the contour using the instructions referred to so far. A milling cutter with a diameter of 8mm is to be used (Name SF8). Start describing the contour at the point X13; Y5.
Section 6
Notes:
All radii R4
N620 G00 X17.5 Y60.5 Z2 N630 G01 Z-3 M8 N640 G41 N650 N660 N670 N680 N690 N700 N710 N720 N730 N740 N750 N760 N770 N780 N790 N800 N810 N820 G01 X12 Y60.5 G01 Y52 RND=4 G01 X=IC(7.8) G01 X23.8 ang=-55 G01 Y41 RND=4 G01 X=IC(10) RND=4 G91 G01 Y18 RND=4 G01 X=AC(23) CHR=1.5 G01 Y=AC(69) RND=4 G01 X-11 RND=4 G90 G01 X12 Y60.5 G40 G01 X17.5 Y60.5 G00 Z150 M9 G00 X150 Y150 M30
Positioning above the centre of left upper pocket Plunging into the pocket and coolant ON Activation of Cutter radius compensation (climb milling) Approach of the contour 1st corner point with rounding to the next element Approach of starting point for 55 chamfer Oblique 55 2nd corner point with rounding to the next element 3rd corner point with rounding to the next element Switching to incremental dimensions 4th corner point with rounding to the next element 5th corner point with chamfering to the next element 6th corner point with rounding to the next element 7th corner point with rounding to the next element Switching to absolute dimensions Closing the contour Deactivation of Cutter radius compensation Retraction of the cutter Leaving the contour Traverse to tool changing position End of program
Page 17
B557
Section End
Notes:
B557
Page 18
B558
Program of subroutines
Brief description
Objective of the module: In this module you will get to know the use of subroutines. You will learn to write subroutines for contours with soft contour approach and departure with cutter radius compensation and how to call them up in a simple milling program. Description of the module: This module explains the programming with subroutines. The soft approach and departure of the contour will be used for contour machining. Content: The use and necessity of sub-routines Call-up of subroutines Programming of subroutines Summary Solution for the programming of subroutines

B558
B558
B558
Page 2
B558
Program of subroutines: Description This module explains the programming with subroutines. The soft approach and departure of the contour will be used for contour machining.
Program of subroutines: START
The use and necessity of sub-routines
Call-up of subroutines
Programming of subroutines
Summary
Solution for the programming of subroutines
Program of subroutines: END
Notes :
Page 3
B558
Section 2
Notes:
The use and necessity of subroutines

If contours are programmed that are used repeatedly, it is possible to do this using subroutines. There is a differentiation between local subroutines, which belong to a work piece and global sub-routines, which are generally usable. Subroutines have the file extension *.SPF (Subprogram File).
2.1 Global subroutines These subroutines can be used for all kinds of workpiece programs; they must be written keeping in mind the danger of possible collisions. Both programs using incremental or absolute dimensions can be used. Example: The machine table is to be positioned at a certain location for tool changing after the machining has been completed. The coordinates can therefore be stated with absolute values. In order to avoid collisions, Z must be positioned first followed by X/Y.
2.2 Local subroutines Local subroutines are often used where contours are repeated on the same work piece. If, for instance, a pocket is to be milled several times on one workpiece, it can be programmed just once and then repeated several times. Since the absolute dimension vary, the pocket must be programmed from a defined starting point, which is then approached in the main program. From there the pocket is then described with incremental dimensions. Example: The contour of a pocket must be milled at 2 different locations. Fill in the following program header into the editor. Explain the sentences in the table. By the way make yourself familiar with the editor. Mark the zero point in the drawing.
B558
Page 4
Call-up of subroutines
The choice of the type of dimensions depends largely on the usage of the subroutine. When programming the following principle must be kept in mind: When exit the subroutine, the status that existed before the call-up must be re-established. The subroutine is called up by its name and the number of times it is to be used. The number of repeats is programmed with the address P. At the end there must follow the instruction M17 (end of subroutine). After this the control jumps back to the calling-up place in the main program and continues with the next block. Main program N40 N50 G90 G00 X20 Y20 Z2 Contour P1 N10 G91 N20 G01 Z-5 N30 X10 N40 Y-10 N50 X-10 N60 Y10 N70 G90 N80 M17 N60 N70 N80 G01 Z2 G00 X50 Y20 Z2 Contour P2 Subroutine (contour) Explanation
Approach of the starting point
Section 3
Notes:
Call-up of the subroutine Contour for 1 pass Switching to incremental dimensions Plunging into the contour to Z3 Motion by 10 mm along X-axis in +direction Motion by 10 mm along Y-axis in -direction Motion by 10 mm along x-axis in -direction Motion by 10 mm along Y-axis in +direction Re-establish status of main program End of subroutine Retraction to safety level Approach of next starting point Call-up of the local subroutine contour for 2 passes Milling of the pocket to 8
N90
G01 Z2
Retraction to safety level Call-up of the global subroutine Workpiece change
N100 Workpiece change P1 G53 G00 z200 G53 x200 y200 M17 N110 M30
Zero point offset block-by-block OFF and retraction in Z-direction Zero point offset block-by-block OFF and retraction in X/Y direction End of subroutine End of main program
Page 5
B558
Section 4
Notes:
Below, you are asked to program the pocket as a subroutine (Name:UP_MODUL31). The subroutine is to be called up from the main program (Name: MODUL31).
Task 1: The workpiece has already been programmed in the program MODUL30.MPF. This is now to be copied, renamed in MODUL31.MPF and then modified. Change to the Program Manager. Open the program directory and select the program MODUL30.MPF.
By pressing the PROGRAM MANAGER button on the keyboard change to the Program Manager screen. In the workpiece directory select the program MODUL30.MPF with the blue cursor keys.
Copy the file by pressing the VSK 5 COPY.
With the now active VSK 6 PASTE insert the file into the directory-tree.
The program acknowledges the selection and copying in the status line.
The Paste window opens. Rename the file in MODUL31.MPF and accept with the VSK 8 OK.
B558
Page 6
Task 2: Commence a new subroutine by the name of UP_MODUL31.SPF and programme the following program lines with the respective supplements. The program starts at the centre cross.
Section 4
Notes:
N10 G N20 G G DISR= X5 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80 N90 N100 N110 N120 N130 G G DISR= X-5 N140 G N150 M
Switching to incremental dimensions Activate cutter radius compensation for climb milling with soft approach in a quarter circle r = 0.5
Contour description using climb milling
Deactivate cutter radius compensation with soft departure the contour in a quarter circle r = 0.5 Switching to absolute dimension programming End of subroutine
Task 3:
For solution see page 10
In the main program MODUL31.MPF delete all lines starting with block N620.
Open program MODUL31.MPF and set the cursor on N620. Mark and delete the selected fields.
Page 7
B558
Section 4
Notes:
Task 4: Alter the main program MODUL31.MPF such that the internal contours are machined using the subroutine. When positioning in the Z-axis care must be taken to consider the infeed amount (Z-4) per subroutine pass.
. N610 X150 Y150 N620 G X Y Z M With rapid traverse to the start-point of the upper left contour and coolant ON N630 .. P Call-up of subroutine for one pass N640 G01 Z1 Retraction from the pocket at feed rate N650 G... X Y Z With rapid traverse to the start-point of the upper right contour N660 .. P... Call-up of subroutine for two passes N670 G Z Retraction from the pocket at feed rate N680 G Z M... Departure in Z to the tool changing point and coolant OFF N690 G X Y Departure in X and Y to the tool changing point N700 M End of main program
For solution see page 11
B558
Page 8
Summary
Path information/Approach and Departure commands Instruction UP_... P1 M17 G147 G148 G247 G248 G347 G348 G340 G341 Meaning Subroutine call-up with number of repeats End of subroutine Approach with a straight Departure with a straight Approach with a quarter circle Departure with a quarter circle Approach with a semi-circle Departure with semi-circle Approach and departure in space Approach and departure in a plane
Section 5
Notes:
Parameter DISR
Explanation Radius of the tool centre path for approach and departure DISCL=... Distance of the end point for the rapid infeed motion Speed of the slow infeed motion
DISCL
FAD
Page 9
B558
Section 6
Notes:
Solution for the programming of subroutines

Solution for Task 2:
N10 G91 N20 G41 G247 DISR=0.5 x5
Switching to incremental dimensions Activate cutter radius compensation for climb milling with soft approach in a quarter circle r=0.5
N30 G01 Y9 RND=4 N40 X-10.8 CHF=2.12 N50 Y10 RND=4 N60 X-11 RND=4 N70 Y-17 RND=4 Contour description using climb milling N80 x7.8 N90 Y-5.71 ANG=-55 N100 Y-5.287 RND=4 N110 X10 RND=4 N120 Y9 N130 G40 G248 DISR=0.5 X-5 Deactivate cutter radius compensation and soft departure of the contour in a quarter circle r = 0.5 N140 G90 Switching to absolute dimension programming N150 M17 End of subroutine

Open the program MODUL31.MPF and set cursor on N620 by navigating with the blue cursor keys on the keyboard. Press the VSK 4 Mark to select the desired lines. Move the cursor with the cursor-down key until all lines are marked. Then press the VSK 7 Cut to delete all marked entries.
B558
Page 10
Solution for programming of subroutines

Section 6
Notes:
. N610 X150 Y150 N620 G00 X28.8 Y50 Z1 M8 N630 UP_Modul31 P1 N640 G01 Z1 N650 G00 X53.6 Y50 Z3 N660 UP_MODUL31 P2 N670 G01 Z2 N680 G00 Z150 M9 N690 G00 X150 Y150 N700 M30
With rapid traverse to the start-point of the upper left contour and coolant ON Call-up of subroutine for one pass Retraction from the pocket at feed rate With rapid traverse to the start-point of the upper right contour Call-up of subroutine for two passes Retraction from the pocket at feed rate Departure in Z to the tool changing point and coolant OFF Departure in X and Y to the tool changing point End of main program
Page 11
B558
Section End
Notes:
B558
Page 12
B559
Loops, jumps, repetitions
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working through this module you become familiar with the usage of loops, jumps and repetitions in a milling program. Description of the module: In the module you will learn about the commands for looping parts of the program, for jumping to certain blocks in the program and how to repeat certain sections of the program. Content: Label name, Parameter usage Jump instructions, Program section repetitions Example and tasks Summary Solution of the tasks

B559
B559
B559
Page 2
B559
Loops, jumps, repetitions: Description In the module you will learn about the commands for looping parts of the program, for jumping to certain blocks in the program and how to repeat certain sections of the program.
Loops, jumps, repetitions: START
Label name, Parameter usage
Jump instructions, Program section repetitions
Example and tasks
Summary
Loops, jumps, repetitions: END
Notes :
Page 3
B559
Section 2
Notes:
Label name, Parameter usage

2.1 Label name In order to repeat certain sections of a program or the jump to a certain section of the program, we make use of LABELS to mark the beginning/ end of certain sections of the program. In most cases a LABEL is used to mark the beginning, but when you want to perform repetions of sections of a program, then you require both beginning and end LABELS (refer to section 3.2 in this module). The LABEL must consist of at least two or a maximum of 8 characters. The first two characters must always be letters or underlines. The LABEL must always be followed by a colon. N100... N110 BL123: N120 G00 X10.. Assigning the name BL123 to a label
2.2 Parameter usage In some cases the use of parameters is highly advisable. For instance, the cutting values for the tools to be used can be assigned to parameters in the program header, which can then be used for programming instead of the cutting values themselves. The parameters are programmed with the address letter R and a number R1. Values can be assigned to these in the section Parameter or also in the program itself. ;T1-WSF Dr60 R1=200 ; n for WSF Dr60 Program header R2=30 ; vf for WSF Dr60 ... N100 T1 ; WSF Dr60 N110 M6 N120 S=R1 F=R2 M3 M8 D1 Assignment of speed and feed by means of N130 ... R1 and R2 Parameters can be used within the program for calculation of individual values or for themselves. For reason of the advance calculation by the control unit it is possible that undesirable effects on the active parameters might occur. This can be prevented by using the instruction STOPRE. The next block will only be executed after the previous block has been finished. For this STOPRE must be written in a block by itself. N10 R1=0 ... N110 BL123: N120 G00 x10.. N140 STOPRE N150 R1=R1+1 N160 EL123:STOPRE
The control unit waits until block N130 has been completed. Each time the block is run for machining R1 is increased by 1.
B559
Page 4
Jump instructions, Program section repetitions

3.1 Jump instructions Jump instructions can also be used within a program. They permit the omission of certain sections of the program or to jump back for repetitions. The instruction GOTOF is used to jump forward, while the GOTOB is used to jump backward. For this a search is carried out for the included label name or the block number before the jump to this location is carried out. ;T1WSF Dr60 R1=200 ; n for WSF Dr60 R2=30 ; vf for WSF Dr60 N10 GOTOF N100 N20 LB001: N90 GOTOF N170 N100 T1 ; WSF Dr60 N110 m6 N120 S=R1 F=R2 M3 M8 D1 N130 ... N160 GOTOB LB001 N170 T4
Section 3
Notes:
Jump to block N100
Jump to block N100
Jump back to label LB001
The jump instruction caused a change in the machining sequence.
3.2 Program section repetitions Program sections between two labels can be repeated any number of times as specified under the address P. For this the program jumps to the first stated label and executes all blocks of the program until the second label is reached. If the number of repetitions is greater than one, this procedure will be repeated as often as stated under address P.
1 2
;T1-WSF Dr60 R1=200 ; n for WSF Dr60 R2=30 ; vf for WSF Dr60 N10 T1 ; WSF Dr60 N20 M6 N30 S=R1 F=R2 M3 M8 D1 N40 G00 z2 N50 LB001: N50 G1 Z=IC(-10) N90 LE001: ... N160 Repeat LB001 LE001 P2 N170 T4
Jump back to Label LB001 and two repetitions between LB001and LE001
Page 5
B559
Section 4
Notes:
Example and tasks

2 Holes are to be drilled into the milled work piece. These holes are to be programmed using jumps and parameters.
Task 1: Copy the program file MODUL31.MPF in Program Manager. Rename this program to MODUL32.MPF. For explanations see Module B558 Subprogram techniques. Task 2: Open the program MODUL32.MPF and supplement the program by the following lines for the drilling.
. N690 G00 X150 Y150 N700 R1=... R2=... N710 T=NC-centre drill N720 M6 N730 R1= R2=... N740 S1000 F=... M3 M8 D1 N750 Repeat ... ... P1 N760 T=SPB8 N770 N775 N780 ...=8+(8*1/3) ...=50 N790 S800 F=R2 M3 M8 D1 N800 R...=8+(8*1/3) N810 ... LB001 LE001 p1 N820 G00 Z150 N830 X150 Y150 N840 M30 N850 N860 G... X... Y... Z... N870 GOTOF ... N880 LB002: N890 G... X... Y... Z... N900 Repeat N... N N910 N920 G01 Z=... F=... N930 G04 S2 N940 G01 Z... F=... N950 ...
Traverse to the tool changing point in x and y Set the parameter R1 (drilling and counter depth) and R2 (feed rate) to zero Request NC-centre drill larger 12 mm (for simulation SF10) Load NC-centre drill Specify depth for centring and feed rate Specify technology data for centring Execute program between the Labels LB001 and LE001 once Request drill diameter 8 mm (for simulation SF8) Load drill Advance evaluation Stop Specify depth for centring and countering in R1 and feed rate in R2 Specify technology data for the drill Specify depth for drilling (1/3 drill point) Execute the program between the Labels once Retraction in Z-direction Retraction in X- and Y-direction End of program Give the label the name LB001 Traverse to 1st drilling position Jump to block N920 Give the label the name LB002 Traverse to 2nd drilling position Execute blocks N920 to N940 Give the label the name LE001 Drill at feed rate Dwell after reaching the drilling depth for smoothing With double the feed rate move to z2 Jump back to Label LB002
B559
Page 6
Summary Loops/ jumps/repetitions

Instruction GOTOF Meaning Forward jump to destination mark GOTOF LB001 or GOTOF N110 Backward jump to destination mark GOTOB LB002 or GOTOB N10 Note: When using GOTOB and GOTOF care must be taken against endless loops. They call up each other repeatedly. Hence the program cannot leave this range. The use of block numbers as destination mark is not advisable. If the block number changes, there will be no automatic correction. REPEAT Repeats the section between the labels for the programmed number of times. Repeat LB002 LE002 P2 Note: The use of block numbers as destination mark is not advisable. if the block number changes, there will be no automatic correction. R... Parameter 1-99 R1 The next block will not be decoded until the previous block has been completed. Label name LB001: Note: Label names must have at least 2 and a maximum of 8 characters. The first 2 of which must be either letters or underlines. G04 Dwell G04 S2 Dwell for 2 revolutions G04 F2 Dwell for 2 seconds
Section 5
Notes:
GOTOB
STOPRE .:
Page 7
B559
Section 6
Notes:

Solution for task 2:
Traverse to the tool changing point in X and Y Set the parameter R1 (drilling and counter depth) and R2 (feed rate) to zero N710 T=NC-centre drill Request NC-centre drill larger 12 mm (for simulation SF10) N720 M6 Load NC-centre drill N730 R1=-5 R2=100 Specify depth for centring and feed rate N740 S1000 F=R2 M3 M8 D1 Specify technology data for centring N750 Repeat LB001 LE001 P1 Execute program between the Labels LB001 and LE001 once N760 T=SPB8 Request drill diameter 8 mm (for simulation SF8) N770 M6 Load drill N775 STOPRE Advance evaluation Stop N780 R1=8+(8*1/3) R2=50 Specify depth for centring and countering in R1 and feed rate in R2 N790 S800 F=R2 M3 M8 D1 Specify technology data for the drill N800 R1=8+(8*1/3) Specify depth for drilling (1/3 drill point) N810 Repeat LB001 LE001 P1 Execute the program between the labels once N820 G00 Z150 Retraction in Z-direction N830 X150 Y150 Retraction in X- and Y-direction N840 M30 End of program N850 LB001: N860 G00 X25 Y25 Z2 N870 GOTOF N920 N880 LB002: N890 G00 X50 Y25 Z2 N900 Repeat N920 N940 N910 LE001: N920 G01 Z=R1 F=R2 N930 G04 S2 N940 G01 Z2 F=R2*2 N950 GOTOB LB002 Label name LB001 Traverse to 1st drilling position Jump to block N920 Label name LB002 Traverse to 2nd drilling position Execute blocks N920 to N940 Label name LE001 Drill at feed rate Dwell after reaching the drilling depth for smoothing With double the feed rate move to Z2 Jump back to Label LB002
. N690 G00 X150 Y150 N700 R1=0 R2=0
B559
Page 8
B560
Mirror, offset, rotate, scale
Brief description
Objective of the module: With help of this module you will get to know commands for mirroring, shifting, rotating and scaling of contours. Description of the module: This module explains the use of the commands for the machining of identical contour elements in various positions. Content: Shifting Rotating Mirroring Scaling Summary Solutions

B560
B560
B560
Page 2
B560
Mirror, offset, rotate, scale: Description This module explains the use of the commands for the machining of identical contour elements in various positions.
Mirror, offset, rotate, scale: START
Shifting
Rotating
Mirroring
Scaling
Summary
Solutions
Mirror, offset, rotate, scale: END
Notes :
Page 3
B560
Section 2
Notes:
Shifting General introduction

The commands in this module are known as frames (calculation instructions). They can influence, cancel or condition each other. In our example a known contour, which is described in a subprogram, is to be milled in various positions and sizes. For this the zero point at the starting point of the contour of the subprogram must be rotated. In order to be able to rotate the program about the starting point of the sub-program, this point must be the zero point. Our work piece zero point (G54) lies in the middle of the work piece.
TRANS, ATRANS
The zero point can be shifted in the programmed axes by means of these commands. The command TRANS clears all active frames. ATRANS (additive shift) works incremental from the active frames.
Workpiece 1
Workpiece 2
Workpiece 3
Workpiece 4
ATRANS x30
ATRANS x30 TRANS x60 ATRANS x30
0 For instance in case of multiple settings of work pieces the zero point can be shifted and the main program repeatedly executed .
B560
Page 4
Shifting
In the following example the zero point is to be transformed to the starting point of the left hand contour.
Section 2
Notes:
Task 1:
Create a new file with the name MODUL34.MPF!
Task 2:
Programme the tool path for face milling the surface. Take into account that the zero point lies in the middle. The Face mill (FACE_MILL_D60) has a diameter of 60 mm, the work piece measures 80 x 80 mm.
N10 G54 G64 G17 SOFT N20 T=. N30 M. N40 S1000 F200 M3 M8 D1 N50 G00 X.... Y. Z. N60 G01 Z0 N70 X-80 N80 G00 Z2 N90 X80 Y-20 N100 G01 Z0 N110 X-80 N120 G00 Z150 N130 X150 Y150 M9
Task 3:
Load a milling cutter CUTTER_8, shift the zero point to the starting point of the contour and position the tool at this location. N140 T=.... N150 ... N160 S2000 F100 M3 M8 D1 N170 . X. Y. N180 G00 X... Y... Z... Call up the tool Tool change Technology data for the tool Shift the zero point additively Position the tool

B560
Section 3
Notes:
Rotating ROT, AROT

The coordinate system can be rotated by means of the command ROT or AROT. The counter-clockwise rotation is taken to be positive. The positive X-axis represents the zero-degree position. There are two ways of programming. Variant 1 Rotation about an axis AROT X.. Y.. Z.. Y+ + X+ The zero point has been rotated by 90 about the Z-axis. Variant 2 Rotation of the active plane AROT RPL... Y+ +
AROT Z=90
Y+
AROT RPL=90
Y+
X+ The active plane has been rotated by 90 about the Z-axis. The command ROT resets the coordinate system and all other active frames back to the original status.
Task 4:
Rotate the coordinate system by the required amount about the now valid zero point. Now plunge into the work piece with the milling cutter at a feed rate of 3 mm. Thereafter start the subprogram. Deactivate all frames. N190 N200 G Z... N210. N220 G00 Z2 N230. Rotate the coordinate system Plunge into the contour Call up subprogram UP_MODUL31 Retract to 2 mm above the work piece Deactivate all frames
Solution see page 12 B560
Page 6
X+
X+
Mirroring
MIRROR, AMIRROR With the command MIRROR or AMIRROR the coordinate system can be mirrored about the programmed axis or axes. In such a case the programmed coordinates are mirrored about the axis or axes by their sign. Variant 1 Mirroring an axis Y+ Y+
Section 4
Notes:
AMIRROR X0
X+
X+
Variant 2 Mirroring several axes
MIRROR X0 Y0
Y+ X+ X+
The command MIRROR resets the coordinate system and all other active frames back to the original status.
Task 5:
Mirror the work piece about the X-axis. Shift the zero point to the starting point of the contour and there rotate the coordinate system. Take into account the position of the positive X-axis. N240 .. X N250 A. X... Y... N260 G00 X... Y... Z2 N270 ... Mirroring the X-axis Shifting to the starting point of the contour Position the tool Rotate coordinate system additively

Y+
B560
Section 5
Notes:
Scaling SCALE, ASCALE

In some cases the scaling of contour elements is quite sensible. The existing contours can be scaled up or down by a given factor. The factor is defined following the command Scale for each individual axis.
SCALE y2
SCALE x2
SCALE x2 y2
ASCALE y2
ASCALE x2
SCALE
When programming with ASCALE the calculations are always referred to the presently valid coordinate system. With the command SCALE the values of the active zero point offset are taken as a basis. All presently active transformations (frames) like offset, mirror, scale are cancelled. If no value follows the command SCALE all frames are cancelled. The same applies to the command M30.
The value programmed under SCALE represents a factor. If this is >1 an enlargement takes place, in case of values <1 diminished. Care must be taken that radii are also affected. This can possibly lead to errors. Variant 1 ........Scaling of an axis
ASCALE X1.5
All X-values are multiplied by 1.5

Variant 2 .......Scaling of several axes
ASCALE X=1x1.5 Y=1x1.5

The scaling factor can also be calculated in the program by entering the formula.
B560
Page 8
Scaling Task 6:
Scale the X- and Y-axis. Let the control unit calculate the respective factor. Plunge into the work piece by 3 mm and cal up the subprogram UP_MODUL31. Traverse to the tool changing point. Terminate the main program. The scaling factor (Sf) is calculated from the formula:
Sf Dimension of command geometry 32.55 1,1625 Dimension of actual geometry 28
Section 5
Notes:
N280 ... X=/21.8 Y=32.55/.. N290 G... Z-3 N300 .. N310 G... Z200 N320 X150 Y150 M9 N330 M...
Scale additively the X- and Y-axis Plunge into the contour. Call the subprogram Retraction in Z Traverse to tool changing position End of program
Solution see page 13 Task 7:

Fill in the missing values for the blank piece and start a simulation.
... ...
... ...

B560
Section 6
Notes:
Summary of the instructions Frame - Concept (Calculation instructions)

TRANS X... Y... Z...
Absolute programmable zero point offset as referred to the presently valid, with G54 to G57 and G505 to G599 selected work piece zero point Additive programmable zero point offset as referred to the presently valid, selected or programmed zero point Shift value in direction of the stated axis Deactivation of programmable zero point offsets, previously programmed frames are cleared
ATRANS X... Y... Z...
X..... Y..... Z..... TRANS
ROT X.. Y.. Z.. RPL=.. AROT X.. Y.. Z.. RPL=.. X..... Y..... Z..... RPL= ..... ROT
Absolute programmable rotation as referred to the presently valid, with G54 to G57 and G505 to G599 selected work piece zero point Additive programmable rotation as referred to the presently valid, selected or programmed zero point Rotation angle in space: - Geometry axis that is being rotated Rotation angle in a plane: - angle by which the coordinate system Is rotated - (plane previously selected with G17 to G19) Deactivation of programmable rotation, previously programmed frames are cleared
SCALE X... Y... Z...
Absolute programmable enlarging or diminishing (scaling), as referred to the presently valid, with G54 to G57 and G505 to G599 selected work piece zero point Additive programmable enlarging or diminishing (scaling) as referred to the presently valid, selected or programmed zero point Scaling factor (smaller / greater 1) in direction of stated axis Deactivation of programmable enlarging or diminishing, previously programmed frames are cleared
ASCALE X... Y... Z... X..... Y..... Z..... SCALE
MIRROR X... Y... Z... AMIRROR X...Y...Z... X..... Y..... Z..... MIRROR
Absolute programmable mirroring as referred to the presently valid, with G54 to G57 and G505 to G599 selected work piece zero point Additive programmable mirroring as referred to the presently valid, selected or programmed zero point Coordinate axis, in which the signs are changed, (the value for X/Y or Z can be freely selected - e. g. X0/Y0/Z0) Deactivation of programmable mirroring, previously programmed frames are cleared
B560
Page 10
Solutions 7.1 Solution for Shifting
Section 7
Notes:

N10 G54 G64 G17 Soft N20 T="FACING_TOOL_D60" N30 M6 N40 S1000 F200 M3 M8 D1 N50 G00 X80 Y20 Z2 N60 G01 Z0 N70 X-80 N80 G00 Z2 N90 X80 Y-20 N100 G01 Z0 N110 X-80 N120 G00 Z150 N130 X150 Y150 M9

N140 T="CUTTER_8" N150 M6 N160 S2000 F100 M3 M8 D1 N170 ATRANS X-16.02 Y-10.02 N180 G00 X0 Y0 Z2 Call up the tool Tool change Technology data for the tool Shift the zero point additively Position the tool
Page 11
B560
Section 7
Notes:
Solutions 7.2 Solution for Rotating

N190 AROT Z-20 or (AROT RPL-20) N200 G01 Z-3 N210 UP_MODUL31 N220 G00 Z2 N230 TRANS or (ROT) Rotate the coordinate system Plunge into the contour Call up subprogram UP_MODUL31 Retraction to 2 mm above the work piece Deactivate all frames
7.3 Solution for Mirroring Solution for task 5:

N240 AMIRROR X0 N250 ATRANS X-16.02 Y-10.02 N260 G00 X0 Y0 Z2 N270 AROT Z-20 or RPL=-20 Mirroring the X-axis Shifting to starting point of the contour Position the tool Rotate coordinate system additively
B560
Page 12
Solutions 7.4 Solution Scaling Solution for task 6:

The scaling factor (Sf) is calculated from the formula:
Section 7
Notes:
Sf
Dimension of command geometry 32.55 1,1625 Dimension of actual geometry 28

Scale additively the X/Y axis Plunge into the contour. Call-up of subprogram Retraction in Z Traverse to tool change pos. End of program
N280 ASCALE X=26.35/21.8 Y=32.55/28 N290 G01 Z-3 N300 UP_MODUL31 N310 G00 Z200 N320 X150 Y150 M9 N330 M30

Fill in the missing values and start a simulation. In the program editor press the HSK 7 Simulation. The simulation window opens. Press the VSK 1.8 to extend the vertical softkey bar and press the VSK 2.5 Blank. The Blank input window with the following input mask opens. Insert the values like shown below.
Accept the values by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. Jump back to the VSK 1 by pressing the VSK 2.8. Press the VSK 1.1 and start the simulation run.
Page 13
B560
Section 7
Notes:
Solutions
The simulation run starts and ends (see picture below).
B560
Page 14
B565
Basics
Brief description
Objective of the module In this module you learn about the functions of the different components of a machine tool and how they work together. Description of the module: In this module you get to know the basic concepts and basic logic functions of the control unit, the possibility of extending the peripherals and common abbreviations. Content: Types of machine tools Advantages of the CNC controlled machine tool Basic concepts - basic logic functions Sample configurations of the Sinumerik Operate Drive system - example Machining centre Shortcuts and abbreviations

B565
B565
B565
Page 2
B565
Basics: Description In this module you get to know the basic concepts and basic logic functions of the control unit, the possibility of extending the peripherals and common abbreviations.
Basics: START
Types of machine tools
Advantages of the CNC controlled machine tool
Basic concepts - basic logic functions
Sample configurations of the Sinumerik Operate
Drive system example Machining centre
Shortcuts and abbreviations
Basics: END
Notes :
Page 3
B565
Section 2
Notes:
Types of machine tools

2.1 The conventional machine tool
2.2 The CNC controlled machine tool
B565
Page 4
Advantages of the CNC controlled machine tool

Low waste costs Low control costs Smaller optimal batch sizes Shorter cycle times Multi-shift work Multi-machine operation Higher efficiency Increase of the manufacturing capacity Rationalisation of the organisation Shortening of the delivery time Reduction of the set-up time Repetition accuracy does not depend on the operator
Section 3
Notes:
The CNC technology should not replace the worker or put more load on him, rather it shall: efficiently use the machine and the cutting tools shorten the ancillary time and waiting period produce better quality much faster. cover the constantly rising demand make detailed changes faster insure the competitiveness of the company on the market
Page 5
B565
Section 4
Notes:
Basic concepts - basic logic functions

4.1 Definition of main components: NC Numerical Control control in numerical form Computerized Numerical Control, numerical control with one or several microcomputer Direct Numerical Control, one or several CNC s receive their part programs from a central computer over a cable or network. Programmable Logic Controller, a programmable logic circuit. is used in the machine tools for adjusting the control.
CNC DNC PLC
4.2 CNC basic functions: A big colour monitor for the display, programming, simulation, operation and diagnosis. Operation with interactive dialogue with at least two switchable foreign language options. A bus-linked-, or integrated PLC to control the switching functions. Software end switches as a substitution of mechanical end-switches. Operational-/machine data logging, e.g. temperature error compensation, variable space encoding of the tools, tool failure and service life monitoring Additional functions: Axis block Powered tools Data interface Manual input Correction values Position set Program test Block masking/block search Re-approaching the contour
B565
Page 6
Sample configurations of the Sinumerik Operate

The following two graphics show sample configurations of the Sinumerik Operate, their optional components an their communication paths. Sample configuration of the SINUMERIK 840D sl:
Section 5
Notes:
Sample configuration of the SINUMERIK 828D:

Factory network (Industrial Ethernet)
2 x Handwheels
PLC E/A-Interface based upon PROFINET
Synchronos motor 3
Synchronos motor 2 Asynchronos motor
Synchronos motor 1
Page 7
B565
Section 6
Notes:
Driving mechanisms/positioning actions

A typical machining center with feed drives, main spindle drive and auxiliary drive is shown below.
Feed drives
Auxiliary drive
Main spindle drive
According to the drive tasks planed, controlled electrical drives for NCmachines are divided into the following: Feed drives for all axis, e.g. X, Y, Z. Main spindle drive, e.g. for the milling spindle of a machining centre, the spindle drive of turning machines or a grinding wheel drive. Auxiliary drive, e.g. for the tool changer, the circular table or the pallet switcher. Operation diagram of the position-regulated axis:
B565
Page 8

ASCII AS AT BA BCD BCS CAD COM COR CNC CPU CRC CUTOM DAC DB DBB DBW DBX DDE DIR DOS DTE DRV EMC ENC EPROM ESD FC FDD FPU FST GIA GUD HD HHU HMI IM IM-Adress INC INI I/O ISA JOG K-Bus LED LF MB MD MCP MCS MCU MDA American Standard Code for Information Interchange Automation System Advanced Technology Mode of Operation Binary Code Decimals Basic Coordinate System Computer Aided Design Communication Module Coordinate Rotation Computerized Numerical Control Central Processing Unit Cutter Radius Compensation Cutter Radius Compensation (Tool Radius Comp) Digital Analogue Converter Data Block in the PLC Data Block-Byte in the PLC Data Block-Word in the PLC Data Block Bit in the PLC Dynamic Data Exchange Directory Disk Operating System Data Terminal Equipment Driver Module Electromagnetic Compatibility Encoder Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Electro Static Discharge Function Call Feed Drive Floating Point Unit Feed Stop Gear Interpolation Data Global User Data Hard Disk Handheld Unit Human Machine Interface Interface Module Interface Module-Address Increment Initializing Data Input- / Output Industry Standard Architecture Jogging Communication Bus Light Emitting Diode Line Feed Mega Byte (Million Bytes) Machine Data Machine Control Panel Machine coordinate system Machine Control Unit Manual Data Automatic
Section 7
Notes:
Page 9
B565
Section 7
Notes:

MM MMC MPI MPF MSD MSTT NC NCK NCU NMI OI OP OPI P-Bus PC PCU Millimetre Man machine communication = HMI Multi Point Interface Main Program File Main Spindle Drive Machine Panel Numerical Control Numerical Control Kernel Numeric Control Unit Non Mask able Interrupt Operator Interface Operator Panel Operator Panel Interface Peripheral-Bus Personal Computer Personal Computer Unit. Component of the NC-control, which allows communication between operator and machine. Personal Computer Memory Card International Association Programming Device Programmable Logic Control Process Alarm Power Supply (SIMATIC S7-300) Point to Point Point to Point Random Access Memory (read write memory) Reference Point Approach Function Rapid Override Single Block Softkey Skip Block Software Sub Programm File System Files Tool Tool Change Tool Length Compensation Tool Offset Tool Radius Compensation User Frame Video Graphics Adapter Workpiece Coordinate System Work Piece Directory Zero Offset
PCMCIA PG PLC PRAL PS PTP P2P RAM REF ROV SBL SK SKP SW SPF SYF T TC TLC TO TRC UFR VGA WCS WPD ZO
B565
Page 10
B566
Operating elements
Brief description
Objective of the module: With help of this module you learn to recognise general operating elements of the Sinumerik Operate, and how to differentiate them from one another.
Description of the module: The general operation of a Sinumerik Operate will be described. Depending on the machine manufacturer the following operating elements can be used: Operator panels (OP) CNC-full keyboard Machine control panel (MCP) Content: Operator panel layouts of the Sinumerik Operate CNC-full keyboard (QWERTY - type) Machine control panel (MCP)

B566
B566
B566
Page 2
B566
Operating elements: Description The general operation of a Sinumerik Operate will be described. Depending on the machine manufacturer the following operating elements can be used: Operator panels (OP) CNC-full keyboard Machine control panel (MCP)
CNC-full keyboard Operating elements: START
Operator panel layouts of the Sinumerik Operate
Machine control panel
Operating elements: END
Notes :
Page 3
B566
Section 2
Notes:
Operator Panel layouts of the Sinumerik Operate

The operator panel (OP) consists of the following operating elements: Membrane keyboard with 8 + 4 horizontal and 8 vertical softkeys Colour display (10.4 Display on 828D, 15 Display on 840D sl) Front-USB-plug on operator panel front (840D sl), USB, CF-card, Ethernet on operator panel front (828D) Fully integrated QWERTY CNC-keyboard (828D)
2.1 Operator panel layout of the Sinumerik 840D sl: 5 3 2
1 1 2 3 4 5 Horizontal softkey strip (HSK) with 4 screen keys (2 each located on the left and right side) Vertical softkey strip (VSK) 15 TFT-colour display Front-USB-plug (Sinumerik 840D sl) , e.g. for connection of external memory media, mouse or keyboard Status-LED: Power Status-LED: Temp
2.2 Operator panel layout of the Sinumerik 828D 2 5 4 1 2 5 3 4 1 6 6 3
B566
Page 4

1 2 3 4 5
Section 2
Notes:
Horizontal softkey strip with 4 screen keys (2 each located on the left and right side) (HSK) Vertical softkey strip (VSK) 10,4 TFT-colour display USB, CF-card and Ethernet on panel front behind removable cover Ready-LED (Status red/green), NC-LED (Status LED of the NC) and CF-LED (write/read access on CF-card) behind lockable and removable cover Integrated QWERTY CNC-keyboard (for reference see section 3)
2.3. Horizontal and vertical Softkey bar (HSK/VSK) Softkeys are buttons, which are dynamically linked with programmed functions. These functions are presented on the monitor above the softkey bar (HSK) or to the left of the softkey bar (VSK) as a strip of icons. The 8 horizontal softkeys are used to access the individual operation sectors including further menu layers. There is an associated vertical menu strip/Softkey strip for each of the horizontal menu points. The 8 vertical Softkeys are functions associated with the presently selected horizontal Softkey. The function will be called up when the vertical softkey is pressed. The content of the vertical softkey bar can therefore change once again if a sub-function to the selected function is chosen. The horizontal softkey bar consists furthermore of: 4 screen keys (see pictures below) MACHINE-key: Calls-up the operating area MACHINE (in operating mode JOG, MDA or AUTO). Recall-key: Jumps to the next highest menu level. Extend-key: Extends the horizontal softkey bar. MENU SELECT-key: Calls the main menu for operating area selection.
Page 5
B566
Section 2
Notes:

2.4 Screen area
The screen is laid out as follows:

1 2 3 5 8 6 4 12 9
7 10
11
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
Operation sector Program path and name Status, program influence and program name Alarm and message line Channel operation messages Position readout for the axes Display of the active zero point and rotation

9 10 11 12
Display of: T = Active tool F = Present feedrate S = Actual spindle revolution Spindle load factor in percent Vertical softkey bar (VSK) Working window Horizontal softkey bar (HSK) Date and Time
B566
Page 6
CNC-full keyboard
According to the model of operating panel that is used, a CNC-keyboard can be integrated for operation and programming. The keys that are described here can also be located directly on the operator panel. The layout of the operating panel is described in the documentation of the machine manufacturer. Below follows a description of the basic keys of the CNC-Full keyboard. CNC-Full keyboard KB 483:
Section 3
Notes:
Alpha-Block
Hotkey-Block
Cursor-Block
Number-Block.
Alpha-Block:
The alpha-block features the letters A, ..., Z, the space key and the special character for the input of text. The hotkey-block serves the direct selection of operation areas. The cursor-block is used for navigation around the screen display. The number-block features the numbers 0 ... 9, the decimal point and special characters for the input of numerical characters and operators.
Hotkey-Block: Cursor-Block: Number-Block:
Keys in the Alpha-Block BACKSPACE Clears a value in the input field. If in edit mode, the character in front of the cursor will be cleared. TAB Indent the cursor by several characters. SHIFT If the Shift-key is held depressed, the upper character on keys with double usage will be entered. CTRL With the following key combinations navigation in the work plan and the G-Code-Editor is carried out: Ctrl + NEXT WINDOW: Jump to the beginning. Ctrl + END: Jump to the end. ALT ALT-Key
Page 7
B566
Section 3
Notes:
CNC-full keyboard
INPUT Accepts an edited value Opens / closes a directory Opens a file Keys in the Hotkey-Block MACHINE Opens up the operating area "Machine" (JOG, MDA, Auto). Corresponds to the yellow HSK 1 Machine PROGRAM Opens up the operating area "Program". The key corresponds to the yellow HSK 3 Program. OFFSET Opens up the operating area "Parameter (Tool list, Tool wear, Magazine, Work offset, User variable, Setting data). The key corresponds to the yellow HSK 3 "Parameter". PROGRAM MANAGER Opens up the operating area "Program manager. The key corresponds to the yellow HSK 4 "Program Manager". ALARM Opens up the actual Alarmlist-window. The key corresponds to the VSK 1"Alarm list" in the operating area Diagnostics. CUSTOM This key can be customized by the machine manufacturer. See the machine manufacturers documentation . Keys in the Cursor-Block ALARM CANCEL Clears an active alarm shown in the alarm and message line that is identified with this symbol. CHANNEL Selects a channel from 1 - n. HELP Opens the context-sensitive help window in a splitscreen view. In case of the G-Code editor the help documentation with intelligent support for programming instructions is called up. NEXT WINDOW Activates the next subwindow in the actual working window. By pressing CTRL + NEXT WINDOW in the G-Code editor window you can jump to the first line of the program code. PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN Paging up or down in a directory or the work plan.
B566
Page 8
CNC-full keyboard
Further keys in the Cursor-Block END Locates the cursor in the last input field of a parameter mask. In the G-code editor the cursor will be set to the end of the active line and by pressing STRG + END the cursor jumps to the end of the last line of the program. Cursor-Keys Navigates through the various fields or lines on the screen. While in a program listing, the cursor-to-the-rightkey opens a directory or a program. To change to the next level above the present level press the cursor-to-the-left-key. SELECT With this key you can select amongst several given alternatives. Keys in the Number-Block BACKSPACE Clears a value in the active input field. While in the edit mode, just the character in front of the cursor will be cleared. DEL Deletes the value in the parameter field. While in the edit mode, just the character behind the cursor will be deleted. INSERT Activation of the insertion mode or the pocket calculator. Opens a parameter menu in an input field if available. INPUT Accepts an edited value Opens/closes a directory Opens a file
Section 3
Notes:
Page 9
B566
Section 4
Notes:

Depending on the type of operating panel the machine manufacturer may be using either a SIEMENS or his own machine control panel for the operation of the machine. This section describes the standard-keys of the Siemens machine control panel. Depending on the machine further keys may be used; such information should be taken from the documentation by the machine manufacturer. Machine control panel MCP 483:
Below follows a description of the keys of the machine control panel and their function: EMERGENCY-STOP-key Press this key in the case of an emergency, i.e. if human life is endangered or if the machine or work piece could be damaged. All drives will be braked to a standstill with the greatest possible braking torque. Note: For further reactions that may be caused by pressing the EMERGENCY-OFF key please refer to the documentation by the machine manufacturer. RESET Stops the machining from executing the presently running program. The NC-control unit remains synchronized with the machine. It is now in the basic condition ready to commence a new program run. Clears an active alarm. JOG Selection of the operating mode JOG. TEACH IN Creation of programs in interactive mode with the machine. MDA Selection of the operating mode MDA (Machine Data Automatic). AUTO Selection of the operating mode Machine Auto.
B566
Page 10

SINGLE BLOCK Runs a program block-by-block (single block). REPOS Repositions and re-approaches a contour. REF. Point Approaches a reference point. VAR (Variable JOG step) Traverse through an incremental dimension with variable step lengths. Inc (Incremental JOG step) Traverse through an incremental dimension with a given step size of 1, ..., 10000 increments. The actual length of an incremental step depends on a machine datum. Note: Read the machine manufacturers documentation. CYCLE START Starts a program run. CYCLE STOP Stops a program run. Axis keys Axis (X, Y, Z, 4, 5, 6) selection. to
Section 4
Notes:
Direction keys For traversing an axis either in the positive or negative direction. RAPID For traversing an axis at rapid traverse rate (fastest speed). WCS MCS Toggling between the work piece coordinate system (WCS) and the machine coordinate system (MCS).
Page 11
B566
Section 4
Notes:

Feed / Rapid traverse override For increasing or reducing the programmed feedrate. The programmed feedrate is represented by 100% and can be varied within the range of 0% to 120%, in rapid traverse only up to 100%. The new adjusted value appears as an absolute and percentage value in the feed status display on the screen. FEED STOP Stops the machining of the currently running program, in order to stop the axes. FEED START Continuation of the program as from the present block and to increase the feedrate to the programmed value. Spindle override For increasing or reducing the programmed speed. The programmed speed corresponds to 100% and can be varied within the range of 0% to 120%. The new value thus selected appears as an absolute value and as a percentage in the speed status display on the screen. SPINDLE STOP To stop the spindle. SPINDLE START To start the spindle. Key switch Position 0 No key Access stage 7 Position 1 Key 1 black Access stage 6 Position 2 Key 1 green Access stage 5 Position 3 Key 1 red Access stage 4 Highest access right (Key switch) Lowest access stage
Increasing access rights
Further access rights (Access stage 3 - 0) are possible by means of passwords.
B566
Page 12
B567
Switching on the machine / control unit reference point
Brief description
Objectives of the module: In this module you learn how to switch on the machine and / or the control unit and how to approach the reference point of the axes.
Description of the module: Both the machine and the control unit must be switched on before any work can be done on the machine. Following this all axes with incremental measuring systems must be referenced in order to enable the control unit to establish the position of the axes within the machine coordinate system. There is no need to reference any axes equipped with absolute measuring system. In this case the control unit recognizes the position of the axes automatically. Content: Switching on the machine and the control unit Approaching the reference point of the axes

B567
B567
B567
Page 2
B567
Switching on the machine: Description Both the machine and the control unit must be switched on before any work can be done on the machine. Following this all axes with incremental measuring systems must be referenced in order to enable the control unit to establish the position of the axes within the machine coordinate system. There is no need to reference any axes equipped with absolute measuring system. In this case the control unit recognizes the position of the axes automatically.
Switching on the machine: START
Switching on the machine and the control unit
Approaching the reference point of the axes
Switching on the machine: END
Notes :
Page 3
B567
Section 2
Notes:
Switching ON the machine and the control unit

Switching ON sequence Please note the explicit switching ON rules as stated by the machine manufacturer.
1. Turn on the main switch of the machine. Note: Normally the main switch will be found on the switchgear cabinet.
2. All EMERGENCY-STOP keys of the machine must be released (operating panels, switchgear cabinet, etc.).
Note: The locations of the EMERGENCY-STOP keys are shown in the machine manufacturers documentation.
B567
Page 4
Switching on the machine and the control unit

3. Switch on the control unit. Depending on the individual machine this switch can be found on the operating desk or the switchgear cabinet of the machine or else the control unit is switched ON automatically when turning the main switch. Note: For more information see the documentation of the machine manufacturer The control unit boots. While booting a welcome image is displayed, followed by the basic screen of the SINUMERIK HMI (displayed below):
Section 2
Notes:
4. Any fault messages that might be displayed can be cleared by means of the RESET-key on the machine control panel.
Page 5
B567
Section 3
Notes:
Approaching the reference point of the axes 3.1 Referencing sequence
Before referencing the axes a check must be carried out to ensure that there is no danger of collisions during the approach.
Machines with incremental measuring systems must be referenced after switching ON in order to synchronize the measuring system with the machine coordinate system. Press the JOG-button on the machine control panel. Press the REF.POINT-button on the machine control panel. The respective LEDs above the keys are illuminated. The referencing screen 1 opens up with all the axes that need referencing (see image below).
3.2 Approaching the reference point

Depending on the commissioning of the machine there are various ways of referencing. Note: For further details see the machine manufacturers documentation.
3.2.1. Automatic referencing

Press the CYCLE START-button on the machines control panel. The axes will be referenced one after the other.
B567
Page 6
Approaching the reference point of the axes 3.2.2 Manual referencing

Press the FEED START-button on the machine control panel. Select an axis for referencing.
Section 3
Notes:
Press
or
Note: Refer to the machine manufacturer's documentation. Select all other axes one after the other and start the reference point approach by pressing either + or -.
While referencing confirm the feed override setting, since the axes are traversed at the feed rate that has been preset by means of a machine datum.
Axes that have been referenced are shown on the display with a Reference point symbol preceding the axis name. See the screen below.
The axis is referenced as soon as the reference point is reached. The actual value display is set to the reference point value. From now on, path limits, such as software limit switches, are active. End the function via the machine control panel by selecting operating mode AUTO or JOG.
B567
Section End
Notes:
B567
Page 8
B568
Basics of operation
Brief Description
Objective of the module: In this module you learn about the screen layout of the display panel of the Sinumerik Operate, as well as the the basic operation of the control using softkeys and buttons. Description of the module: This module describes the relevant parts of the main screen with help of the basic screen layout. In addition to the topic above, this module covers the selection of parameters with respect to units (mm/inch) used and the usage of the calculator within the input masks. Content: Basics of operation Considerations for the input masks

B568
B568
B568
Page 2
B568
Basic operations: Description This module describes the relevant parts of the main screen with help of the basic screen layout. In addition to the topic above, this module covers the selection of parameters with respect to units (mm/inch) used and the usage of the calculator within the input masks.
Basic operations: START
Basics of operation
Considerations for the input masks
Basic operations: END
Notes :
Page 3
B568
Section 2
Notes:
Basics of operation 2.1 Main screen of the HMI in the operating mode JOG
In this section the parts of the main screen will be declared.
1 2 3 5 7 8 4 6 12
10
11 1
2 3
4 5 6 7
Active operating area and mode Program path and name Status, program influence and channel name Alarm and message line Channel operation messages Date and time

8 9
Position readout for the axes Display of the active zero point, rotation, mirroring and scaling Working window Horizontal softkey bar Vertical softkey bar
10 11 12
Display of: T = Active tool F = Present feedrate S = Spindle Spindle load factor in percent
B568
Page 4
Basics of operation
1
Section 2
Notes:
Active operating area and operating mode
(The display mode depends on the selected operating mode on the machine control panel (MCP)). Display area Description The operating mode Machine Manual (setup mode) can be selected by pressing the JOG-button on the machine control panel. Functions adjusted under T,S,M like tool selection, work offset and spindle control affect all movements in the manual operating mode. Another function using the JOG-Mode is the approaching of the reference point (REF.POINT). Hint: If you use a mouse to operate the HMI Sinumerik Operate, a click in the upper left corner of the display area (here the upper case M with over line and underline) opens the yellow horizontal- and vertical softkey bar, from which you can access comfortably all the main functions of the control unit.
2
Program path and name
NC programs can be created, modified and selected in the three main directories on the NC of the type DIR.
Folder Part programs Part programs have the file extension MPF and are stored in a separate part programs folder. Display in editor Description The shown program path to the left indicates that the selected program TEST.MPF can be found on the NC. The MPF in the program path refers to the directory Part programs.
Folder Subprograms Subprograms have the file extension SPF and are stored in a separate subprogram folder Display in editor Description The selected program TEST.SPF is stored on the NC in the SPF subprogram folder as the folder path to the left points out.
Folder Workpieces Workpiece programs have the file extension WPD and are stored in a separate workpiece folder. Display in editor Description The selected program TEST.MPF is stored on the NC in the created workpiece directory TEST.WPD The WKS in the program path refers to the directory Workpieces.
Page 5
B568
Section 2
Notes:
Basics of operation
Status, program influence and channel name Description Reset Interrupted Activated
Display area
Alarm and message line
In case of a syntax error in the program code or a hardware malfunction (e.g. emergency stop) an alarm number with explaining text shows up. MCP Display area Description
After correcting the error (correction of the hardware malfunction) you can reset the error message with the RESET-button. CNC-keyboard By pressing the ALARM-key on the keyboard the Alarm list-window shows up, with a list of all active alarm messages.
After correcting the error (correction of the syntax error) you can reset the error message with the ALARM CANCEL-key on the keyboard.
B568
Page 6
Basics of operation
Chanel operation messages Display of operation messages with symbols. Display area Description Attention: In case of conditions with this symbol a manual operation is required. Operation in case of the message Stop: After the fault remedy the machining program will be continued after pressing NC-Start. Operation in case of the message Wait: After a successful acknowledgement of the fault the machining program will be continued automatically. Stop: No NC-Ready Stop: BAG-Ready (mode-of-operation group) Stop: EMERGENCY-STOP activated Stop: Alarm with Stop activated Stop: M0/M1 activated Stop: Block completed in single block mode Stop: Cycle-Stop activated Wait: Read-in release missing (Part program is not further processed by NC) Wait: Feed enable missing Wait: Axis enable missing Wait: for Feed override Stop: NC-block erroneous Wait: for external NC-blocks Wait: Spindle enable missing Wait: Axis feed rate is 0 Stop: No channel ready Stop: SERUPRO has reached the search destination and the NCK has stopped. SERUPRO is the abbreviation for Search Run by Program test and represents a new kind of block search. In case of conditions with this symbol, a manual operation is usually not necessary. Wait: Remaining dwell time in seconds or in spindle revolutions Wait: HiFu-acknowledgement missing Wait: Exact stop not reached Wait: for positioning axis
828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate Page 7 5
Section 2
Notes:
B568
Section 2
Notes:
Basics of operation
Display area Description (continuation) Note: In case of conditions with this symbol a manual operation is usually not required. Wait: for spindle Wait: for another channel Wait: due to a SYNACT-instruction Wait: Block advance activated Wait: for tool change acknowledgement Wait: for gear change Wait: for closed loop Wait: for tapping start Wait: for safe operation Halt: oscillation activated Wait: during access to a system variable
6
Date/Time
Current date and time are shown in the upper right corner of the screen.
Display of T,F,S and spindle-value Description T: (Tool) Name of the active tool. The optional display of TC is only available if a swivel head table is present. F: (Feed) Display of the active feed rate for the current machining (top: actual feed rate, large digits during machining), as well as the display of the programmed feed rate (bottom) and the feed override in %. S: (Spindle) Display of the active spindle speed for the current machining (top: actual speed, large digits during machining), as well as the display of the programmed spindle speed (bottom) and the speed override in %.
Display area
B568
Page 8
Basics of operation
8
Section 2
Notes:
Position display for the axes Description With the key WCS MCS on the MCP or the VSK 7 Act. vls. MCS it is possible to switch between the machine coordinate system (MCS) and the workpiece coordinate system (WCS). Display of the available axes with axis assignment and position data in the machine coordinate system (Mach).
MCP/Display area
Display of the available axes with axis assignment and position data in the work piece coordinate system (WCS). However, programmable zero offsets are not taken into consideration in the display.
Display of the active zero point offsets, rotation, mirroring and scaling
The machine coordinate system (MCS) does not consider zero point offsets in comparison to the workpiece coordinate system (WCS). Display area Description Name of the currently active work offset, rotation, mirroring, rotation and scaling for the present machining sequence.
10
Work window
Depending on the pressed horizontal softkey the associated parameter fields and help pictures are displayed. Here the T,S,M-mask is shown.
Page 9
B568
Section 2
Notes:
Basics of operation
11
Horizontal softkey bar (HSK)
The user interface consists of different subsections. At the bottom of the screen is the horizontal softkey bar (HSK) containing 8 softkeys (see Section 2.2.1 in this module). The selection of a new window is made by pressing the buttons just under the softkeys. If the number of functions exceeds the representation capacities of the maximum of 8 softkeys than a partitioning in two different horizontal softkey bars occurs. The change over forth and back takes place with the Menu extend-key on the operator panel.
12
Vertical softkey bar (VSK)
The available functions and operating modes can be selected from the keys right beside the vertical softkey bar (VSK) on the right hand side of the screen. If the number of functions exceeds the representation possibility capacity of the maximum of 8 softkeys than a partitioning in two different vertical softkey bars occurs. The changeover takes place with the: Forward-key or the Backward-key (VSK 8).
2.2
Operating with softkeys and buttons
The Sinumerik Operate separates into 6 different operating areas (Machine, Parameter, Program, Program Manager, Diagnostics, Start-up), 3 operating modes (JOG, MDA, AUTO) and 2 functions (REPOS, REFPOINT). By pressing the button MENU SELECT on the operator panel the active screen will be overlaid with the display of a yellow horizontal softkey bar at the bottom and a yellow vertical softkey bar on the left side of the screen. They consist of 6 operating area softkeys in the HSK and 3 operating mode-, as well as 2 function softkeys in the vertical softkey bar.
B568
Page 10
Basics of operation
2.2.1 Horizontal softkey bar (HSK) Display area Description By pressing HSK 1 Machine the operating are Machine will be called up. See module B569 - Operating area machine.
Section 2
Notes:
By pressing the HSK 2 Parameter the operating area Parameter will be called up. See module B573 - Operating area Parameter.
By pressing the HSK 3 Program the operating area Programm will be called up. See module B574 - Operating area Programm.
By pressing the HSK 4 Program-Manager the operating area Program-Manager will be called up. See module B575 - Operating area ProgramManager. By pressing the HSK 5 Diagnose the operating area Diagnose will be called up. See module B576 - Operating area Diagnose.
By pressing the HSK 6 Start-up the operating area Start-up will be called up. See module B577 - Operating area Start-up.
2.2.2 Vertikale Softkey-Leiste (VSK) Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1 AUTO the operating mode AUTO will be called up See module B572 - Operating mode AUTO. By pressing the VSK 2 MDA the operating mode MDA will be called up. See module B571 - Operating mode MDA. By pressing the VSK 3 the operating mode JOG will be called up. See module B570 - Operating mode JOG.
Page 11
B568
Section 2
Notes:
Basics of operation
Display area Description (continuation) By pressing the VSK 4 REPOS the function REPOS will be called up. See module B569 - Operating area Machine. By pressing the VSK 5 REF POINT the function REF POINT will be called up. See module B569 - Operating area Machine.
B568
Page 12
Notes for the input masks

3.1 Measurement units [metric/imperial]
Section 3
Notes:
The measurement units of all parameters used in the entire documentation are defined in the metrical system (mm). The following table compares the equivalent imperial measuring units (inch and foot) with the metric system. Note: A description how to change between metric (mm) and imperial system (inch) can be found in the module B570 - Operating mode JOG. Metric mm mm/tooth mm/min mm/rev m/min 3.2 Inch/foot in in/tooth in/min in/rev ft/min Parameter selection
The following described selection of parameters in an input mask can be called in every entry field where parameter selection is possible and numerical input is not possible. A list of possible parameters is displayed by pressing "INSERT"-key on the keyboard Navigation through the menu occurs with the blue cursor-keys. Hint: Navigation in long lists can be short cutted by pressing the initial letter or number of the parameter directly on the keyboard. Each additional pressed letter continuous to restrict the selection. If the selected entry is orange highlighted (actual cursor position) then with pressing on of the yellow INPUT-keys on the keyboard the chosen value is taken over into the input field. Alternatively you can switch through a list of possible choices in the input field by pressing the blue SELECT-key repeatedly.
Page 13
B568
Section 3
Notes:
Notes for the input masks

3.3 Pocket calculator
The calculator can be called-up from every part of the operating area. If a numerical entry is necessary in an input field you can open the pocket calculator by pressing the equal sign (=) on the keyboard. If their is already a value existing in the input filed e.g. 100 , then the value will be captured into the calculator window. Softkeys Description By pressing the softkey Delete every input or outcome value in the calculator will be deleted. For calculating values the four basic arithmetical operators are available, as well as.. square root (R) and. Square (S). If you enter the letter R with a following number in the calculator and press the Calculate button than the square root of the entry will be calculated. If you place first a S instead of a R in front of the number, the square will be calculated. A mathematical function with values in parenthesis allows the calculation of complex mathematical expressions. The softkey Accept transfers the result to the input field and closes the pocket calculator independently. The button Cancel closes the pocket calculator.
B568
Page 14
B569
Operating area "Machine"
Brief Description
Objective of the module: In this module you learn how to work with the different options of the operating area "Machine".
Description of the module: In this module the basic menu is explained, with respect to each operating options. The basic menu consists of a yellow horizontal softkey bar (with 6 operating areas) at the bottom and a yellow vertical softkey bar (with 3 operating modes and 2 functions) at the right hand side of the screen. Depending on the elective operation mode (JOG, MDA, AUTO) a different window option (HSK) and function option (VSK) is displayed in the operating area "Machine".
Content: Operating area "Machine"

B569
B569
B569
Page 2
B569
Operating area machine: Description In this module the basic menu is explained, with respect to each operating options. The basic menu consists of a yellow horizontal softkey bar (with 6 operating areas) at the bottom and a yellow vertical softkey bar (with 3 operating modes and 2 functions) at the right hand side of the screen. Depending on the elective operation mode (JOG, MDA, AUTO) a different window option (HSK) and function option (VSK) is displayed in the operating area "Machine".
Operating area machine: START
Operating area machine: END
Notes :
Page 3
B569
Section 2
Notes:
Operating area "Machine".

2.1 Selecting the operating area "Machine"
The operating area "Machine" can be selected as follows: Press the button "MENU SELECT" on the operator panel . The actual operator interface will be overlaid with the display of a basic menu containing the yellow horizontal softkey bar (with the 6 operating areas: Machine, Parameter, Program, Program manager, Diagnostics and Start-up) and the yellow vertical softkey bar (with 3 operating modes: JOG, MDA, AUTO and 2 functions: REPOS, REFPOINT).
By pressing the HSK 1 "Machine" depending on the formerly chosen operation mode: JOG (see module B520) MDA (see module B521) AUTO (see module B522) there will be different window options (HSK) and function options (VSK) available in the operating area "Machine",
After pressing the HSK 1 "Machine" (selecting the operating area "Machine") in the operating mode "JOG" the "Machine" operator interface opens up (see the following image).
B569
Page 4
Section 2
Notes:
You can switch to the operating modes "JOG", "MDA" or "AUTO" in the operating area "Machine" immediately by pressing the respective button on the machine control panel, or by pressing the button MENU SELECT first and then the corresponding VSK. 2.2 Vertical softkey (VSK) bar of the main menu Display section Description By pressing the VSK 1 "AUTO" in the operating area "Machine", the operation mode "AUTO" will be called up. See module B572 - Operating mode "AUTO". By pressing the VSK 2 MDA in the operating area "Machine" the operation mode MDA will be called up. See module B571 - "Operating mode MDA" By pressing the VSK 3 JOG in the operating area Machine the operating mode "JOG" will be called up. See module B570 - "Operating mode JOG". After a program interruption (CYCLE STOP) and after traversing the axis you can reposition the axis to a saved position by pressing the VSK 4 REPOS. By pressing the VSK 5 "REF POINT" in the operating mode "JOG" or "MDA" you can approach the reference points.
Page 5
B569
Section End
Notes:
B569
Page 6
B570
Operating mode JOG
Brief description
Objective of the module: In this module you learn the different options of the operating area "Machine" in the operating mode "JOG". Description of the module: In this module the softkeys of the Sinumerik Operate, available in the manual mode (setup- and basic functions), will be described. Content: Operating mode "JOG" Tool-, spindle- and machine commands (T,S,M) Set Work offset (Set WO) Measure workpiece Measuring a tool Position Face milling Handwheel Synchronized actions Settings

B570
B570
Page 2
B570
Operating mode jog: Description In this module the softkeys of the Sinumerik Operate, available in the manual mode (setup- and basic functions), will be described.
Operating mode jog: START Synchronized actions Operating mode "JOG" Settings Tool-, spindleand machine commands (T,S,M)
Operating mode jog: END
Set Work offset (Set WO)
Measure workpiece
Measuring a tool
Position
Face milling
Handwheel
Notes :
Page 3
B570
Section 2
Notes:
Operating mode JOG

Operation mode JOG is used, for setting up the machine for program runoff or if you simply want to traverse the axes on the machine: Reference point approach, i.e. calibration of the position measuring system Preparing a machine for executing a program in automatic mode, i.e. measuring tools, measuring the workpiece and, if necessary, defining the work offsets used in the program Traversing axes, e.g. during a program interruption Positioning axes 2.1 Selecting the operating mode JOG
The operating mode "JOG" can be selected as follows: Press the JOG button on the machine control panel (MCP). The operating mode JOG opens directly. - OR Press the button MENU SELECT on the machine control panel. Press the VSK 1 JOG in the yellow vertical softtkey bar on the right hand side of the screen to switch directly to the operating mode JOG. Then Switch to the operating area Machine by pressing the MACHINE key on the operator panel or on the keyboard or press the MENU SELECTkey on the operator panel and the yellow HSK 1 Machine. The following screen opens:
B570
Page 4
Operating mode JOG

The following functions are offered in the horizontal and vertical softkey bar of the operating area "Machine" ( see section 2.2 and 2.3). 2.2 Vertical softkey bars 1 and 2 Description The most important G-functions are displayed in a sub-window by pressing the VSK 1.1 "G functions". Available auxiliary functions are displayed in a subwindow by pressing the VSK 1.2 "Auxiliary functions" at the time of the output. By pressing the VSK 1.7 "Act. vls. MCS", the coordinate system will be toggled between the machine coordinate system (MCS) and the workpiece coordinate system (TCS). Note: Refer to the machine manufacturers documentation. By pressing the VSK 1.8 "Forward" on the operator panel (OP) the selection of additional softkeys on the vertical softkey bar is possible By pressing the VSK 2.2 "All G functions" all Gfunctions will be shown. By pressing the VSK 2.6 "Zoom act. val." all actual axes positions in the selected coordinate system as well as the currently active feed rate and feed override of each individual axis are displayed full screen. In addition all active zero point offsets, transformations and the T,F,S data is being displayed in the foot line. Note: If the machine is in the sub-mode REPOS, then the in manual mode traversed path difference is also being displayed. By pressing the VSK 2.8 "Back" on the operator panel (OP) the vertical softkey bar switches back to the menu of the VSK 1.
Section 2
Notes:
Display area
Section 2
Notes:
Operating mode JOG

2.3 Horizontal softkey bar 1 and 2 Description By pressing the HSK 1 "T,S,M" the input screen "T,S,M" will be activated. By pressing the HSK 2 "Set WO" the input screen for setting the work offset will be activated. By pressing the HSK 3 "Meas. workp. the input mask for measuring a workpiece will be activated. By pressing the HSK 4 "Meas. tool" the function "Measure tool" will be activated and the extended options "Length/Radius manual", "Length/Radius auto",and "Calibrate Probe" will be available in the vertical softkey bar. By pressing the HSK 5 "Face mill." the input screen "Face milling" will be activated. By pressing the HSK 7 "Position" the input screen "Position" will be activated. By pressing the "Extend"-button on the operator panel (OP) more softkeys on the HSK are available.
Display area
This symbol on the right of the dialogue line indicates that more options on the HSK are available. This symbol indicates that you are in the expanded softkey bar. By pressing the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" the input mask for traversing the axis in machine coordinate system (MCS) or workpiece coordinate system (WCS) will be available. By pressing the HSK 2.7 "Synchr. Action." the screen which shows the current synchronized actions is displayed. By pressing the HSK 2.8 "Settings" a window opens up where you can adjust the settings for manual operation on the Sinumerik Operate.
B570
Page 6
Tool-, spindle- and machine commands (T,S,M)

3.1 Selecting the function "T,S,M" (Tool, spindle and machine commands) By pressing the HSK 1 "T,S,M" in operation area Machine under operation mode JOG the following input mask will be displayed on the screen .
Section 3
Notes:
3.2
Vertical softkey bar (VSK) Description By pressing the VSK 2 "Tool" the tool list opens on the screen. See module B573 - "Operating area Parameter". By pressing the VSK 3 "Work offset" a list with the zero point offsets will be displayed. Refer to Work offset section 4 in this module and module B573 - "Operating area Parameter". By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate.
Display area
Section 3
Notes:

3.3 Parameters of "T,S,M" (Tool, spindle and machine commands)
Input mask for tool-, spindle- and machine commands: Values can be entered directly in the orange marked input fields or by selecting predefined parameters with the SELECT-key. Alternatively the INSERT-button in the marked cursor field opens a select menu of all possible parameters, in which you can navigate with the Tabkey as well as the blue cursor-up- and cursor-down-down buttons. The button INPUT takes over the selected values. In order to be independently of country specific measuring units [metric/ imperial] not all units are displayed in the input masks. See module B568 - "Basic operations". In this documentation the measuring units are always metric.
Parameter T D Spindle
Unit
Meaning Tool name: e.g.: T12 or Cutter_7 (alphanumerical). Cutting edge number of the tool.
[rpm]
Spindle speed (revolutions per minute, numerical). Spindle machine functions: (Make a selection using the "SELECT"-key on the keyboard). No selection is made.
Spindle M funct.: Empty field Right(M 3)
Clockwise rotation of the spindle. Left (M 4) Counter clockwise rotation of the spindle. Off (M 5) Spindle is stopped. Positioning (SPOS) Spindle positioning: Spindle is positioned to the desired position. Manufacturer defined M-functions. By inserting the number of the function, a corresponding M-function is selected. Refer to the machine manufacturers table for the correlation between the meaning and the number of the function.
Other M funct..:
B570
Page 8

Parameter Work offset: None Basic reference G54 G55 G56 G57 Unit Meaning (continuation) Alternative parameter options: The actual value of the work offset refers to the machine zero point, after approaching the reference point. In contrast a machining program refers to the workpiece zero point. This offset is to be entered as zero point offset. You can select work offsets from the tool list of settable work offsets via the "Work offset" softkey. See module B573 - "Operating area Parameter". Unit of measure.: none mm inch Machining plane: G17 G18 G19 Gear stage: (XY) (ZX) (YZ) Specification of the gear stage (none, auto, I - V). Stop-Position: [Degree] Input of the spindle position in degrees. Note: This parameter shows up by selecting the spindle M-function . Note: With CYCLE START the inserted values will be executed. The entries in the option fields will be deleted, ready for new inputs. [mm] [inch] Note: The setting made here has effect on the programming. Alternative parameter options:
Section 3
Notes:
Section 4
Notes:
Work offset
4.1
Selecting the function "Work offset"

By pressing the HSK 2 "Set WO" in operation area Machine under operation mode JOG the input field for the programming of a work offset will be opened, like displayed below.
Input value:
By selecting an axis you can insert a value for the zero point offset in the orange marked field (see the picture above). The navigation through the axis-fields can be accomplished by pressing the blue cursor-up and cursor down keys on the keyboard. The slider on the right side of the subwindow indicates that there are more axis values available, that can be reached by using the cursor-down key.
Important:
The horizontal softkey 2 "Set WO" is only selectable if the workpiece coordinate system is selected and a zero point offset (in this example G54) is active. The entered values for a zero point offset of the axis will be accepted and displayed in the workpiece coordinate system (WCS). The difference between the original position to the new entered value will be written to the active zero point offset.
B570
Page 10
Set work offset (Set WO)

4.2 Vertical softkey bar Description By pressing the VSK 1 "X=0" the position of the Xaxis will be reset to zero. By pressing the VSK 2 "Y=0" the position of the Yaxis will be reset to zero. By pressing the VSK 3 "Z=0" the position of the Zaxes will be reset to zero. By pressing the VSK 4 X=Y=Z=0 the position of the X/Y/Z-axis will be reset to zero. By pressing the VSK 5 "Delete active WO" the zero point offset of all axes is set back to zero. By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate. Note: After setting a position or deleting a zero point offset you switch back automatically to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate.
Section 4
Notes:
Display area
4.3
Setting the "Work offset" Press the HSK 1 "T,S,M" to activate the T,S,M (Tool-, spindle- and machine) -mode. In the input mask select the input field "Work offset". By pressing the "INSERT"-key on the keyboard, an option menu opens where you can make the desired selection of possible zero point offsets. You can navigate through this menu by means of the blue cursor-up- and cursor-down-keys on the keyboard. Hint: Navigation in long lists can be easier by pressing the initial letter or number of the parameter directly. Each additionally pressed letter continuous to restrict the selection. When the desired zero point offset is marked orange, you can accept this value by pressing the yellow INPUT-key on the keyboard. Alternatively you can toggle through all possible options by pressing the "SELECT"-key repeatedly. By pressing the button "CYCLE START" on the machine control panel the chosen zero point offset is activated.
Section 4
Notes:
Set work offset (Set WO)
4.4 Deactivating the "Work offset" Press the HSK 1 "T,S,M" to select the operation mode T,S,M. The T,S,M subwindow opens (see picture above). In the "T,S,M" input mask select the input field "Work offset". By using one of the previous described selection methods select the empty input field. Press the button "CYCLE START on the machine control panel (MCP) and the "Work offset" will be deactivated.
B570
Page 12
Measure workpiece
5.1 Selecting the function Measure workpiece In the operating area Machine under the operating mode JOG press the HSK 3 "Meas. workp." to open the Measure workpiece window shown below.
Section 5
Notes:
The reference point for programming a workpiece is always the workpiece zero. You can determine the workpiece zero on the following workpiece elements: Edges (Set edge, Align edge) Corner (Rectangular corner) Hole (1 Hole, 2 Holes, 3 Holes, 4 Holes)) Spigot (Circular spigot, rectangular spigot) The workpiece zero can be measured either manually or automatically. Measuring manually: For manual measuring their are parameters that depend upon tool type, and therefore are only available for the particular case. The tool must be manually approached to the workpiece. You can use edge probes, sensing probes, or dial gauges with known radii and lengths. You can also use any other tool of which you know the radius and length. The tools used for measuring must not be electronic probes. Measuring automatically: For automatic measurements always use electronic 3-D or mono workpiece probes. You must calibrate the electronic workpiece probes beforehand. First position the workpiece probe manually. As soon as you start the process with the "CYCLE START" key, the workpiece probe automatically approaches the workpiece at measuring feedrate and then returns to the starting position at rapid traverse. The machine manufacturer must first set the appropriate machine parameters (e.g. the measuring feedrate). Note: During all measurements the override of the feedrate should be set to 100%.
Section 5
Notes:
Measuring workpiece
5.2 Vertical softkey bar Description By pressing the VSK 1 Calibrate probe the input mask for Calibrate probe opens. (See section 5.3). By pressing the VSK 2 Set edge the Set edge window opens. (See section 5.4). By pressing the VSK 3 Align edge the Align edge window opens. (See section 5.5). By pressing the VSK 4 Rectangular corner the Rectangular corner window opens. (See section 5.6). By pressing the VSK 5 1 Hole the 1 Hole window opens. (See section 5.7). By pressing the VSK 6 1 Circular spigot the 1 Circular spigot window opens. (See section 5.8). By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate. 5.3 Selecting the function Calibrate probe When the tool probes are attached to the spindle, clamping tolerance usually occurs. This can lead to measurement errors. Furthermore, you need to determine the trigger points of the probe relative to the spindle center. Therefore the tool probe has to be calibrated. The radius is calibrated in a hole, the length is calibrated on a surface. For the hole you can use a bore in the workpiece or a setting ring gauge. The radius of the workpiece probe ball and its length 1 must be stored in the tool list. By pressing the HSK 3 Meas. workp. and the VSK 5 Calibrate probe (in operating area Machine and operating mode JOG) the following input screen will be displayed (see the next page).
Display area
B570
Page 14
Measuring workpiece
Section 5
Notes:
5.3.1 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 2 Length the following described parameter fields will be active. (See section 5.3.2) By pressing the VSK 2 Radius the following described parameter fields will be active. (See section 5.3.2). By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you switch back to the main screen for measuring the workpiece. 5.3.2 Parameters of Calibrate probe. Depending on the activated vertical softkey (Length or Radius) the available parameter input fields are different. Parameter Probe number: Z0: [mm] Unit Description Number of Probes Height of reference piece Note: Only with activated vertical softkey Length. : [mm] Diameter of the reference piece Note: Only with activated vertical softkey Radius.
Section 5
Notes:
Measuring workpiece
5.3.3 Calibration of the probe length: 1. 2. Change a tool of the type 3-D probe into the spindle. Position the tool probe approximately over the centre of the measuring surface. In the operating area Machine under the operating mode JOG press the HSK 3 Meas. workp.. Press Softkey "Calibrate probe and then Length. The calibrate probe Length window opens. Enter the reference point Z0 of the surface, e.g. of the workpiece or the machine table. Press CYCLE START on the machine control panel.
3. 4. 5. 6.
The calibration process starts. The length of the measuring tool will be calculated and entered in the tool list.
5.3.4 Calibration of the probe radius: 1. 2. 3. 4. Change to a tool of the type 3-D probe. Move the workpiece probe into the hole and position it into the approximated centre of the hole. In the operating area Machine under the operating mode JOG press the HSK 3 Meas. workp.. Press the VSK "Calibrate probe and choose the VSK 3 Radius. The calibrate probe window for the Radius opens. 5. 6. Enter the diameter of the hole. Press CYCLE START on the machine control panel.
The calibration starts. First the exact hole centre is determined, then the four trigger points on the inside wall of the hole are being approached.
B570
Page 16
Measuring workpiece
5.4 Measure workpiece zero Set edge
Section 5
Notes:
The workpiece lies parallel to the coordinate system on the work table. One reference point will be measured in one of the axes (X, Y, Z). The following requirements must be fulfilled: Any tool can be inserted in the spindle for scratching when measuring the workpiece zero manually. An electronic workpiece probe is inserted in the spindle and activated when measuring the workpiece zero automatically. By pressing the HSK 3 Meas. workp. and the VSK 2 Set edge, in the operating area Machine and operating mode JOG, the following screen will be displayed.
5.4.1 Vertical softkey bar (VSK) Display area Description By pressing the VSK 2 Work offset a list of the work offsets opens. See module B573 - Operating area Parameter. By pressing the VSK 3 X the measured values for the X-axis will be determined. By pressing the VSK 4 Y the measured values for the Y-axis will be determined. By pressing the VSK 5 Z the measured values for the Z-axis will be determined. By pressing the VSK 7 Set WO the values will be accepted for the work offset. By pressing the VSK 8 Back you switch back to the Measure workpiece main screen .
Section 5
Notes:
Measuring workpiece
5.4.2 Parameters of "Set edge" Parameter Work offset: Measure only Work offset Basic reference Global base Channel specific base Measurement direction: X The selection of the axes directions X/Y/Z is made by the vertical softkey bar. With the measurement direction (+ or -) it is determined whether the workpiece will be approached from a positive or negative X- or Ydirection. By selection of the axis direction Z it is only possible to approach the work piece from a negative Z-direction. Description Alternative parameters The measured values are computed and displayed without changing the coordinate system.
Reference point
X0, Y0, Z0
5.4.3 Procedure for Setting edge manually: 1. 2. 3. Insert any tool in the spindle for scratching when measuring the workpiece zero manually. In the operating area Machine under the operating mode JOG press the HSK 3 Meas. workp.. Press the VSK 2 Set edge. The "Set edge" window opens. Select "Meas. only" if you only want to display the measured values. - OR 4. Select "Work offset" and the work offset (G54...G57) in which you want to store the zero point in the associated selection box. The selection of the work offsets can differ. Note: Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.
4.
B570
Page 18
Measuring the workpiece zero

- OR 4. Select "Basic ref." if the zero point is to be saved in the active system offset. - OR 4. Select "Chan. -spec. base" and the desired basic offset (No.1...No.9) in which the zero point is to be saved. -OR4 Select "Global basic" and the desired basic offset (No.1...No.7) in which the zero point is to be saved. -OR4. Press the VSK 2 "Work offset" and select the work offset in which the zero point is to be saved in the "Work offset - G54 G57" window and press the VSK 1 "In manual". You return to the "Set Edge" window. If it does not, press the VSK 3 Meas. workp. .
Section 5
Notes:
Note: The selection of work offsets can differ. Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications. 5. 6. 7. Position the cursor to the desired Zero point offset (G54-G57), then press the VSK 1 In manual Use the VSKs 3 - 5 (X/ Y/ Z) to select in which axis direction you want to approach the workpiece first. Select the measuring direction (+ or -) you want to approach the workpiece in. The measuring direction cannot be selected for Z0. In X0, Y0, or Z0, specify the reference position of the workpiece edge you are approaching. The reference point position corresponds, e.g. to the dimension specifications of the workpiece edge from the workpiece drawing. Traverse the tool up to the workpiece edge. Press the VSK 7 "Set WO". The position of the workpiece edge is being calculated and displayed. The reference position of the workpiece edge is being stored as new zero point with Set WO. The tool radius is hereby automatically compensated for. Example: Reference point of workpiece edge X1 = -50, measuring direction +, tool radius = 3mm, zero point offset X = 53. 11. If needed repeat the measuring procedure (step 5 to 10) for the other two axes.
8.
9. 10.
Section 5
Notes:
Measuring workpiece
5.4.4 Procedure for setting edge automatically 1. 2. Insert a tool of the kind 3-D probe in the spindle. Prepare the measurement (as described before in section 5.4.3 Set edge manually steps 2 to 8, on previous pages). Approach the tool near to the work piece edge that you want to measure. Press the "CYCLE START" key. The automatic measuring process is starts. The position of the workpiece edge is being measured. The position of the workpiece edge is being calculated and displayed. The setpoint position of the workpiece edge is being stored as new workpiece zero point if Set WO was selected. The tool radius is automatically compensated for. If desired repeat the measuring process (step 3 to 4) for the other two axes.
3.
4.
5.
B570
Page 20
Measuring workpiece
5.5 Measure workpiece zero Align edge
Section 5
Notes:
The workpiece lies in any direction, i.e. not parallel to the coordinate system on the worktable. By measuring two points on the workpiece reference edge that you have selected, you determine the angle to the coordinate system. The following prerequisites must be fulfilled: You can insert any tool in the spindle for scratching when measuring the workpiece zero manually. An electronic workpiece probe is inserted in the spindle and activated when measuring the workpiece zero automatically. By pressing the VSK 3 Align edge under the function Meas. workp. (in operating area Machine and operating mode JOG) the following screen will be displayed.
5.5.1 Vertical softkey bar (VSK) Display area Description By pressing the VSK 2 Work offset a list of the work offsets will be displayed. See module B573 - Operating area Parameter. By pressing the VSK 3 Store P1 the determined position of the measuring point P1 is stored. By pressing the VSK 4 Store P2 the determined position of the measuring point P2 is stored. By pressing the VSK 8 Back you jump back to the previous main screen.
Section 5
Notes:
Measuring workpiece
Optionally two more softkey are available in the VSK, as later on described in this module (see section 5.7): By pressing the VSK 5 Store P3 the determined position of the measuring point P3 is stored. By pressing the VSK 6 Store P4 the determined position of the measuring point P4 is stored. After completion of measuring a workpiece automatically with the electronic probe, the softkeys P1 saved to P2 saved are being highlighted and the softkey Set WO is being activated. 5.5.2 Parameters measure workpiece Align edge Parameter Work offset: Measure only Description Alternative parameters: The measured values are computed and displayed without changing the coordinate system. G54 ... G57 G500
Work offset Basic reference Global Base Channel-specific base
Measurement direction/Measurement axis: -X Alternative parameter selection: With the measuring direction (+ or -) it will be determined whether the workpiece will be approached from positive or negative X- or Y-direction.
+X
-Y
+Y
B570
Page 22
Measuring workpiece
5.5.3 Procedure for Align edge manually
Section 5
Notes:
1. 2. 3. 4.
Insert any tool in the spindle for scratching when measuring the workpiece zero manually. In operating mode JOG press the HSK 3 Meas. workp.. Press the VSK 2 Align edge. The input screen opens.
Select Measuring only or "Work offset" , with the desired WO number (G54...G57) in which you want to store the zero point in the associated box (as described in section 5.4.3 Set edge, step 4).
In the input fields "Meas. axis", select the axis in which you want to approach the workpiece, and the measuring direction (+ or -). Select in the input field Angle. Offs weather a correction as Coordinate rotation or rotary axis offset is being preformed. Select here Coord. Rotation or C-Axis. In the last case the rotary axis for which a correction is to be executed can be selected. Enter the setpoint angle between the workpiece edge and the reference axis. Traverse the tool to the workpiece edge. Press the VSK 3 "Store P1". Reposition the tool and repeat the measuring procedure (steps 5 to 7) to measure the second point, and then press the "Store P2" softkey. Press the VSK 7 "Set WO" The angle between the workpiece edge and reference axis is calculated and displayed.
5. 6.
7. 8. 9. 10.
11.
With "Set WO", the workpiece edge now corresponds to the setpoint angle. The calculated rotation is stored in the work offset.
5.5.4 Procedure for Aligning edge automatically
1. 2. 3. 4.
Insert a tool of the type 3-D probe Prepare the measurement (as described in section 5.5.3, Align edge manually, steps 2-7). Traverse the workpiece probe close to the workpiece edge on which you wish to measure. Press the "CYCLE START" key. The automatic measuring process is being started. The position of P1 is being measured and stored. The VSK 3 P1 saved becomes active. Repeat the operation (step 3 to 4) to measure and store P2. The position of P2 is being measured and stored. The VSK 4 P2 saved becomes active Press the VSK 7 "Set WO" or "Calculate".
4.
6.
The angle between the workpiece edge and reference axis is calculated and displayed. With "Set WO", the workpiece edge now corresponds to the setpoint angle. The calculated coordinate rotation is stored in the correction target that you have selected.
Section 5
Notes:
Measuring workpiece
5.6 Measure workpiece zero Rectangular corner
The workpiece has a 90 corner and is located anywhere on the work table. By measuring three points you can determine the corner point in the working plane (X/Y plane) and angle between the reference edge on the workpiece (line through P1 and P2) and the reference axis (always the 1st axis in the working plane). The following prerequisites must be fulfilled: You can insert any tool in the spindle for scratching when measuring the workpiece zero manually. An electronic workpiece probe is inserted in the spindle and activated when measuring the workpiece zero automatically. By pressing the VSK 4 Rectangular corner under the function Meas. workp. (operating area Machine and operating mode JOG) the following screen will be displayed:
5.6.1 Vertical softkey bar (VSK) See page 25/26 measure workpiece Aligning edge. 5.6.2 Parameters of measure workpiece Rectangular corner Parameter Work offset: Measuring only Description Alternative parameters The measured values are computed and displayed without changing the coordinate system. G54-G57 G500
Work offset Basic reference Global base
B570
Page 24
Measuring workpiece
Parameter Description (continuation)
Section 5
Notes:
Channel-specific The zero point is stored into the active system frame. base Channel -specific base is saved under No. 1 ... No. 7 Outside corner: Pos. 1 Measures the outside corner of the workpiece:
Pos. 2
Pos. 3
Pos. 4
Inside corner: Pos. 1
Measures the inside corner of the workpiece:
Pos. 2
Pos. 3
Pos. 4
X0 Y0
Reference point X Reference point Y
Section 5
Notes:
Measuring workpiece
5.6.3 Procedure for Measuring a Rectangular corner manually 1. 2. 3. Insert any tool in the spindle to scratch on. In the operating mode JOG press the HSK 3 Meas. workp.. Press the VSK 4 "Rectangular corner" if the workpiece has a right angled corner that is to be measured. The "Rectangular corner" window opens. Select Measuring only or "Work offset" , with the desired WO number (G54...G57) in which you want to store the zero point in the associated box (as described in section 5.4.3 Set edge, step 4). Select the Corner (inside corner or outside corner) that you wish to measure and its position (e.g. Pos. 1... Pos. 4). Specify the setpoint of the workpiece corner (X0, Y0) you want to measure. Traverse the tool to the first measuring point P1, according to help screen. Press the VSK 1 "Save P1". The coordinates of the first measuring point are measured and stored. Reposition the spindle with the tool each time to approach measuring point P2 and P3 and press the VSK 4 "Save P2" and VSK 5 "Save P3". Press the VSK 7 "Set WO" or "Calculate".
4.
5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
10.
The corner point and angle are calculated and displayed. The corner point now corresponds to the setpoint position. The calculated offset is stored in the work offset. 5.6.4 Procedure for measuring a Rectangular corner automatically 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert a 3-D probe in the spindle Prepare the measurement (as described in section 5.6.3 Procedure for Measuring a Rectangular corner manually, step 2-6). Approach measuring point P1 with the workpiece probe. Press the "CYCLE START" key. This starts the automatic measuring process. The position of P1 is measured and stored. The VSK 3 "P1 stored" softkey becomes active. Repeat the operation (step 3 and 4) to measure and store points P2 and P3. If a corner not equal to 90 degrees is to be measured, repeat the previous step to measure and store P4. Press the "Set WO" or "Calculate" softkey.
5. 6. 7.
The corner point and angle are calculated and displayed. The corner point now corresponds to the setpoint position. The calculated offset is stored in the correction target that you have selected.
B570
Page 26
Measuring workpiece
5.7 Measuring workpiece zero 1 Hole
Section 5
Notes:
The workpiece lies anywhere on the work table and has a hole. You can determine the diameter and centre point of the hole with four measuring points (P1 - P4) . The following prerequisites must be fulfilled: You can insert any tool in the spindle for scratching when measuring the workpiece zero manually. An electronic workpiece probe is inserted in the spindle and activated when measuring the workpiece zero automatically. By pressing the VSK 5 1 Hole under the function Meas. workp. (in operating area Machine and operating mode JOG) the following screen will be displayed:
5.7.1 Vertical softkey bar (VSK) See page 25-26 measure workpiece Aligning edge. 5.7.2 Parameters of measure workpiece 1 Hole The following parameters of Aligning the edge are used also in 1 Hole (see page 25-26): [Work offset, G54, X0, Y0] Some additional parameters are available if a 3-D probe is used: Parameter Unit Description Hole [mm] Diameter of the hole
Contact ang.
[Degree]Contact angle
Section 5
Notes:
Measuring workpiece
5.7.3 Procedure for measuring 1 Hole manually 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert any tool in the spindle for scratching on In operating mode JOG press the HSK 3 Meas. workp.. Press the VSK 5 "1 Hole". The "1 Hole" input screen mask opens. Select Measuring only or "Work offset" , with the desired WO number (G54...G57) in which you want to store the zero point in the associated box (as described in section 5.4.3 Set edge, step 4). Specify the setpoint position (X0/Y0) of pocket centre point P0. Traverse the tool to the first measuring point P1. Press the VSK 3 "Save P1". The point is measured and stored. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to measure and store measuring points P2, P3 and P4. Press the VSK 7 "Set WO" or "Calculate".
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Diameter and centre point position of the hole are calculated and displayed. The set position of the centre point is stored as a new zero point with "Set WO". The tool radius is automatically compensated for in the calculation. 5.7.4 Procedure for measuring 1 Hole automatically 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert a tool of the type 3-D probe in the spindle. Prepare the measurement (as described in section 5.7.3 Procedure for measuring 1 Hole manually, step 2-5). Move the workpiece probe until it is positioned approximately at the centre of the hole. Under " hole" enter the approximate diameter to delimit the area in which the tool can be traversed. If no diameter is entered, travel starts from the starting point at measuring feedrate. If needed, insert a value in the field Contact angle. With the contact angle the direction in which you approach the wall of the hole can be rotated at any angle. Press "CYCLE START" on the MCP. This starts the automatic measuring process.
5.
6.
The workpiece probe automatically measures four points in succession around the inside wall of the hole. When measurement has been successfully completed, the VSK "P0 stored" becomes active. The diameter and centre point of the hole are calculated and displayed. The set position of the centre point is stored as the new zero point in the correction target that you have selected, if you have selected "Work offset".
B570
Page 28
Measuring workpiece
5.8 Measuring workpiece zero 1 Circular spigot
Section 5
Notes:
The workpiece is located anywhere on the work table and has a circular spigot. You can determine the diameter and centre point of the spigot with four measuring points. The following prerequisites must be fulfilled: You can insert any tool in the spindle for scratching when measuring the workpiece zero manually. An electronic workpiece probe is inserted in the spindle and activated when measuring the workpiece zero automatically. By pressing the VSK 6 1 Circular spigot under the function Meas. workp. (in operating area Machine and operating mode JOG) the following screen will be displayed:
5.8.1 Vertical softkey bar (VSK) See page 25-26 measure workpiece Aligning edge. 5.8.2 Parameters of measure workpiece 1 Circular spigot The following parameters of Set edge (Section 5.4.2) are used also in 1 Circular spigot: [Work offset, G54...G57, X0, Y0] The following parameters are only shown if a 3-D probe is in the spindle: Parameter Spigot Unit [mm] Description Diameter spigot
DZ
[mm]
Infeed measurement depth
Contact ang.
[Degree]Contact angle
Section 5
Notes:
Measuring workpiece
5.8.3 Procedure for measuring 1 Circular spigot manually
1. 2. 3. 4.
Insert any tool in the spindle for scratching on

In the operating mode JOG press the HSK 3 Meas. workp. Select the VSK 6 1 Circular spigot. The 1 Circular spigot window opens.
Select Measuring only or "Work offset" , with the desired WO number (G54...G57) in which you want to store the zero point in the associated box (as described in section 5.4.3 Set edge, step 4).
Specify the setpoint position (X0/Y0) of the spigot centre point P0 Traverse the tool to the first measuring point. Press the "Save P1" softkey. The point is measured and stored. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to measure and store measuring points P2, P3 and P4. Press the VSK 7 "Set WO" or "Calculate".
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
The diameter and centre point of the spigot are calculated and displayed. The set position of the centre point is stored as a new zero point with "Set WO". The tool radius is automatically compensated for in the calculation.
5.8.4 Procedure for measuring 1 Circular spigot automatically

1. 2. 3. 4.
Insert a tool of the type 3-D probe in the spindle.

Prepare the measurement like described before (section 5.8.3 Procedure for measuring 1 Circular spigot manually, steps 2 to 5). Move the workpiece probe until it is approximately at the centre of the spigot. In " Spigot", enter the approximate diameter of the spigot. This limits the area for rapid traverse. If no diameter is entered, travel starts from the starting point at measurement feedrate. Insert a value for DZ to set the infeed measurement depth. Press "CYCLE START" on the machine control panel. This starts the automatic measuring process.
5. 6.
The tool automatically measures four points in succession around the spigot outside wall. When measurement has been successfully completed, the "P0 stored" softkey becomes active. The diameter and centre point of the spigot are calculated and displayed. The set position of the centre point is stored as the new zero point in the correction target that you have selected.
B570
Page 30
Measure tool
6.1 Selecting the function Measure tool
Section 6
Notes:
The geometries of the machining tool must be taken into consideration when executing a part program. These are stored as tool offset data in the tool list. Each time the tool is called, the control considers the tool offset data. When programming the part program, you only need to enter the workpiece dimensions from the production drawing. After this, the controller independently calculates the individual tool path. You can determine the tool offset data, i.e. the length and radius or diameter, either manually or automatically with tool probes. By pressing the HSK 4 Meas. tool in the operating mode JOG under the operating area Machine the following window opens:
Measuring a tool manually For manual measurement, move the tool manually to a known reference point to determine the tool length and the radius or diameter. The control then calculates the tool offset data from the position of the tool carrier reference point and the reference point. With the measuring of the tool length either the workpiece or a fixed point in the machines coordinate system, e.g. a load cell or a fixed point in conjunction with a distance meter, can be used as a reference point. The position of the workpiece is specified during the measurement. The position of the fixed point however must be announced before the measurement. With the determination of the radius or diameter the workpiece always serves as the reference point. Hint: Depending on the setting in a machine data either the radius or the diameter of the tool can be measured. Note: Refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.
Section 6
Notes:
Measure tool
Measuring a tool automatically (Length and radius or rather diameter) For automatic measurement, you determine the length and radius or diameter of the tool with the aid of a tool probe (table contact system). The Sinumerik Operate uses the known positions of the tool holder reference point and tool probe to calculate the tool offset data. Before a toll can be measured automatically, the approximate tool geometry data (length and radius or diameter) must be entered in the tool list and the probe must be calibrated. Depending on the setting in a machine data, the radius or the diameter of the tool can be measured. You can consider a lateral or longitudinal offset V when measuring. If the maximum length of the tool is not at the outer edge of the tool or the maximum width is not at the bottom edge of the tool, you can store this difference in the offset. If measuring shows that the length of the tool diameter is greater than the probe diameter, measurement is automatically performed with a turning spindle rotating in the opposite direction. The tool is then not moved over the probe centre-to-centre, but with the outside edge of the tool above the centre of the probe.
6.2
Vertical softkey bar (VSK) Description By pressing the VSK 1 Length manual the Length manual input mask opens. (See section 6.3). By pressing the VSK 2 Radius manual or rather Diameter manual the input mask Radius manual or rather Diameter manual opens. (See section 6.4). By pressing the VSK 1 Length auto the Length auto input mask opens. (See section 6.5). By pressing the VSK 2 Radius auto or rather Diameter auto the input mask Radius auto or rather Diameter auto opens. (See section 6.6). By pressing the VSK 1 Calibrate probe the Calibrate probe input mask opens. (See section 6.7). By pressing the VSK 8 Back you jump back to the Meas. tool screen of the Sinumerik Operate.
Display area
B570
Page 32
Measure tool
6.3 Measure tool Length manual By pressing the HSK 4 Meas. tool and the VSK 1 Length manual (in the operating area Machine under the operating mode JOG) the following input mask opens.
Section 6
Notes:
6.3.1 Vertical softkey bar (VSK) Display area Description By pressing the VSK 2 Tool the tool list opens. See module B573 - Operating area Parameter. By pressing the VSK 7 Set length the entered values will be accepted. By pressing the VSK 8 Back you jump back to the Measure tool screen of the Sinumerik Operate.
Section 6
Notes:
Measure tool
6.3.2 Parameters of measure tool Length manual Parameter T Description Tool name Alternatively you can select a tool via the VSK 2 Tool. Edge number (1 to 9) Replacement tool (01- 99) Workpiece edge
ST
Z0
6.3.3 Procedure for Measuring tool Length manual 1. 2. 3. 4. Load the tool in the spindle you want to measure. In the operating mode JOG press the HSK 4 Meas. tool. Press the VSK 1 Length manual. The Length manual input screen opens. Press the VSK 2 Tool. Select a tool from the Tool list that opens immediately after pressing the softkey. Press the VSK 1 In manual to switch back with the selected tool to the Length manual window. Select the cutting edge number D and the number of the replacement tool ST. Approach the workpiece in the Z direction, scratch it with a turning spindle Enter the set position Z0 of the workpiece edge. Press the VSK "Set length" softkey.
5 4. 5. 6. 7.
The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. Note: If the tool length should be determined not with the help of a work piece but rather with a load cell, no zero offset may be selected, or the basis reference must be zero.
B570
Page 34
Measure tool
6.4 Measure tool Radius manual or Diameter manual By pressing the HSK 4 Meas. tool and the VSK 2 Radius manual or Diameter manual (in the operating area Machine and operating mode JOG) the following input mask opens.
Section 6
Notes:
6.4.1 Vertical Softkey bar (VSK) Display area Description By pressing the VSK 2 Tool the tool list opens. See module B573 - Operating area Parameter. By pressing the VSK 7 Set radius (or Set diameter.) all entered values will be accepted. By pressing the VSK 8 Back you jump back to the Measure tool screen of the Sinumerik Operate. 6.4.2 Parameters measure tool Radius manual or Diameter manual The following parameters of the function Length manual are used also with Radius manual and Diameter manual: [T, D, ST] Beside the before mentioned parameters you find the following additional parameters in the Radius manual or Diameter manual window: Parameter X0 Y0 Description Workpiece edge Workpiece edge
Section 6
Notes:
Measure tool
6.4.3 Procedure for measuring the tool radius manual (or diameter manual ) 1. 2. Insert the tool you want to measure in the spindle. In the operating mode JOG and operating area Machine press the HSK 4 Meas. tool. Press the VSK 2 Radius manual ( or Diameter manual). Select the cutting edge number D and the number of the replacement tool ST of the tool. Approach the workpiece in the X- or Y-direction and perform scratching with the spindle rotating in the opposite direction. Specify the setpoint position X0 or Y0 of the workpiece edge. Press the "Set radius" or "Set diameter" softkey.
3. 4.
5.
6. 7.
The tool radius or diameter is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.
B570
Page 36
Measure tool
6.5 Measure tool Length auto By pressing the HSK 4 Meas. tool and the VSK 3 Length auto (in the operating area Machine and operating mode JOG) the following input mask opens:
Section 6
Notes:
6.5.1 Vertical softkey bar (VSK) Display area Description By pressing the VSK 2 Tool the tool list opens. See module B573 - Operating area Parameter. By pressing the VSK 8 Back you switch back to the Measuring tool main window.
6.5.2 Parameter for measuring the tool length automatically The following parameters that are available for Length manual are available for Length auto too: [T, D, ST] With Length auto the following additional parameter is available: Parameter V Unit [mm] Description Lateral offset
Section 6
Notes:
Measuring a tool
6.5.3 Procedure for tool measure length auto 1. 2. Insert the tool you want to measure in the spindle. Position the tool near the tool probe, so that you can approach the probe collision free. In the operating mode JOG and operating area Machine press the HSK 4 Meas. tool. Press the HSK 3 Length auto. Select the cutting edge number D and the number of the replacement tool ST. If necessary, enter the lateral offset V. Press CYCLE START on the machine control panel (MCP). This starts the automatic measuring process. The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. Note: How the measuring process works exactly depends on the settings of the machine manufacturer.
3.
4. 5.
6. 7.
B570
Page 38
Measure tool
6.6 Measure tool Radius auto or Diameter auto By pressing the HSK 4 Meas. tool and the VSK 2 Radius auto or Diameter auto (in the operating area Machine and operating mode JOG) the following input mask opens:
Section 6
Notes:
6.6.1 Vertical softkey bar (VSK) Display area Description By pressing the VSK 2 Tool the tool list wil be opened. See module B573 - Operating area Parameter. By pressing the VSK 8 Back you switch back to the Meas. Tool screen. 6.6.2 Parameters of measure tool Radius auto or Diameter auto The following parameters that are available for Length manual are available for Radius auto or Diameter auto too: [T, D, ST] With Radius auto or Diameter auto the following additional parameters are available: Parameter V Unit [mm] Description Lateral offset
Section 6
Notes:
Measure tool
6.6.3 Procedure for tool measure radius auto or diameter auto 1. 2. Insert the tool you want to measure in the spindle. Position the tool near the tool probe, so that you can approach the probe collision free. In the operating mode JOG and operating area Machine press the HSK 4 Meas. tool. Press the VSK 4 Radius auto or Diameter auto. Select the cutting edge number D and the number of the replacement tool ST. If necessary, enter the lateral offset V. Press CYCLE START on the machine control panel. This starts the automatic measuring process.
3.
4. 5.
6. 7.
When you measure the tool radius or diameter, measurement is performed with a spindle rotating in the opposite direction. The tool radius and diameter are calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. Note: How the measuring process works exactly depends on the settings of the machine manufacturer.
B570
Page 40
Measure tool
6.7 Selecting the function Calibrate probe
Section 6
Notes:
If you want to measure your tools automatically, you must first determine the position of the tool probe on the machine table with reference to the machine zero. Mechanical tool probes are typically shaped like a cube or a cylindrical disk. Install the tool probe in the working area of the machine (e.g on the machine table) and align it relative to the machining axes. You must use a mill-type calibration tool to calibrate the tool probe. You must enter the length and radius/diameter of the tool in the tool list beforehand. Note: Refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.
By pressing the HSK 4 Meas. tool and the VSK 6 Calibrate probe (in the operating area Machine and operating mode JOG) the Probe calibration window opens.
Section 6
Notes:
Measuring a tool
6.7.1 Vertical softkey bar (VSK) Display area Description By pressing the VSK 8 Back you switch back to the Measure tool window.
6.7.2 Parameters of measure tool Calibrate probe By calibrating the probe the following parameters are displayed: Parameter Length or Length and diameter [mm] Automatic determination of the tool length and diameter by moving the tool against the probe. Unit [mm] Description Automatic determination of the tool length by moving the tool against the probe.
6.7.3 procedure for tool measure Calibrating probe 1. Move the calibration tool until it is approximately over the centre of the measuring surface of the tool probe. In the operating mode JOG press the HSK 4 Meas. tool. Press the VSK 6 Calibrate probe. Choose whether you want to calibrate the length or the length and the diameter. Press the CYCLE START key on the machine control panel.
2.
3. 4.
5.
Calibration is automatically executed at the measuring feedrate. The distance measurements between the machine zero and tool probe are calculated and stored in an internal data area.
B570
Page 42
Position
7.1 Selecting the function Position
Section 7
Notes:
In order to implement simple machining sequences, you can traverse the axes to certain positions in manual mode. Note: The feedrate/rapid traverse override is active during traversing. By pressing the HSK 6 Position in the Operating area Machine and operating mode JOG the following input mask will be shown on the screen:
7.2
Vertical softkey bar (VSK) Description By pressing the VSK 5 Rapid the value of the set machine data for feed rate velocity in JOG is taken over in the parameter F (feed). Hint: The VSK 5 Rapid can also be pressed if the input field parameter F is not the active input field (highlighted in orange) By pressing the VSK 8 Back you switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate.
Display area
Section 7
Notes:
Position
7.3 Parameters of Position Unit [mm/min] [mm/tooth] Description Feed
Parameter F
X Y Z
[mm]
Target position of the selected axes [abs/inc] Note: Several target positions can be entered. B-axis and C-axis are manufacturer specific. Follow the documentation of the machine manufacturer.
SP
[Degree]
Target angle [abs, inc]
7.4. Procedure for positioning the axes 1. 2. 3. Select the JOG operating mode. Press the HSK 6 Position. Specify the desired value for the feedrate F. - OR 3. Press VSK 5 "Rapid". *Rapid tr.* is displayed in the input field F. Enter the target position or the target angle for the axis or axes to be traversed. Press the "CYCLE START" button on the machine control panel. The axis is traversed to the specified target position. Note: If target positions were specified for several axes, the axes are traversed simultaneously.
4.
5.
B570
Page 44
Face milling
8.1 Selecting the function Face milling
Section 8
Notes:
You can use this cycle to face mill any workpiece. A rectangular surface is always machined. By pressing the HSK 7 Face mill. in the Operating area Machine and operating mode JOG the following input mask will be shown on the screen.
8.2
Vertical softkey bar (VSK) Description By pressing the VSK 1 Select tool you can insert a tool. Select the desired tool in the tool list (e.g FACING_TOOL_D60) with the orange selection cursor and press VSK 1 In program With VSK 2 Graphic view you can switchover between help screen and graphical view. With VSK 3 "lateral limitation left" you can specify the lateral limitation in X- direction. With VSK 4 "lateral limitation top" you can specify the lateral limitation in Y+ direction. With VSK 5 "lateral limitation right" you can specify the lateral limitation in X+ direction. With VSK 6 "lateral limitation bottom" you can specify the lateral limitation in Y- direction.
Display area
Section 8
Notes:
Face milling
Display area
Description (continuation) By pressing the VSK 7 Cancel you can escape the screen face milling. With pressing of VSK 8 Accept the following program block is generated:
With CYCLE START the cycle Face milling will be executed.
8.3
Parameters of Face milling Unit Description Tool name Cutting edge number of the tool. [mm/min] Feed [mm/tooth]
Parameter T D F
S V Machining
[rpm] [m/min]
Spindle speed or constant cutting speed The following machining operations can be selected: Roughing Finishing
Direction Same direction of machining Alternating direction of machining X0 Y0 Z0 X1 Y1 Z1 DXY mm Corner point 1 of surface in X direction (abs) Corner point 1 of surface in Y direction (abs) Height of blank (abs) Corner point 2 of surface in X (abs or inc) Corner point 2 of surface in Y (abs or inc) Height of finished part (abs or inc) Max. infeed in the XY plane (dependent on milling cutter diameter) Alternatively you can specify the plane infeed as a %, as a ratio plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm). Max. infeed in Z direction (only for roughing) Finishing allowance, depth
mm mm %
DZ UZ
mm mm
B570
Page 46
Handwheel
9.1 Selecting the function Handwheel
Section 9
Notes:
You can traverse the axes in the machine coordinate system (MCS) or in the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) via the handwheel. All axes are provided in the following order for handwheel assignment: Geometry axes (X, Y, Z) Channel machine axes (X1, Y1, Z1, C1) Note: Refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. By pressing the HSK 2.6 Handwheel in the extended horizontal softkey bar the following input mask will be shown on the screen.
An input field for the assignment of the axes is offered for every handwheel on the machine. The axis-assignment can be made like described in the module B568 - "Basic operations". Besides there is the possibility to assign an axis directly to a handwheel using the corresponding softkey on the VSK. 9.2 Vertical softkey bar The number of softkeys for the axis assignment is limited. For the assignment of all other axes refer to the module B568 - "Basic operations", Section 3.2 "Parameter selection". Generally you can switch through all available axes by repeatedly pressing the blue "SELECT"-key on the keyboard. Display area Geometry axes: By pressing the VSK 1 "X" the X-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing the VSK 2 "Y" the Y-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing the VSK 3 "Z" the Z-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel.
Description
Section 9
Notes:
Handwheel
Display area Machine axes By pressing the VSK 4 "X1" the X1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing the VSK 5 "Y1" the Y1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing the VSK 6 "Z1" the Z1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing VSK 7 "C1" the C1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" the Handwheel window is being closed. 9.3 Handwheel assignment 1. In the operating mode JOG (or MDA or AUTO) select the operating area Machine, then press the HSK 2.6 Handwheel in the extended horizontal softkey bar. The Handwheel window opens. A field for axis assignment will be offered for every connected handwheel. Place the cursor in the field next to the handwheel with which you wish to assign the axis (e.g. No. 1). Press the corresponding VSK to select the desired axis (e.g. "X"). - OR To open the "Axis" selection box using the "INSERT" key on the keyboard, navigate to the desired axis, and press the "INPUT" key. Selecting an axis also activates the handwheel (e.g., "X" is assigned to handwheel no. 1 and is activated immediately). 5. Press the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" again, or press the VSK 8 "Back", to close the "Handwheel" window. Deactivating the handwheel The cursor must be placed on the handwheel whose axis-assignment should be cancelled (e.g. No.1). By pressing the corresponding axis-softkey again the assignment is cancelled. - OR 2. Open the input field Axis with the INSERT-key, navigate to the blank field, and press the yellow "INPUT"-key. The empty value will be accepted. Deactivating on of the axes also deactivates the Handwheel (e.g. X deactivates Handwheel No. 1) Press the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" again, or press the VSK 8 "Back", to close the "Handwheel" window. Description (continuation)
2.
3. 4.
9.4 1. 2.
3.
B570
Page 48
Synchronized actions
10.1 Selecting the function Synchronized actions By pressing the HSK 2.7 Synchronized actions in the extended horizontal softkey bar in operation area Machine under operation mode JOG the following input mask will be shown on the screen.
Section 10
Notes:
You can display status information for diagnosing synchronized actions in the Synchronized actions window. You get a list with all currently active synchronized actions. In this list the synchronized action programming is displayed in the same form as in the part program. You can see the status of the synchronized action in the Status column. Note: Refer to the machine manufacturers documentation for further in formation about the programmed synchronized actions. Waiting Active Blocked
Section 11
Notes:
Settings
11.1 Selecting the function Settings You can predefine millimetre or inch as the measuring units for the control unit. The change-over of the measurement units is done for the whole control. All necessary entries are thereby converted automatically into the new measurement units, e.g.: Positional data Tool corrections Zero point offsets By pressing the HSK 2.8 Settings in the extended horizontal softkey bar in operation area Machine under operation mode JOG the following input mask will be shown on the screen.
11.2 Vertical softkey bar (VSK) Display area Description By pressing the VSK 5 "Changeover inch" the measuring units are converted from the metric to the imperial (inch) dimension system. New values have to be entered in inches. By pressing this key the key function switches to "Changeover metric". By pressing the VSK 5 "Changeover metric" the measuring units are converted from the imperial (inch) to the metric dimension system. New values have to be metric. By pressing this key the key function switches to "Changeover inch". Accept the selection by pressing the VSK 8 OK or cancel by pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate with extended HSK.
B570
Page 50
Settings
Section 11
Notes:
11.3 Measurement units [metric/imperial] Country specific settings of the measuring units are not displayed in the input masks. In the following table the measuring units metric and imperial are compared with one another. A switchover can be made in the "T,S,M," input mask or by pressing the HSK 2.8 Settings in the extended HSK-bar and VSK 5 Changeover Inch or Changeover Metric as mentioned before. metric mm mm/tooth mm/min mm/U m/min Inch in in/tooth in/min in/U ft/min
11.4 Parameter setting for manual operation In the Settings for manual mode window all configurations for manual operation can be done. Parameter Type of feedrate: G94 G95 Setup feedrate: G94 G95 Variable increment [mm/min] [mm/rev] Axis feedrate/linear feedrate Revolutional feedrate [mm/min] [mm/rev] Axis feedrate/linear feedrate Revolutional feedrate Unit Meaning
Enter the desired increment for axis traversal by variable increments [rpm] Spindle speed in revolutions per minute
Spindle speed
After inserting the values in the input fields, press the VSK 8 Back to switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate in the extended view.
Section End
B570
Page 52
B571
Operating mode MDA
Brief description
Objective of the module: In this module you learn the different options of the operating mode MDA in the operating area Machine. Description of the module: This module describes how a program can be loaded directly from the program manager into the MDA-buffer and how the processing of the program is started. It will be explained how an edited program, created in the working window, is written from the MDAbuffer to any directory on the control unit. You learn how to create a directory and a workpiece file of the type *.WPD (workpiece directory. Furthermore the functions Program control and Handwheel will be explained.
Content: Operating mode MDA Load MDI Save MDI Program control Handwheel Synchronized actions

B571
B571
B571
Page 2
B551
Operating mode MDA: Description This module describes how a program can be loaded directly from the program manager into the MDA-buffer and how the processing of the program is started. It will be explained how an edited program, created in the working window, is written from the MDA-buffer to any directory on the control unit. You learn how to create a directory and a workpiece file of the type *.WPD (workpiece directory. Furthermore the functions Program control and Handwheel will be explained.
Operating mode MDA: START
Operating mode MDA
Load MDI
Save MDI
Program control
Handwheel
Operating mode MDA: END
Notes :
Page 3
B551
Section 2
Notes:
Operating mode MDA

In "MDA" mode (Manual Data Automatic), you can enter G-code commands block-by-block and immediately execute them for setting up the machine. You can load an MDA program straight from the Program Manager into the MDA buffer. You may also store programs which were rendered or changed in the MDA operating window into any directory of the program manager. 2.1 Selecting the operating mode MDA
The operating mode MDA can be selected as follows: Press the MDA-key on the operator panel (OP). The operating mode MDA will be opened immediately. - OR Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. Press the VSK 2 MDA in the yellow vertical softkey bar on the right side of the screen and the operating mode MDA will be opened immediately. Now switch to the operating area Machine by pressing the MACHINE key on the operator panel or on the keyboard or press the MENU SELECTkey on the operator panel and the yellow HSK 1 Machine. The following screen opens:
In the operating mode MDA the following softkeys are shown in the horizontal and vertical softkey bar of the Sinumerik Operate:
B571
Page 4
Operating mode MDA

2.2 Vertical softkey bar Description By pressing the VSK 1.1 G functions the most important G-functions are displayed in a window. Available auxiliary functions are displayed in a subwindow by pressing the VSK 1.2 "Auxiliary functions" at the time of the output. By pressing the VSK 1.5 Delete blocks entered program blocks can be deleted. By pressing the VSK 1.7 "Act. vls. MCS", the coordinate system will be toggled between the machine coordinate system (MCS) and the workpiece coordinate system (MCS). Note the machine manufacturers documentation. By pressing the VSK 1.8 "Forward" on the operator panel (OP) the selection of additional softkeys on the vertical softkey bar 2 is possible By pressing the VSK 2.2 "All G functions" all Gfunctions will be shown. By pressing the VSK 2.6 "Zoom act. val." all actual values are displayed full screen. By pressing the VSK 2.8 "Back" on the operator panel (OP) the vertical softkey bar switches back to the menu of the VSK 1. The VSK-bar 1 is active again.
Section 2
Notes:
Display area
Page 5
B571
Section 2
Notes:
Operating mode MDA

2.3 Horizontal softkey bar 1 and 2 Description By pressing the HSK 1 Load MDI the Load into MDI with the program manager window opens. By pressing the HSK 2 Save MDI the Save from MDI : Select storage location with the program manager window opens. By pressing the HSK 4 Prog. cntrl. the Program control subwindow opens on the screen. By pressing the "Extend"-button on the operator panel (OP) more softkeys on the HSK will be available. This symbol on the right of the dialogue line indicates that more options on the HSK are available. Press the Extend-button on the OP to open the extended HSK. This symbol indicates that you are in the extended softkey bar. Press the Extend-button on the operator panel to switch back to the main HSK. By pressing the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" the input mask for traversing the axis in machine coordinate system (MCS) or workpiece coordinate system (WCS) will be available. By pressing the HSK 2.7 "Synchr. Action." the screen which shows the current synchronized actions is displayed.
Display area
B571
Page 6
Load MDI
3.1 Selecting the function Load MDI By pressing the HSK1 Load MDI the Load into MDI window with the Program Manger is displayed as below:
Section 3
Notes:
To navigate in the program manager window use the blue cursor-keys The following operation options are available in the vertical softkey bar to the right: 3.2 Vertical softkey bar Description Press the VSK 7 Cancel to close the Load into MDI window. By pressing the VSK 8 OK the marked program will be opened after closing the window Load into MDI and taken over in the MDI-window. If a program is already in the MDI-buffer, you will be asked to overwrite. Accept with OK or refuse with Cancel. A program loaded in the MDI-buffer can be edited or can be executed by pressing the CYCLE START-button on the MCP 3. 3 1. 2. Loading a MDI-program Switch to operating mode MDA (see section 2.1). Press the VSK 1 Load MDA. The Load into MDI Program manger window opens. Mark the program you want to load with the orange cursor-keys. Press the VSK 8 OK.
Display area
3. 4
The window closes and the program is ready for machining.

B571
Section 4
Notes:
Save MDI
4.1 Selecting the function Save MDI By pressing the HSK2 Save MDI the Save from MDI : Select storage location window with the Program Manger is displayed as below:
Navigate through the program manager window by means of the blue cursor-keys. The following softkeys are available in the vertical softkey bar. 4.2 Vertical softkey bar Description By pressing the VSK 1 New directory a new directory can be created in the Local drive folder. An input window opens where a name can be entered for the new directory that is to be created. Create a new directory by pressing the VSK 8 OK or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. The New directory-softkey is not active if you have placed the cursor on or in the NC data directory. By pressing the VSK 3 Workpiece a new workpiece of the type WPD (workpiece directory) can be created. The current cursor position determines the location of the folder. An input window opens, where a name can be entered. By pressing OK the window New G-Code program is being opened. After selecting the file type (Main program: MPF/ Subprogram: SPF) and entering the filename, the program is saved from the MDA-Buffer into the created directory. The Workpiece-softkey only becomes active if the cursor is placed on or in the Workpieces folder of the NC data section.
Display area
B571
Page 8
Save MDI
Display area Description (continuation) By pressing the VSK 7 Cancel the Save from MDI window will be closed without saving. By pressing the VSK 8 OK, with the cursor on a folder, the New G code program window opens. Select the file type (Main program: MPF/ Subprogram: SPF) that you wish to create. After input of the filename the program will be written from the MDI-buffer to the new created file or the file that is marked with the cursor.
Section 4
Notes:
4.3 Saving a MDI-program 1. Select the operating mode MDA (see section 2.1) The MDI editor opens. 2. Create the MDI program by entering the G-code commands using the keyboard. Press the VSK 2 "Save MDI. The "Save from MDA : Select storage location" window opens. It shows you a view of the program manager. 4. Select the drive to which you want to save the MDI program you have created, and place the cursor on the directory in which the program is to be stored. Press the VSK 8 OK. Note: When you place the cursor on a folder, a window opens which prompts you to assign a program name. When you place the cursor on a program, you are asked whether the file should be overwritten or not. 7. Enter a name for the program and press the VSK 8 OK.
3.
5.
The program will be saved under the specified name in the selected directory.
Page 9
B571
Section 5
Notes:
Program control
5.1 Selecting the function Program control By pressing the HSK 4 Prog. cntrl. the Program control window will be opened, as displayed below.
Navigate with the blue cursor-up and cursor-down through the option fields. To activate or deactivate a program control option press the SELECT-key on the machine control panel. The following program control options are available: Abbreviation/ Program control PRT no axis motion Scope The program is started and executed with auxiliary function outputs and dwell times. In this mode, the axes are not traversed. The programmed axis positions and the auxiliary function outputs are controlled this way. Note: Program processing without axis motion can also be activated with the function "Dry run feedrate". DRY Dry run feedrate The traversing velocities programmed in conjunction with G1, G2, G3, CIP and CT are replaced by a defined dry run feedrate. The dry run feedrate also applies instead of the programmed revolutional feedrate. Caution: Workpieces should not be machined when "Dry run feedrate" is active, because the altered feedrates might cause the permissible tool cutting rates to be exceeded and the workpiece or machine tool could be damaged.
B571
Page 10
Program control
Abbreviation/ Program control RG0 Reduced rapid trav. Scope (continuation) In the rapid traverse mode, the traversing speed of the axes is reduced to the percentage value entered in RG0. (Please refer to chapter 9.1 in module B572) M01 Programmed stop 1 The processing of the program stops at every block in which supplementary function M01 is programmed. In this way you can check the already obtained result during the processing of a workpiece. Note: In order to continue executing the program, press the "CYCLE START" key again. Programmed stop 2 (e.g. M101) The processing of the program stops at every block in which the "Cycle end" is programmed (e.g. with M101). Note: In order to continue executing the program, press the "CYCLE START" key again. This function must be projected via a machine datum. Refer to the machine manufacturers documentation. DRF Handwheel offset Enables an additional incremental zero offset while processing in automatic operation mode with an electronic handwheel. This function can be used to compensate for tool wear within a programmed block. SB Individual blocks are configured as follows: SB 1 - Single block, coarse: The machining stops only after blocks that perform a machine function (exept for cycles). SB 2 - Data block: The machining stops after each block; also for data blocks (except for cycles). SB 3 - Single block, fine: The machining stops after each machine block (also in cycles). Select the desired setting using the "SELECT" key. The activation of the function Single block takes place by pressing SINGLE BLOCK on the machine control panel. SKP Skip blocks are skipped during machining.
Section 5
Notes:
Page 11
B571
Section 5
Notes:
Program control
5.2
Vertical softkey bar Description By pressing the VSK 8 Back you can switch back to the Program control window in MDA mode.
Display area
5.3 Controlling the program run 1. In the operating mode MDA select the HSK 4 Progr. cntrl.. The Program control window opens. 2. Select the desired program control (see Section 5.1 in this module). Press the VSK 8 Back to switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate in MDA-operating mode.
3.
B571
Page 12
Handwheel
Section 6
Notes:
You can traverse the axes in the machine coordinate system (MCS) or in the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) via the handwheel. All axes are provided in the following order for handwheel assignment: Geometry axes (X, Y, Z) Channel machine axes (X1, Y1, Z1, C1) By pressing the HSK 2.6 Handwheel in the extended horizontal softkey bar the following input mask will be shown on the screen.
An input field for the assignment of the axes is offered for every handwheel parameterised on the machine. The axis-assignment can be made like described in the module B568 - "Basic operations". Besides there is the possibility to assign an axis directly to a handwheel using the corresponding softkey on the VSK. 6.2 Vertical softkey bar
The number of softkeys for the axis assignment is limited. For the assignment of all other axes refer to the module B568 - "Basic operations", Section 3.2 "Parameter selection". Generally you can switch through all available axes by repeatedly pressing the blue "SELECT"-key on the keyboard. Display area Geometry axes By pressing the VSK 1 "X" the X-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing the VSK 2 "Y" the Y-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing the VSK 3 "Z" the Z-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel.
Description
B571
Section 6
Notes:
Handwheel
Display area Machine axes By pressing the VSK 4 "X1" the X1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing the VSK 5 "Y1" the Y1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing the VSK 6 "Z1" the Z1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing VSK 7 "C1" the C1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you can switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate with extended HSK-bar. 6.3 Handwheel assignment 1. In the operating mode MDA (or JOG or AUTO) select the operating area Machine, then press the HSK 2.6 Handwheel in the extended horizontal softkey bar. The Handwheel window opens. A field for axis assignment will be offered for every connected handwheel. Place the cursor in the field next to the handwheel with which you wish to assign the axis (e.g. no. 1). Press the corresponding softkey to select the desired axis (e.g. "X"). - OR To open the "Axis" selection box using the "INSERT" key, navigate to the desired axis, and press the "INPUT" key. Selecting an axis also activates the handwheel (e.g., "X" is assigned to handwheel no. 1 and is activated immediately). 5. Press the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" again - OR Press the VSK 8 "Back". The "Handwheel" window closes. Description (continuation)
2.
3.
4.
B571
Page 14
Handwheel
6.4 Deactivating the handwheel 1. 2. The cursor must be placed on that handwheel whose axis-assignment should be cancelled. By pressing the corresponding axis-softkey again the assignment is cancelled. -ORAlternatively with pressing the INSERT-key, the selection menu with all available axes can be opened. 3. By using the blue Cursor-up- and Cursor-downkeys on the keyboard, switch to the empty field on top of the menu and press the yellow "INPUT"-keys on the keyboard. The empty value will be accepted. The corresponding handwheel is now deactivated.
Section 6
Notes:
Page 15
B571
Section 7
Notes:
7.1 Selecting the function Synchronized actions
By pressing the HSK 2.7 Synchronized actions on the extended horizontal Softkey-bar, in the operation area Machine in operation mode MDA , the following mask will be shown on the screen.
B571
Page 16
B572
Operating mode AUTO
Brief description
Objective of the module: In this module you learn the different options of the operating mode "AUTO" in the operating area "Machine".
Description of the module: This module describes, how to overstore technological parameters (for example, auxiliary functions, axis feed, spindle speed, programmable instructions, etc.) for a program run in the main memory of the NCK. It is described among other things, how the execution of a program can be stopped at a specific part of the program run with the function Program control (programmed stop). The differences between the two block search modes (with or without calculation) will be explained in detail as well as the function Simultaneous recording. The handwheel assignment and the functions Settings and Synchronized actions complete this module.
Content: Operating mode AUTO Overstore Program control Block search Simultaneous recording Program correction Handwheel Synchronized actions Settings

B572
B572
B572
Page 2
B572
Operating mode AUTO: Description This module describes, how to overstore technological parameters (for example, auxiliary functions, axis feed, spindle speed, programmable instructions, etc.) for a program run in the main memory of the NCK. It is described among other things, how the execution of a program can be stopped at a specific part of the program run with the function Program control (programmed stop). The differences between the two block search modes (with or without calculation) will be explained in detail as well as the function Simultaneous recording. The handwheel assignment and the functions Settings and Synchronized actions complete this module.
Operating mode AUTO: START Settings
Operating mode AUTO Operating mode AUTO: END Overstore
Program control
Block search
Simultaneous recording
Program correction
Handwheel
Notes :
Page 3
B572
Section 2
Notes:
Operating mode AUTO

2.1 Selecting the operating mode AUTO
The operating mode AUTO can be selected as follows: Press the AUTO button on the machine control panel (MCP). The operating mode AUTO opens directly. - OR Press the button MENU SELECT on the machine control panel. Press the VSK 1 AUTO in the yellow VSK-bar on the right hand side of the screen to switch directly to the operating mode AUTO. Next, switch to the operating area Machine by pressing the MACHINE-key on the operator panel or the keyboard else press the MENU SELECTkey on the operator panel and the yellow HSK 1 Machine. The following screen opens:
The following softkeys will be shown in the vertical and horizontal softkey bars: 2.2 Vertical softkey bar 1 and 2 Description By pressing the VSK 1.1 G functions the most important G-functions will be displayed. By pressing the VSK 1.2 Auxiliary functions, available auxiliary functions will be displayed at the time of the output. By pressing the VSK 1.3 Basic blocks all G-code commands that trigger a function on the machine will be displayed. The display updates both in the test operation and in the actual machining of the workpiece at the machine.
Display area
B572
Page 4
Operating mode AUTO

Display area Description (continuation) By pressing the VSK 1.4 Time counter the program run time, the rest of the program run time and the amount of machined workpieces will be displayed. Note: Refer to the machine manufacturers documentation. By pressing the VSK 1.5 Program levels you can display the current program level during the execution of a large program with several subprograms. By pressing the VSK 1.7 Act vls. MCS you can switch over from the machine coordinate system (MCS) to the workpiece coordinate system (WCS). Note: Refer to the machine manufacturers documentation. By pressing the VSK 1.8 "Extend" on the operator panel (OP) you switch to the vertical softkey bar 2 with additional softkeys displayed. By pressing the VSK 2.2 All G functions all Gfunctions will be displayed. By pressing the VSK 2.6 Zoom act. val. all actual values will be displayed full-screen. By pressing the VSK 2.8 Back on the operator panel you can switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.
Section 2
Notes:
2.2 Horizontal softkey bar 1 and 2 Display area Description Pressing the HSK 1.2 Overstore allows you to overstore technological parameters (for example, auxiliary functions, axis feed, spindle speed, programmable instructions, etc.) for a program run in the main memory of the NCK. By pressing the HSK 1.4 Prog. cntrl. the working window for controlling the program run will be opened. By pressing the HSK 1.5 Block search the block search window opens. By pressing the HSK 1.7 Simultaneous recording you can graphically display the execution of the program on the screen before or during machining of the workpiece, to monitor the result of the programming.
Page 5
B572
Section 2
Notes:
Operating mode AUTO

Display area Description (continuation) By pressing the HSK 1.8 Prog. corr. (program correction) the program editor opens. By pressing the "Extend"-button on the operator panel you can switch between the normal and the extended horizontal softkey bar. This symbol on the right of the dialogue line indicates that more softkeys are available on the extended horizontal softkey bar. This symbol indicates that the extended horizontal softkey bar is shown on the screen. You can switch back to the HSK 1 again by pressing the Extendkey. By pressing the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" the input mask for assigning axes to all parameterized handwheels is displayed. By pressing the HSK 2.7 "Synchr. Action." the screen which shows the current synchronized actions is displayed. By pressing the HSK 2.8 "Settings" a window opens up where you can adjust the settings for manual operation on the Sinumerik Operate.
B572
Page 6
Overstore
3.1 Selecting the Function Overstore By pressing the HSK 1.2 Overstore the Overstore window opens (see picture below).
Section 3
Notes:
The program to be corrected has to be in the STOP or RESET mode. In the Overstore editor view you can overstore technological parameters (for example, auxiliary functions, axis feed, spindle speed, programmable instructions, etc.) for a program run in the main memory of the NCK. The programs in the part program memory are not changed while using the function Overstore. You cannot change the operating mode while you are in overstore mode. 3.2 Vertical softkey bar Description By pressing the VSK 1.5 Delete blocks you can delete the blocks you have entered before. By pressing the VSK 1.8 Back the window is being closed. A change of the operation mode is now possible. Press CYCLE START to continue running the previously selected program. Procedure for Overstore Open a program in the operating mode AUTO then press the HSK 1.2 Overstore. The Overstore window opens. Enter the required data and NC block. Press the CYCLE START key. The blocks you have entered are stored. You can observe execution in the "Overstore" window. After the entered blocks have been executed, you can append blocks again. Press the VSK 8 "Back". The "Overstore" window closes. Press the CYCLE START key again. The program selected before overstoring continues to run.
Display area
3.3 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
Page 7
B572
Section 4
Notes:
Program control
4.1 Selecting the function Program control By pressing the HSK 1.4 Prog. cntrl. the Program control window opens like displayed below:
Navigation through the option menu takes place by pressing the blue Cursor keys on the keyboard. You can activate or deactivate an option by selecting the entry first and then pressing the blue SELECT key. The following program control options are selectable: Abbreviation/ Program control PRT No axis motion Scope The program is started and executed with auxiliary function outputs and dwell times. In this mode, the axes are not traversed. The programmed axis positions and the auxiliary function outputs are controlled this way. Note: Program processing without axis motion can also be activated with the function "Dry run feedrate". DRY Dry run feedrate The traversing velocities programmed in conjunction with G1, G2, G3, CIP and CT are replaced by a defined dry run feedrate. The dry run feedrate also applies instead of the programmed revolutional feedrate. Caution: Workpieces must not be machined when "Dry run feedrate" is active because the altered feedrates might cause the permissible tool cutting rates to be exceeded and the workpiece or machine tool could be damaged.
B572
Page 8
Program control
Abbreviation/ program control RG0 Reduced rapid trav. Scope (Continuation) In the rapid traverse mode, the traversing speed of the axes is reduced to the percentage value entered in RG0. (Please refer to chapter 9.1 in this module) M01 Programmed stop 1 The processing of the program stops at every block in which supplementary function M01 is programmed. In this way you can check the already obtained result during the processing of a workpiece. Note: In order to continue executing the program, press the "CYCLE START" key again. Programmed stop 2 (e.g. M101) The processing of the program stops at every block in which the "Cycle end" is programmed (e.g. with M101). Note: In order to continue executing the program, press the "CYCLE START" key again. The display can be changed. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. DRF Handwheel offset Enables an additional incremental zero offset while processing in automatic operation mode with an electronic handwheel. This function can be used to compensate for tool wear within a programmed block. Individual blocks are configured as follows: SB 1 - Single block, coarse: The program stops only after blocks which perform a machine function. SB 2 - Data block: The program stops after each block. SB 3 - Single block, fine: The program stops also in cycles after blocks, which perform a machine function. Select the desired setting using the "SELECT" key on the keyboard. The selection of the function Single block takes place by pressing the SINGLE BLOCK-key on the machine control panel (MCP). SKP Skipped blocks are skipped during machining.
Section 4
Notes:
SB
Page 9
B572
Section 4
Notes:
Program control
4.2
Vertical softkey bar Description By pressing the VSK 8 Back you return to the window Program control.
Display area
4.3 Controlling the program run 1. In the operating mode AUTO and the operating area Machine press the HSK 4 Prog. cntrl.. The Program control window opens and shows a list of program control options. 2. Select the desired program control (see section 4.1 in this module). Press the VSK 8 Back to go back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate in the operating mode AUTO and operating area Machine. Hint: The orange selection cursor disappears, if a skip block is confirmed with the yellow INPUT-key. With the blue cursor to the left or cursor to the right you return again to the selection mode.
3.
B572
Page 10
Block search
5.1 Selecting the function Block search By pressing the HSK 1.5 Block search the block search window opens as shown below.
Section 5
Notes:
If you would only like to perform a certain section of a program on the machine, then you dont have to start the program from the beginning. You can also start the program from a specified program block. Applications of this function are to stop or interrupt program execution and to specify a target position (e.g. during machining). Determination of search targets per: a. Comfortable search target definitions (search positions) Direct specification of the search target by positioning the cursor in the selected program (main program). Search target via text search. The search target is the interruption point (main program and subprogram). The function is only available if there is an interruption point. After a program interruption (CYCLE STOP or RESET), the controller saves the coordinates of the interruption point. The search target is the higher program level of the interruption point (main program and subprogram). The level can only be changed if it was previously possible to select an interruption point in a subprogram. It is then possible to change the program level up to the main program level and back to the level of the interruption point. - OR -
Page 11
B572
Section 5
Notes:
Block search
b. Search pointer Direct entry of the program path in the Search pointer window.
If a search target was found, it is possible to start another search run immediately. This can be done many times after every successful search run. Attention: Pay attention to a collision-free starting position as well as accurate active tools and other technological values. If necessary move the tool to a save starting position. Select the target block considering the selected block search type. Navigation through the program blocks takes place by using the blue cursor-keys on the keyboard. The following functions are available in the vertical softkey bar:
5.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1 Start search the search run starts depending on the search mode you have selected before. Press the VSK 1 several times, until the found target (z.B. with search text) corresponds to the searched program block. By pressing the VSK 2 Blk. sear. mode the Block search mode window opens. Two different block search modes are selectable: With calculation: Without approach: It is used in order to be able to approach a target position in any circumstance (e.g. tool change position). The end position of the target block or the next programmed position is approached using the type of interpolation valid in the target block. Only the axes programmed in the target block are moved. With approach: It is used to be able to approach the contour in any circumstance. The end position of the block prior to the target block is found with "CYCLE START". The program runs in the same way as in normal program processing.
B572
Page 12
Block search
Display area Description (continuation) Without calculation: For a quick search in the main program. Calculations will not be performed during the block search, i.e. the calculation is skipped up to the target block. All settings required for execution have to be programmed from the target block (e.g. feedrate, spindle speed, etc.). Pressing the VSK 3 Higher level changes the program level to one level higher. Pressing the VSK 4 Lower level changes the program level to one level lower. By pressing the VSK 5 Search for text the Search window opens. After entering the search direction in the Direction field and the search text in the Text field and by pressing the VSK 8 OK the search run starts. After a successful search you can search for the same search parameter again, by pressing the VSK 8 Continue search. The search can be cancelled by pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. A new search run with new search parameters can be initiated with the VSK 4 Search. By pressing the VSK 6 Interrupt point the program that was interrupted before, by pressing the RESET key, will be executed again. By pressing the VSK 7 Search pointer you can jump directly to a desired part of the program. The following options are available in a list in the Search pointer window: Program The name of the currently loaded program is automatically entered Ext. File extension P Pass counter: If a program section is performed several times, you can enter the number of the pass here at which processing is to be continued Line Is automatically filled for an interruption point
Section 5
Notes:
Page 13
B572
Section 5
Notes:
Block search
Display area Description (continuation) Type N no.: Label: Text: Subprg.: Line:
Block number Jump label Text string Subprogram call Line number
Search target Search target point in the program at which machining is to start By pressing the VSK 8 Back the Search window closes. 5.3 Starting a block search 1. A desired program is selected and the machining was discontinued with pressing RESET or CYCLE STOP or the control unit is generally in RESET state. In the operating mode AUTO and the operating area Machine press the HSK 5 Block search. For further steps see below: Simple search target definition: Steps 1 and 2 (see above). 3. Place the cursor on a particular program block. - OR Press the VSK 5 "Search for text", select the search direction, enter the search text and confirm with the VSK 8 "OK". 4. Press the VSK 1 Start search. The search starts. Your specified search mode will be taken into account (indicated in the upper blue title bar of the search target window). The current block will be displayed and marked in the "Program" window as soon as the target is found. 5. If the located target (for example, when searching via text) does not correspond to the program block, press the "Start search" softkey again until you find your target. Press the "CYCLE START"-key twice. Processing is continued from the defined position.
2.
6.
B572
Page 14
Block search
Interruption point as search target: 1. - 2. 3. Steps 1 and 2 (see above). Press the VSK 6 Interrupt point The interruption point is loaded. 4. If the VSK 3 "Higher level" and the VSK 4 "Lower level" are available, use these to change the program level. Press the VSK 1 "Start search". The search starts. The specified search mode will be taken into account (indicated in the upper blue title bar of the search target window). The search screen closes. The current block will be displayed and marked in the "Program" window as soon as the target is found. 6. Press the "CYCLE START"-key on the machine control panel (MCP) twice. The execution will continue from the interruption point. Search target via search pointer: Steps 1 and 2 (see above). 3. Press the VSK 7 Search pointer. The Search pointer window opens. 4. Enter the full path of the program as well as the subprograms, if required, in the input fields. Press the VSK 1 Start search. The search starts. The specified search mode will be taken into account (indicated in the upper blue title bar of the search target window). The search screen closes. The current block will be displayed and marked in the "Program" window as soon as the target is found. 6 Press the "CYCLE START" key on the machine control panel twice. Processing is continued from the defined location.
Section 5
Notes:
5.
5.
Page 15
B572
Section 6
Notes:
6.1 Selecting the function Simultaneous recording Pressing the HSK 1.7 Simult. Record. opens the simultaneous recording window.
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically display the execution of the program on the screen to monitor the result of the programming. You can replace the programmed feedrate with a dry run feedrate to influence the speed of execution. Simultaneous record can also be turned on, if machining is already running. You can also use simultaneous recording during machining of a workpiece. This helps if the view towards the inside of the cabin is obstructed by coolant. In each different view of the Simultaneous recording window you can adjust the view by using the blue cursor keys and zoom in or out by using the plus (+) and minus (-) keys on the keyboard. The traversing paths of the tool in the Simultaneous recording window are displayed in different colours: red for rapid traverse and green for feed motion. The following softkeys, each representing a different view on the simulated workpiece, are available on the vertical softkey bars.
6.2 Vertical softkey bar 1 and 2 Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1.3 Top view the work piece will be shown in a plan view from the top. By pressing the VSK 1.4 3D view the work piece will be shown in a 3-D view. By pressing the VSK 1.5 Further views the vertical softkey bar 3 opens with options to change to different views of the workpiece (see section 6.3).
B572
Page 16
Display area Description (continuation) By pressing the VSK 1.6 Details the vertical softkey bar 4 opens (see section 6.4 in this module). By pressing the VSK 1.7 Extend on the operator panel the softkeys of the vertical softkey bar 2 will be shown. By pressing the VSK 1.8 Back you switch back to the main screen of the operating area Machine in the operating mode AUTO. By pressing the VSK 2.1 Show tool path the animated path display that follows the programmed tool path of the selected program is shown on the screen. Press this softkey again to turn off the function. The traversing paths are shown in two different colours: red colour for rapid traverse and green colour for feed motion. By pressing the VSK 2.2 Delete tool path all tool paths so far generated, including tool paths generated in the background, are deleted. By pressing the VSK 2.3 Blank the Blank input window opens. Here, the zero offset, the form and the dimensions of the blank can be entered,. By pressing the VSK 2.8 Back on the operator panel you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1. 6.3 Vertical softkey bar 3 (from VSK 1.5 Further views) Description By pressing the VSK 2 windows the screen is split into two different views of the workpiece. The 2 -windowed view contains a side view (left-hand window) and a front view (right-hand window) of the workpiece. The viewing direction is always from the front to the cutting surface even if machining is to be performed from behind or from the back side. The active view is shown with a white background. You can switch between both windows by pressing the NEXT WINDOW key on the keyboard. 6.4 Vertical softkey bar 4 (from VSK 1.6 Details) Description By pressing the VSK 4.1 Autozoom the workpiece will be aligned in an optimal way on the screen, so that it fits the whole window. By pressing the VSK 4.2 Zoom + you zoom in to magnify the graphical representation of the workpiece in the window. Alternatively you can press the plus (+) key on the number block of the keyboard.
Section 6
Notes:
Display area
Display area
B572
Section 6
Notes:
Display area Description (continuation) By pressing the VSK 4.3 Zoom - you zoom out of the window to reduce the graphical representation of the workpiece. Alternatively you can press the minus (-) key on the number block of the keyboard. By pressing the VSK 4.4 Zoom a zoom window in the shape of a right angled frame is placed on the screen. With the VSK Zoom + and the VSK Zoom - you can increase or decrease the size of the right angled frame and therefore the zoom-factor. Alternatively you can use the plus (+) or minus (-) key on the keyboard. The blue cursor keys on the keyboard are used to pan the frame on the screen, adjusting the fragment you wish to magnify. After pressing the VSK 8 OK the screen will be zoomed in to the extend of the frame window. You can exit the Zoom function with the Softkey Cancel By pressing the VSK 4.5 Rotate view the vertical softkey bar 5 opens (see section 6.5). By pressing the VSK 4.8 Back on the operator panel you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1. 6.5 Vertical softkey bar 5 (from VSK 4.5 Rotate view) Description By pressing the VSK 5.1 the workpiece will be turned right around its own vertical centre line. By pressing the VSK 5.2 the workpiece will be turned left around its own vertical centre line. By pressing the VSK 5.3 the workpiece will be turned upwards around its own horizontal centre line. By pressing the VSK 5.4 the workpiece will be turned downwards around its own horizontal centre line. By pressing the VSK 5.5 the workpiece will be turned left (counter clockwise) around the centre of the screen. By pressing the VSK 5.6 the workpiece will be turned right (clockwise) around the centre of the screen. By pressing the VSK 5.8 Back on the operator panel you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 4.
Display area
B572
Page 18
6.6 Simultaneous recording of a program run Simultaneous recording before machining of the workpiece 1. 2. Load a program in the operating mode AUTO. Press the HSK 1.4 Prog. cntrl. and activate the checkboxes "PRT No axis motion" and "DRY Dry run feedrate". The program is executed without axis movement. The programmed feedrate is replaced by a dry run feedrate. -ORLet the DRY Dry run feedrate box unchecked. Simultaneous recording is performed with the programmed feedrate. 3. Press the HSK 7 Simultan. record. The Simultaneous recording window opens. Press the CYCLE START key on the machine control panel (MCP). The execution of the program on the machine is started and displayed graphically on the screen. Press CYCLE STOP to stop machining and the HSK 7 "Simultan. record" again to close the Simultaneous recording window.
Section 6
Notes:
4.
5.
Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece 1. 2. Load a program in the operating mode AUTO. Press the HSK 7 Simultan. record. The Simultaneous recording window opens. Press the CYCLE START-key on the machine control panel (MCP). The machining of the workpiece is started and graphically displayed on the screen. Press the CYCLE STOP-key and the HSK 7 "Simultan. record" again to stop the recording and to close the Simultaneous recording window.
3.
4.
Page 19
B572
Section 7
Notes:
Program correction
As soon as a syntax error in the part program is detected by the controller, program execution is interrupted and the syntax error is displayed in the alarm line. Depending on the state of the control, you can make the following corrections using the Program correction function: STOP mode: Only program lines that have not yet been executed can be edited. RESET state: All program lines can be edited Note: The "Program correction" function is only available for part programs in the NC memory, not for external execution (e.g. on USB media).
7.1
Selecting the function Program correction By pressing the HSK 1.8 Prog. Corr. the program editor window opens for correction of the program. See modules B600 and B604 Basics of programming.
7.2
Vertical softkey bar 1 and 2
A precise description of the vertical softkeys can be found in the modules B600 and B604 Basics of programming.
B572
Page 20
Program correction
7.3 Correcting a program 1. The program to be corrected is in the STOP or RESET mode. Press the HSK 8 Prog. corr.. The selected program is opened in the editor. The program pre-processing and the current block are displayed. The current block is also updated in the running program, but not the displayed program section, i.e. the current block moves out of the displayed program section. If a subprogram is executed, it is not opened automatically.
Section 7
Notes:
2.
3. 4.
Make the necessary corrections. Press the HSK 8 "NC Execute". The system switches back to the "Machine" operating area and selects operating mode "AUTO". Press the CYCLE START key on the machine control panel (MCP). The program execution is resumed. Note: Leaving the program editor via the VSK 2.7 EXIT, opens the operating area Program Manager.
5.
Page 21
B572
Section 8
Notes:
Handwheel
You can traverse the axes in the machine coordinate system (MCS) or in the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) via the handwheel. All axes are provided in the following order for handwheel assignment: Geometry axes (X, Y, Z) Channel machine axes (X1, Y1, Z1, C1) By pressing the HSK 2.6 Handwheel in the extended horizontal softkey bar the following input mask will be shown on the screen.
An input field for the assignment of the axes is offered for every handwheel on the machine. The axis-assignment can be made like described in the module B568 - "Basic operations". Besides there is the possibility to assign an axis directly to a handwheel using the VSK 1 - 8. 8.2 Vertical softkey bar (VSK)
The number of softkeys for the axis assignment is limited. For the assignment of all other axes refer to the module B568 - "Basic operations", Section 3.2 "Parameter selection. Generally you can switch through all available axes by repeatedly pressing the blue "SELECT"-key on the keyboard. Display area Geometry axes By pressing the VSK 1 "X" the X-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing the VSK 2 "Y" the Y-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing the VSK 3 "Z" the Z-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. Description
B572
Page 22
Handwheel
Display area Machine axes: By pressing the VSK 4 "X1" the X1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing the VSK 5 "Y1" the Y1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing the VSK 6 "Z1" the Z1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing VSK 7 "C1" the C1-axis is assigned to the selected handwheel. By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you can close the window for the Handwheel 8.3 Handwheel assignment 1. In the operating mode AUTO select the operating area Machine, then press the HSK 2.6 Handwheel in the extended horizontal softkey bar. The Handwheel window opens. A field for axis assignment will be offered for every connected handwheel. Place the cursor in the field next to the handwheel with which you wish to assign the axis (e.g. no. 1). Press the corresponding softkey to select the desired axis (e.g. "X"). - OR To open the "Axis" selection box using the "INSERT" key, navigate to the desired axis, and press the "INPUT" key. Selecting an axis also activates the handwheel (e.g., "X" is assigned to handwheel no. 1 and is activated immediately). 5. Press the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" again. - OR Press the VSK 8 "Back" . The "Handwheel" window closes. 8.4 Deactivating the handwheel The cursor must be placed on that handwheel whose axis-assignment should be cancelled. By pressing the corresponding axis-softkey again the assignment is cancelled. Alternatively with pressing the INSERTkey, the selection menu with all available axes can be opened. By using the blue cursor-up- and cursor-down-keys on the keyboard, switch to the empty field on top of the menu and press one of the yellow "INPUT"-keys on the keyboard. The empty value will be accepted. The corresponding handwheel is now deactivated. Description (continuation)
Section 8
Notes:
2.
3. 4.
Page 23
B572
Section 9
Notes:
9.1 Selecting the function Synchronized actions By pressing the HSK 2.7 Synchronized actions the following mask will be shown on the screen:
B572
Page 24
Settings
10.1 Selecting the function Settings By pressing the HSK 2.8 Settings the following input mask with the settings for automatic mode is shown on the screen.
Section 10
Notes:
10.2 Vertical softkey bar (VSK) Display area Description By pressing the VSK 5 "Changeover inch" the measuring units are converted from the metric to the imperial (inch) dimension system. New values have to be entered in inches. By pressing this key the key function switches to "Changeover metric". By pressing the VSK 5 "Changeover metric" the measuring units are converted from the imperial (inch) to the metric dimension system. New values have to be metric. By pressing this key the key function switches to "Changeover inch". Accept the selection by pressing the VSK 8 OK or cancel by pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate.
Page 25
B572
Section 10
Notes:
Settings
10.3 Parameters for "Settings for automatic mode" In the Settings for automatic mode window all configurations for automatic operation can be done. Parameter Dry run feedrate DRY Unit [mm/ min] Meaning The feedrate defined here replaces the programmed feedrate during execution if you have selected DRY dry run feedrate under program control. This value entered here reduces the rapid traverse to the entered percentage value if you have selected RG0 reduced rapid traverse under program control. Using a MMC command, you can display measurement results in a part program: When the control reaches the command, it automatically jumps into the Machine operating area and the window with the measurement results is displayed. The window with the measurement results is opened by pressing the softkey Measurement result.
Reduced rapid trav- [%] erse RG0
Display result of measurement
B572
Page 26
B573
Operating area Parameter
Brief description
Objective of the module: In this module you learn to use the tool management with the Sinumerik Operate. You learn about the programming philosophy of the adjustable and programmable work offset, the function of the user variables and how to modify the working area limitation. Description of the module: In the tool management area all tool data relevant for machining (e.g., tool length, radius correction, tool wear and magazine configuration) can be viewed and modified. The tool management contains the following sub-functions: the tool list the tool wear the magazine management In addition to these sub-functions a machine specific list can be configured by the machine manufacturer. Refer to the machine manufacturers documentation. In the "Work offset" menu the linear and rotational offsets can be viewed and modified in the settable work offset (WO). The working range in which a tool can proceed, can be restricted in all axes with the function Working area limitation. Hereby safety zones can be installed in the workspace, where tool movement is prohibited. This function limits the traversing area of the axes, in addition to the limit switches. Content: Operating area Parameter Tool list Tool wear Magazine management Zero offset basics Work offset User variable Setting data

B573
B573
B573
Page 2
B573
Operating area Parameter: Description In the tool management area all tool data relevant for machining (e.g., tool length, radius correction, tool wear and magazine configuration) can be viewed and modified. The tool management contains the following subfunctions: the tool list the tool wear the magazine management In addition to these sub-functions a machine specific list can be configured by the machine manufacturer. Refer to the machine manufacturers documentation. In the "Work offset" menu the linear and rotational offsets can be viewed and modified in the settable work offset (WO). The working range in which a tool can proceed, can be restricted in all axes with the function Working area limitation. Hereby safety zones can be installed in the workspace, where tool movement is prohibited. This function limits the traversing area of the axes, in addition to the limit switches.
Tool list Operating area Parameter: START
Tool wear
Magazine management
Zero offset basics
Work offset
User variable
Setting data
Operating area Parameter: END
Notes :
Page 3
B573
Section 2
Notes:

2.1 Selecting the operating area Parameter
In the Operation area Parameter you have a choice of selecting between various lists (e.g. Tool list, tool wear, magazine list, offsets, user variables and setting data). For example in the tool management area, all tools and if configured also the magazine locations are being displayed. Both lists display the same tools in the same order. When switching between lists, the position of the cursor on a particular tool in the current screen is carried over to the same tool in a new screen. The lists differ from each other by the displayed parameters and the Softkey functions. Switching between lists is a specific change from one topic to the next. Tool list: All parameters and functions required to create and set up tools are displayed. Tool wear: All parameters and functions that are required during operation, e.g. wear and monitoring functions, are listed here. Magazine: Magazine and magazine location-related parameters and functions for the tools and magazine locations are listed here. The operating area Parameter can be opened from every operating modes (JOG, MDA, AUTO). Press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard. The operating area Parameter respectively the Tool list opens directly. - OR Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. The yellow horizontal and vertical softkey bar opens. Then switch to the operating area Parameter by pressing the HSK 2 Parameter on the operator panel. The operating area Parameter opens, with the Tool list, Tool wear, Magazine, Work offset, User variables and the Setting data. These functions are made available in the following described horizontal softkey bar. 2.2 Horizontal softkey bar (HSK) Description By pressing the HSK 1 Tool list the tool list window opens. See section 3 Tool list. By pressing the HSK 2 Tool wear the tool wear list opens. See section 4 Tool wear.
Display area
B573
Page 4
Tool list
Display area Description (continuation) By pressing the HSK 4 Magazine the Magazine management is opened. See section 5 Magazine. By pressing the HSK 5 Work offset a list with all Work offsets is opened. See section 7 Work offset. By pressing the HSK 6 User variable a list with all R variables is opened. See section 8 User variable. By pressing the HSK 8 Setting data a list with all setting data is opened. See section 9 Setting data. Selecting the Tool list By pressing the HSK 1 Tool list the Tool list window opens. (Note the screen below.)
Section 3
Notes:
3.1
In the tool list all parameters and functions that are required to create and set up the tools are displayed, regardless weather the tools are assigned or not assigned to a magazine location. Each tool is uniquely identified by the location number, the tool name and the replacement tool number. The most common tools and probes for turning, drilling and milling are offered in the tool list. Geometrical and technological tool data can be assigned to each tool type. Depending on the tool type different correction data are necessary.
Page 5
B573
Section 3
Notes:
Tool list
3.2 Vertical softkey bar Description By pressing the VSK 1.1 Tool measure the Measuring tool window opens. (See section 3.7 in this module) By pressing the VSK 1.2 New tool a new tool can be created. This function is only available, if the cursor is positioned on a filed that does not yet has a tool assigned to it. (See section 3.5 in this module) By pressing the VSK 1.3 Edges the vertical softkey bar for assigning new cutting edges and deleting existing cutting edges opens to the right side of the screen. If a tool has several cutting edges each edge gets its own set of correction data. (See section 3.8 in this module) By pressing the VSK 1.4 Further data more information about a tool will be displayed. This function is only available for tools which have additional information. (See section 3.5, page 17 in this module) By pressing the VSKs 1.5 Unload or Load the actual selected tool wil be unloaded from or loaded to the magazine. Unloaded tools are being displayed on the bottom of the magazine list. (See section 3.10, page 24 in this module) By pressing the VSK 1.6 Delete tool the selected tool will be deleted from the tool list. (See section 3.9, page 23 in this module) By pressing the VSK 1.7 Magazine selection Softkey multiple times you can jump between buffer location (spindle and gripper), Magazine and NCmemory (unloaded tools) and back to the buffer location. The cursor is always positioned at the beginning of each group. (See section 3.11, page 26 in this module) By pressing the VSK 1.8 Extend on the operator panel the extended vertical softkey bar 2 opens on the right hand side of the screen. By pressing the VSK 2.1 Sort you can sort the tools in the tool list according to the following criteria: Magazine Name Type T-Number The suitable softkeys are offered in the vertical softkey bar. (See section 3.12 in this module)
Display area
B573
Page 6
Tool list
Display area Description (continuation) Pressing the VSK 2.2 Filter opens the screen to set the filter options. (See section 3.13 in this module) Pressing the VSK 2.4 Details opens a new softkey bar with the functions Tool Data Cutting edge data Monitoring data The details of the tool which is selected by the cursor position are listed in the screen. Pressing the VSK 2.8 Back on the operator panel you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1. Pressing the VSK 3.3 Tool data opens the screen Tool details - all parameters.
Section 3
Notes:
By pressing the VSK 3.5 Cutting edge data the cutting edge data for the selected edge is being displayed. In case of tools with several cutting edges you can switch with VSK 3.1 Cutting edge + or VSK 3.2 Cutting edge - between the individual cutting edges.
Page 7
B573
Section 3
Notes:
Tool list
Display area Description (continuation)
By pressing the VSK 3.6 Monitoring data you can select the monitoring data of the selected tool. In case of tools with several cutting edges you can switch with VSK 3.1 Cutting edge + or VSK 3.2 Cutting edge - between the individual cutting edges.
Alternately you can also navigate with the cursor buttons cursor left and cursor right between the masks Tool data, Cutting edge data and Monitoring data.
B573
Page 8
Tool list
3.3 Tool parameters Meaning Magazine/location number Spindle location as an icon Location for gripper 1 and 2 as icons: (Applies only when a spindle with dual gripper is used.) Magazine number: If more than one magazine is available, first the location number and then the magazine number is displayed separated by a slash. E.g.: Location number 1 in magazine 1 Location number 1 in magazine 2 Tools in the tool list not assigned to a magazine are displayed without a location number at the end of the window. You can manage tools that are not changed automatically, by hands (hand tools). If the orange selection cursor is placed in the type field on a tool icon you can change the tool type by pressing the SELECT-key. Type Tool type
Section 3
Notes:
Column header Loc.
Tools can be created on a free tool position or by pressing the VSK 1.2 New tool in the tool list. The following tool windows can be opened by pressing the corresponding vertical softkeys.
Press the VSK 1 Favourites to open the New tool - favourites list. In the favourite list the most often used tools are saved as favourites for a fast access.
Page 9
B573
Section 3
Notes:
Tool list
Press the VSK 2 Cutters 100-199 to open the New tool milling cutter list. A list of all available milling cutters opens.
Press the VSK 3 Drill 200-299 to open the New tool drill list. A list with all available Drilling tools opens.
Press the VSK 5 Spec.tool 700-900 to open the New tool special tools list. A list with special tools opens. Press the VSK 7 Cancel to reject the tool selection and to jump back to the Tool list window in the operating area Parameter. Press the VSK 8 OK to accept the selected tool and to jump back to the Tool list window in the operating area Parameter. The selected tool will be loaded into the tool list
B573
Page 10
Tool list
Column header Tool name Meaning (continuation) Name of the tool: To identify a tool you can enter a tool name as text or a T-number. If a new tool is created, tool names are pre-assigned as default. Replacement tool number: (for replacement tool strategy) As default 1 is being entered here. If a new tool with the same name, as a already existing tool, is being created, then the new tool gets the Index 2. This way it is possible to define a replacement tool. Cutting edge number: For tools with multiple cutting edges, each tool receives its own correction data field. Up to 9 edges per tool can be managed. The max. Number depends upon the control configuration. Tool length: Geometry length of the tool. Tool radius/diameter For every tool, information about the tool radius or diameter can be entered here. The changeover from diameter to radius or vice versa can be set via a machine datum. Tip angle for Type 200 - twist drill Type 220 - center drill Type 230 - countersink Pitch for Type 240 - tap N Number of teeth for: Type 100 - milling tool Type 110 - ball nose cylindrical die sinking cutter Type 111 - ball nose tapered die-sinking cutter Type 120 - end mill Type 121 - end mill with corner rounding Type 130 - angle head cutter Type 140 - facing tool Type 150 - side mill Type 155 - bevelled cutter Type 156 - bevelled cutter with corner rounding Type 157 - tapered die-sinking cutter Type 160 - drill and thread cutter
Section 3
Notes:
ST
Length
Radius/diameter
Tip angle or Pitch
Page 11
B573
Section 3
Notes:
Tool list
3.4 Icons in the toolbar and their meaning Icons Red X Yellow triangle pointing downward Yellow triangle pointing upward Meaning The tool is disabled The pre-warning limit has been reached
The tool is in a special state Place the cursor on the marked tool. A tool tip will provide a brief description The tool is preselected.
Green frame
Magazine/location number: Green double arrow The magazine location is positioned at the change position The magazine location is positioned at the loading position The magazine location is disabled
Gray double arrow
Red X
B573
Page 12
Tool list
3.5 Additional data The following tool types require geometry data that is not included in the tool list display. Tool type 111 Conical ball head cutter Additional parameters Corner radius
Section 3
Notes:
121 End mill with Corner radius corner rounding 130 Angle head cutter Geometry length (length X, length Y, length Z) Wear length (length X, length Y, length Z) Adapter length (length X, length Y, length Z) V (direction vector 1 - 6) Vector X, vector Y, vector Z
131 Angle head Geometry length (length X, length Y, length Z) cutter with Corner radius corner rounding Wear length (length X, length Y, length Z) Adapter length (length X, length Y, length Z) V (direction vector 1 - 6) Vector X, vector Y, vector Z
140 Face milling
External radius Tool angle
155 Bevel cutter 156 Bevel cutter with corner rounding 157 Conical die milling cutter Note:
Taper angle Corner radius Taper angle
Taper angle
You can use the configuration file to specify the data to be displayed for specific tool types in the "Additional Data" window. The VSK Further data is only available for those tool types which will support this function.
Page 13
B573
Section 3
Notes:
Tool list
3.6 New tool In the window New tool - favourites you can choose a new tool from a list of favourite tools (VSK 1 Favourites). If the desired tool type should not be available in the Favourite list, you can simply select a tool from a group of cutting, drilling, turning or special tools by pressing the corresponding VSKs 2 - 5. 3.6.1 Selecting the function New tool By pressing the VSK 1.2 New tool the New tool - favorits window opens.
3.6.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description
For the softkeys see section 3.3. 3.6.3 Creating a new tool 1. In the operating mode JOG, MDA or AUTO select the operating area Parameter by pressing the MENU SELECT-key on the keyboard and the HSK 2 Parameter. -ORAlternatively press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard, to get directly to the tool list. 2. Press the VSK 1 Tool list to open the tool management screen. The Tool list window opens directly.
1.
B573
Tool list
3. Place the cursor in the tool list at the position where the new tool should be stored. For this, you can select an empty magazine location or the NC tool memory outside of the magazine. You may also place the cursor on an existing tool in the NC tool memory region. Data from the displayed tool will not be overwritten, but the new tool is created below. Press the VSK 1.2 New tool The "New tool - favourites" window opens. - OR 5. If you want to create a tool that is not in the Favourites list, press the VSK 2 "Cutters 100-199", VSK 3 "Drill 200-299" or the VSK 5 "Spec. tool 700900" . The corresponding tool window opens. 6. Select the tool by placing the cursor on the corresponding tool type. Press the VSK 8 OK to create the new tool. The tool is added to the tool list with a predefined name. If the cursor is located on an empty magazine location in the tool list, then the tool is loaded to this magazine location.
Section 3
Notes:
4.
7.
Multiple loading points: If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Select loading point" window appears when a tool is created directly in an empty magazine location or when the "Load" softkey is pressed. Select the required load point and confirm with the VSK 8 "OK" or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. Additional data: If configured proper, the "New tool" window opens after the required tool has been selected and confirmed with the VSK 8 "OK". You can define the following data in this window: Names Tool location type Size of tool (See section 3.4 in this module) Note: For further information see the commissioning manual of the Sinumerik Operate.
Page 15
B573
Section 3
Notes:
Tool list
3.7 Tool measure You can measure the tool offset data for the individual tools directly from the tool list. Note: Tool measurement is only applicable with an active tool. 3.7.1 Selecting the function Tool measure With an active tool selected press the VSK 1.1 Tool measure to switch to the Length manual window in the operating mode JOG.
3.7.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description
For the softkeys see module B570 Operating mode JOG, section 6.3. 3.7.3 Measuring a tool 1. Either press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard or press MENU SELECT on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter and the HSK 1 Tool list to switch to the tool list. Select the active tool that you want to measure in the tool list and press the VSK 1.1 "Tool measure". You jump to the "JOG" operating mode and the tool to be measured is entered in the "T" field in the "Length manual" screen.
2.
B573
Page 16
Tool list
3. Select the cutting edge number D and the replacement tool number ST. Approach the workpiece in Z direction, scratch it with a rotating spindle and enter the set position of the workpiece edge in the Z0 field. Press the VSK 7 "Set length". The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. 3.8 Managing cutting edges In the case of tools with more than one cutting edge, a separate set of offset data is assigned to each cutting edge. For every tool up to 9 edges can be installed. No gaps in the assignment of edges are allowed. If a tool has 3 cutting edges then edge numbers 1 to 3 have to be assigned. Tool cutting edges that are not required can be deleted. 3.8.1 Selecting the function Edges By pressing the VSK 1.3 Edges the following vertical softkey bar opens on the right hand side of the Tool list- window.
Section 3
Notes:
4.
5.
Page 17
B573
Section 3
Notes:
Tool list
3.8.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description Pressing the VSK 1 New cutting edge installs a new cutting edge for a tool in the tool list. Pressing the VSK 2 Delete cutting edge deletes a selected cutting edge of a tool. 3.8.3 1. Installing a new cutting edge Either press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard or press MENU SELECT on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter and the HSK 1 Tool list to switch to the tool list. In the tool list, position the cursor on the tool for which you would like to store more cutting edges. Press the VSK 1.3 Edges. Press the VSK1 New cutting edge. A new data set is stored in the list. The cutting edge number is incremented by 1 and the offset data is assigned to the values of the cutting edge on which the cursor is positioned. 4. 5. Enter the offset data for the new cutting edge. Repeat the steps 3 - 4 if you wish to create more tool edge offset data.
2.
3.
3.8.4 Deleting a cutting edge 1. Either press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard or press MENU SELECT on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter, then press the HSK 1 Tool list to switch to the tool list. In the tool list, position the cursor on the tool for which you would like to delete cutting edges, then press the VSK 1.3 Edges. Press the VSK 2 Delete cut. edge. The data set is deleted from the list. The first tool cutting edge cannot be deleted.
3.
4.
B573
Page 18
Tool list
3.9 Delete tool To keep the tool list short and clear, unused tools can be deleted from the tool list. 3.9.1 Selecting the function Delete tool Pressing the VSK 1.6 Delete tool the Delete tool dialogue window opens.
Section 3
Notes:
3.9.2 Deleting a tool 1. Either press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard or press MENU SELECT on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter and the HSK 1 Tool list to switch to the tool list. In the tool list window place the cursor on the tool that you would like to delete. Press the VSK 1.6 Delete tool. A safety prompt is displayed asking for confirmation. Press the VSK 8 OK to delete tho tool or press the VSK 7 Cancel to abort. The tool is deleted from the tool list. If the tool is in a magazine location, it is unloaded and then deleted. Several load points If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Select loading point" window appears after pressing the VSK 6 "Delete tool". Select the required load point and press the VSK 8 "OK" to unload and delete the tool.
2.
3.
B573
Section 3
Notes:
Tool list
3.10 Loading or unloading a tool You can load and unload tools to and from a magazine via the tool list. When a tool is loaded, it is taken to a magazine location. When it is unloaded, it is removed from the magazine and stored in the tool list. When you are loading a tool, the application automatically suggests an empty location. You may also directly specify an empty magazine location. You can unload tools from the magazine that you are not using at present. The Sinumerik Operate then automatically saves the tool data in the tool list in the NC memory outside the magazine. Should you want to use the tool again later, simply load the tool with the tool data into the corresponding magazine location again. Then the same tool data does not have to be entered more than once. 3.10.1 Selecting the function Load or Unload. By pressing the VSK 1.5 Load the following Load on ... window opens. The softkey is only active if the cursor is located on a tool that is not assigned to the magazine. By pressing the VSK 1.5 Unload the selected tool will be unloaded from the magazine. The softkey is only active if the cursor is placed on a tool that is assigned to a magazine location.
B573
Page 20
Tool list
3.10.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description Press the VSK 4 Spindle to load the selected tool to the spindle location. 3.10.3 Loading a tool 1. Either press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard or press MENU SELECT on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter and the HSK 1 Tool list to switch to the tool list. In the tool list press the VSK 1.5 Load. The Load on ... window opens. The field ... loc." is reallocated with the first empty place in the magazine. 3. Press the VSK 8 OK to accept the suggested location number. - OR 3. Insert another location number and press the VSK 8 OK. - OR 3. Press the VSK 4 Spindle. The tool is loaded into the specified magazine location or spindle.
Section 3
Notes:
2.
Several magazines If you have configured several magazines, the "Load on ..." window appears after pressing the VSK 1.5 "Load". If you do not want to use the suggested empty location, then enter your desired magazine and magazine location. Confirm your selection with the VSK 8 "OK".
Several loading points If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Select loading point" window appears after pressing the VSK 1.5 "Load". Select the required loading point and confirm with the VSK 8 "OK".
Page 21
B573
Section 3
Notes:
Tool list
3.10.4 Unloading a tool 1. Either press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard or press MENU SELECT on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter and the HSK 1 Tool list to switch to the tool list. Place the cursor on the tool that you would like to unload from the magazine and press the VSK 1.5 "Unload". Select the required loading point in the "Select loading point window. Confirm the selection with pressing the VSK 8 OK or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel.
2.
3.
4.
3.11 Selecting a magazine You can directly select the buffer memory, the magazine, or the NC memory. Press the VSK 1.7 Magazine selection. If there is only one magazine, you will move from one area to the next (i.e. from the buffer to the magazine, from the magazine to the NC memory and from the NC memory back to the buffer) each time you press the softkey. The cursor is positioned at the beginning of the magazine each time. If there is more than one magazine, the "Magazine selection" window opens. Position the cursor on the desired magazine in this window and press the "Go to" softkey. The cursor jumps directly to the beginning of the specified magazine. Magazines can be hidden in the magazine list. Uncheck the checkbox alongside the corresponding magazine in the Magazine selection window, by pressing the SELECT-key on the keyboard. Note: The magazine selection behaviour with multiple magazines can be configured in different ways. Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.
B573
Page 22
Tool list
3.12 Sort With the help of this function Sort you can sort and view the tools in the tool list depending on different sorting criteria.
Section 3
Notes:
3.12.1 Selecting the function Sort Pressing the VSK 2.1 Sort opens the following softkeys in the vertical softkey bar.
3.12.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description The tools in the tool list are sorted numerical by their positions in the magazines. Tools with identical magazine location will be sorted by tool type and tools of the same type are sorted depending on their radius value. The tools are sorted alphabetical by name. The tools are sorted by tool type. Similar types will be sorted by radius. The tools are sorted by tool number.
3.12.3 Sorting tools 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter and the HSK 1 Tool list to switch to the tool list. The Tool list window opens. 2. Press the VSK 2.1 Sort. A vertical softkey bar with all available sort criteria opens to the right (see section 3.12.2). 3. I order to sort the tool list depending on the tool name, magazine location, tool type or T-number press the corresponding softkey (VSK 1 - 4) (see section 3.12.2). The tool list will be sorted following the chosen search criteria.
Page 23
B573
Section 3
Notes:
Tool list
3.13 Filter The filter function allows you to filter-out tools with specific properties in the tool management lists. 3.13.1 Selecting the function tool Filter Pressing the VSK 2.2 Filter the Filter dialogue window for the tool list, tool wear and magazine list is opened. Following selection window is displayed.
Filter criteria: Only display the first Only tools with the cutting edge number D1 are cutting edge listed. Only tools that are ready to use Only tools that are ready to use are listed.
Only tools that have Only tools that have reached the pre-warning limit reached the preare displayed. alarm limit Only locked tools Note: Multiple selection Only locked tools are displayed. You have the option of selecting several criteria. You will receive an appropriate message if conflicting filter options are selected.
B573
Page 24
Tool list
Section 3
Notes:
The following shows the filter setting only tools with pre-warning limit reached.
Page 25
B573
Section 4
Notes:
Tool wear
4.1 Selecting the function Tool wear
All parameters and functions that are required during operation are contained in the tool wear list. Tools that are in use for long periods are subject to wear. You can measure this wear and enter it in the tool wear list. The Sinumerik Operate then takes this information into account when calculating the tool length or radius compensation. This ensures a consistent level of accuracy during workpiece machining. You can automatically monitor the tools' working times via the workpiece count, tool life or wear. In addition, you can disable tools when you no longer wish to use them. Note: Depending on the control configuration, the input of the tool wear can be additive. Please refer to the machine tool manufacturer documentation. By pressing the HSK 2 Tool wear the Tool wear screen input mask opens.
4.2
Vertical softkey bar Description By pressing the VSK 1 Sort and Filter you can sort and filter the tools in the tool list according to different parameters.( See section 3.12 and 3.13) By pressing the VSK 6 Reactivate locked tools, and tools that have reached their pre-warning limit can be made operational again. (See section 4.7)
Display area
B573
Page 26
Tool wear
4.3 Parameters for Tool wear Meaning Magazine/location number: (Only display, see section 3.3 Tool list) Tool type: (See section 3.3 Tool list) Tool name: (See section 3.3 Tool list) Replacement tool number: (Only display, see section 3.3 Tool list) Cutting edge number (Only display, see section 3.3 Tool list) Length wear In this field changes for the tool length are entered Radius wear The Sinumerik Operate checks the entered values whether they exceed an absolute or incremental threshold or not. The incremental threshold is the maximum difference between present wear and new wear. The absolute threshold is the maximum total wear value that can be entered. Note: Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications. T Tool monitoring by tool life: With the tool life T (Time), the service life for tool with machining federate is monitored in minutes. Tool monitoring by count With the count C, the number of workpieces machined by the tool is counted. Tool monitoring by wear With wear W, the greatest value in the wear parameters Length X, Length Z, Radius or in the wear list is monitored. * The wear monitoring is configured via a machine data item.
Section 4
Notes:
Parameter Location
Type
Tool name
ST
Length Radius
W*
Page 27
B573
Section 4
Notes:
Tool wear
Parameter Tool life (T) Quantity (C) Wear (W) Meaning (continuation) Tool life Number of workpieces Tool wear The wear monitoring is configured via a machine data item. Please refer to the machine manufacturer`s instructions. Setpoint value for tool life, workpiece count, or wear. Prewarning limit: Specification of the tool life, workpiece count or wear at which a warning is displayed. Note: If the adjusted rest life of the tool, the number of changes or the wear is reached, the tool will be disabled. This tool will not be selected for the next tool change. If present, an adequate sister tool will be used instead. The monitoring refers in each case to the selected cutting edge. It is possible to reactivate a disabled tool. D Single tools can also be disabled by hand, if these tools are not in use anymore or if the tools life ran off. (The tool is disabled if the checkbox is activated).
Set val Prewar limit
4.4 Icons in the tool wear list and their meaning (See section 3.3, Icons in the tool list, in this module) 4.5 Entering the tool wear or disabling a tool 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter and the HSK 2 Tool wear to switch to the tool wear list. Enter values for length, radius, setpoint, prewarning and tool life. - OR 2. Activate the D-parameter checkbox for disabling the tool manually.
2.
B573
Page 28
Tool wear
4.6 Sort and Filter For the functions Sort and Filter in the tool list refer to the section 3.12 and 3.13 in this module.
Section 4
Notes:
4.7 Reactivating a tool You can replace disabled tools or make them ready for reuse. Prerequisite is, that the monitoring function must be active and a setpoint is stored. 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter and the HSK 2 Tool wear to switch to the tool wear list. Position the cursor on the disabled tool which you would like to reuse. Press the VSK 6 "Reactivate". The value entered as the setpoint is entered as the new tool life workpiece count. The disabled tool is active again. Reactivating and positioning When the "Reactivate with positioning" function is configured, the selected tool's magazine location will also be positioned at a loading point. You can exchange the tool. Reactivation of all monitoring types When the "Reactivation of all monitoring types" function is configured, all the monitoring types set in the NC for a tool are reset during reactivation. Note: Refer to the machine manufacturers specifications.
2.
Page 29
B573
Section 5
Notes:
Magazine management
5.1 Selecting the function Magazine
Tools are displayed with their magazine-related data in the magazine list. Here, you can take specific actions relating to the magazines and the magazine locations. Individual magazine locations can be location-coded or disabled for existing tools. By pressing the HSK 4 Magazine the following magazine list will be displayed on the screen.
In the magazine list, all magazine locations are shown. It is indicated whether a magazine location is available, disabled or occupied by a tool. If a magazine location is defect, this location can be disabled. If an oversized tool is inserted, which uses more than a half of the neighbouring magazine locations, then the neighbouring magazine locations will be disabled. 5.2 Vertical softkey bar Description By pressing the VSK 5 Relocate a tool can be transferred from one magazine location to another or, with pressing the VSK 4 Spindle, it can be transferred to the spindle. The selected target location must be confirmed with the VSK 8 OK or can aborted with VSK 7 Cancel. By pressing the VSK 6 Position magazine you can position magazine locations directly on the loading point. (See section 5.6) By pressing the VSK 1.8 Extend on the operator panel the extended vertical softkey bar 2 opens with the functions Sort, Filter and Details (see sections 3.12 and 3.13).
Display area
B573
Page 30
Magazine management
Parameters for Magazine Meaning Number of the magazine location: (Only display, see section 3.3 Tool list) Tool type: (Only display, see section 3.3 Tool list) Tool name: (See section 3.3 Tool list) Sister tool: (Only display, see section 3.3 Tool list) Edge number: (Only display, see section 3.3 Tool list) Magazine location disabled Oversized tool: Marking a tool as oversized. The tool occupies two half locations left, two half locations right, one half location top and one half location bottom in a magazine. Only tools that are not loaded yet can be marked as oversized. Fixed location coding. The tool is fixed to the magazine location.
Section 5
Notes:
5.3
Parameter Loc. Type Tool name ST D D Z
5.4 Sorting and filtering tools When you are working with many tools, with large magazines or several magazines, it is useful to display the tools sorted according to different criteria. Then you will be able to find a specific tool more easily in the lists. For sorting tools in the magazine see section 3.12 and 3.13 in this module.
Page 31
B573
Section 5
Notes:
Magazine management
5.5 Relocate Tools can be directly relocated within magazines to another magazine location, which means that you do not have to unload tools from the magazine in order to load them into a different location. When you are relocating a tool, the application automatically suggests an empty location. You may also directly specify an empty magazine location. 5.5.1 Selecting the function Relocate By pressing the VSK 5 Relocate depending on the tool type following window opens.
5.5.2 Relocating a tool 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter to open the operating area Parameter. Alternatively press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard. Press the HSK 4 Magazine. The magazine window opens. Position the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different magazine location. Press the VSK 5 Relocate. The ...move from location...to... window opens. The "... loc." field is initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location. 5. Press the VSK 8 "OK" to relocate the tool to the suggested location.
2. 3. 4.
B573
Page 32
Magazine management
- OR 5. Enter the location number you require and press the VSK 8 "OK". - OR 5. Press the VSK 4 "Spindle" to load a tool into the spindle and press the VSK 8 "OK". The tool is moved to the specified magazine location or the spindle. Several magazines If you have set up several magazines, then the "...move from magazine... location... to..." window appears after pressing the VSK 5 "Relocate" . Select the desired magazine and location, and confirm your selection with the VSK 8 "OK" to load the tool.
Section 5
Notes:
5.6 Positioning a magazine You can position magazine locations directly on the loading point. 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter and the HSK 4 Magazine. Alternatively press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard. Place the cursor on the magazine location that you want to position onto the load point. Press the VSK 6 "Position magazine". Select a loading point in the input mask. The magazine location is positioned on the loading point. Several load points If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Load Point Selection" window appears after pressing the VSK 6 "Position magazine". Select the desired loading point in this window and confirm your selection with the VSK 8 "OK" to position the magazine location at the loading point.
2.
3. 4.
Page 33
B573
Section 6
Notes:
Zero offset basics

Following reference point approach, the actual value display for the axis coordinates is based on the machine zero (M) of the machine coordinate system (MCS ). The program for machining the workpiece, however, is based on the workpiece zero (W) of the workpiece coordinate system (WCS ). The machine zero and workpiece zero are not necessarily identical. The distance between the machine zero and workpiece vary in accordance with the type of tool and the way it is clamped. This zero offset is taken into account during execution of the program and can be a combination of different offsets. On the Sinumerik Operate, the position actual value display refers to the SZS-coordinate system (settable zero system). The position of the active tool relative to the workpiece zero is displayed. The offsets are added as follows:
WCS
Transformation of coordinates Tool offset SZS Work offset fine
Work offset coarse
Base offset M
MCS
Base offset
The base offset is a zero offset that is always active. If you have not defined a base offset, its value will be zero. You determine the base offset via "Measure workpiece zero . See Module B570 - Operating mode JOG, in Sinumerik Operate section Set Work offset and Measure workpiece zero.
Zero offsets
Every zero offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599) consists of a coarse offset and a fine offset. You can call the work offsets from any sequence program (coarse and fine offsets are added together). You can save the workpiece zero, for example, in the coarse offset, and then store the offset that occurs when a new workpiece is clamped between the old and the new workpiece zero in the fine offset.
B573
Page 34
Zero offset basics

Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer. Note: Also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate transformations: You always program coordinate transformations for a specific sequence program. They are defined by: Offset Rotation Scaling Mirroring These transformations can work as new or they can work additive to the active zero point offset. Total offset: The total offset is calculated from the sum of all offsets and coordinate transformations.
Section 6
Notes:
Page 35
B573
Section 7
Notes:
Work offset
7.1 Selecting the function Work offset By pressing the HSK 5 Work offset. The screen mask of the active work offsets is opened.
The horizontal scroll bar above the horizontal softkey bar indicates that more parameters for the work offset are available. Because of the limited screen area, they are covered by the softkeys of the VSK bar. Move the orange selection cursor, with the help of the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to the left to reach the additional parameters. 7.2 Vertical softkey bar Description By pressing the VSK 2 Active for all installed axis all current active offsets will be displayed, as well as all active system offsets. Fields in the work offset list with a light blue background can not be altered. (See section 7.4 in this module) By pressing the VSK 3 Overview the active offsets and system offsets are displayed for all set-up axes. Only fields with a white background can be edited. (see section 7.4) By pressing the VSK 3 Base for all installed axis the channel specific basic work offsets are displayed in coarse offset and fine offset. The values can be changed directly in the Work offset - basic window, (See section 7.5 in this module)
Display area
B573
Page 36
Work offset
Display area Description (continuation) By pressing the VSK 4 G54...G57 for all installed axis the work offsets G54 to G57 are displayed in coarse offset and fine offset. The values can be changed directly in the Work offset - G54...G57 window. (See section 7.6 in this module) By placing the cursor in an offset field in the work offset list and pressing the VSK 7 Details more information (fine, coarse, scaling, shifting, mirroring) about all installed axis for the selected offset type will be displayed. Inputs for coarse and fine offset, already entered, are taken over or can be entered. The values can be changed directly in the Work offset - details:... window. (See section 7.7 in this module) By pressing the VSK 7 Details the following softkeys in the vertical softkey bar open. 7.3 Vertical softkey bar Details Description By pressing the VSK 1 WO + within the selected offset type (Active, Base, G54...57) you can change to the next work offset in the work offset list without changing back to the Work offset window first. By pressing the VSK 2 WO - within the selected offset type (Active, Base, G54...57) you can change to the previous work offset in the work offset list without changing back to the Work offset window first. By pressing the VSK 7 Clear offset all entered offsets for the installed axis will be deleted from the list. By pressing the VSK 8 Back you switch back to the Work offset window.
Section 7
Notes:
Display area
Page 37
B573
Section 7
Notes:
Work offset
7.4 Active work offset The following work offsets are displayed in the Work offset - active window: Work offsets, for which offsets are included, or for which values are entered Adjustable work offsets Total work offset This window is generally used only for monitoring. The availability of the offsets depends on the setting. Please refer to the manufacturer's documentation. 7.4.1 Selecting the function Active By pressing the VSK 2 Active the Work offset active window opens.
7.5 Work offset overview In the Work offset - Overview window, all active offsets and system offsets are displayed for all set-up axes. In addition to the offset, the rotation, scaling and mirroring defined using this are also displayed. This window is generally used for monitoring.
B573
Page 38
Work offset
7.5.1 Selection of the function Work offset - Overview By pressing the VSK 2 Overview the window Work offset - overview opens.
Section 7
Notes:
7.5.2 Parameters for Work offset - active Parameters DRF Rotary table ref. Basic reference Meaning Display of the handwheel axis offset. Display of additional work offsets programmed with $P_PARTFRAME . Display of additional work offset programmed with $P_SETFRAME. Access to the system offsets is protected via a keyswitch. Displays all effective basic offsets as well as rotation, scaling and mirroring. Values can not be changed here. Display of all work offsets activated with G500, G54 G57, as well as rotation, scaling and mirroring. You cannot edit these values here. Displays the additional work offset programmed with $P_TOOLFRAME.. Displays the additional work offset programmed with $P_WPFRAME. Displays the additional work offset programmed with $P_PFRAME. Display of all additional work offsets activated via $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK. Display of the active work offset, representing the sum of all work offsets, as well as rotation, scaling and mirroring.
Page 39
Total base WO
G500 or G54 - G57 Tool reference Workpiece ref. Programmed WO Cycle reference Total WO
B573
Section 7
Notes:
Work offset
7.6 Base zero offset The defined channel-specific and global base offsets, divided into coarse and fine offsets, are displayed for all set-up axes in the "Work offset - basic" window. 7.6.1 Selecting the function Work offset - basic By pressing the VSK 3 Base the Work offset - basic window with the channel specific and global basic work offsets opens.
The horizontal scroll bar above the horizontal softkey bar indicates that more parameters for the work offset are available. Because of the limited screen area, they are covered by the softkeys of the vertical softkey bar. Move the orange selection cursor, with the help of the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to the left, to reach the additional parameters.
7.6.2 Displaying and editing base zero offset 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter to open the operating area Parameter. Alternatively press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard. Press the HSK 5 Work offset Press the VSK 3 Base. The Work offset - basic window opens. With the cursor positioned on the fields with the white background you can edit the values directly in the table.
2. 3.
Caution: The entered offset values are active directly.
B573
Page 40
Work offset
7.7 Settable zero offset All settable offsets, divided into coarse and fine offsets, are displayed in the "Work offset - G54...G57" window. Rotation, scaling and mirroring are displayed. 7.7.1 Selecting the function Work offset - G54...G57 By pressing VSK 4 G54...G57 the following window opens.
Section 7
Notes:
7.7.2 Displaying and editing settable zero offset 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter to open the operating area Parameter. Alternatively press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard. Press the HSK 5 Work offset. Press the VSK 4 G54G57. The Work offset - G54...G57 window opens. Values can be edited directly in the table.
2. 3.
4.
Note: The settable work offsets must first be selected in the program before they have an impact.
Page 41
B573
Section 7
Notes:
Work offset
7.8 Details of the work offset For each work offset, you can display and edit all data for all axes. You can also delete work offsets. For every axis, values for the following data will be displayed: Coarse and fine offsets Rotation Scaling Mirroring Notes: Settings for rotation, scaling and mirroring are specified here and can only be changed here. 7.8.1 Selecting the function Work offset - details: By pressing the VSK 7 Details a different work offset window opens, depending on the work offset (Active, Base, G54...G57) selected before: Work offset - details: Rotary table ref./Basic reference/ Total basic WO/G54 - G55/Tool reference/Workpiece ref./ Programmed WO/Cycle reference/Total WO Work offset - details: 1. chan.-sp. Basic WO Work offset - details: G54 - G57
7.8.2 Displaying details of the work offset 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel and the HSK 2 Parameter to open the operating area Parameter. Alternatively press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard. Press the HSK 5 Work offset.
2.
B573
Page 42
Work offset
3. 4. 5. Press the VSK "Active", "Base" or "G54G57". The corresponding window appears. Place the cursor on the desired work offset to view its details. Press the VSK 7 Details. A window opens, depending on the selected work offset, e.g. "Work offset - details: G54...G57". Enter changes of values directly into the table. - OR 6. Press the VSK 1 WO + or the VSK 2 WO - to select the next or previous offset, respectively, within the selected area ("Active", "Base", "G54 to G57") without having first to switch to the overview window. If you have reached the end of the range (e.g. G57), you switch automatically to the beginning of the range (e.g. G54). - OR 6. 7. Press the VSK 7 "Clear offset" to reset all entered values. Press the VSK 8 Back to close the window.
Section 7
Notes:
6.
Note: The changes become effective immediately in the part program or after pressing the "RESET"-key. 7.9 Measuring the workpiece zero 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter to open the operating area Parameter. Alternatively press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard. Press the HSK 5 Work offset Press the VSK 4 G54...57. Select the work offset in which the zero point ist to be saved by placing the cursor in an axis field right beside the corresponding work offset G54-57. Press the VSK 1 Work Measure. The operating area Meas. Workp. in the operating mode JOG opens. Press the VSK 2 Set edge, if not already active. The Set edge window opens Use the softkeys X, Y, Z to select in which axis direction you want to approach the workpiece first. Select the measuring direction (+ or -) you want to approach the workpiece in. The measuring direction cannot be selected for Z0. In X0, Y0, or Z0, specify the setpoint position of the workpiece edge you are approaching. Traverse the tool up to the workpiece edge. Press the VSK 7 "Set WO" to measure the workpiece zero. For more details see module B570 - Operating mode JOG, section 5 Measuring the workpiece zero.
2. 3. 4.
5.
6. 7. 7
8.
B573
Section 8
Notes:
User variables
The following variables can be defined: Arithmetic parameters (R variables): These are channel-specific variables that you can use within a G code program. G code programs can read and write R parameters. These values are retained after the control is switched off. Global user data (Global GUD) are valid in all programs and can be defined as follows: Keyword DEF Range of validity NCK Data type (INT, REAL,.) Variable names Value assignment (optional) Channel-specific user data (Channel GUD) can be defined with a different value for each channel. Local user data (LUD) are valid in one program. Program-global user data (PUD) are valid in one program and the called subroutines. Local user data (LUD) defined in the main program can become program-global user data (PUD) by setting a machine datum. With that, they are valid in all subprograms, where they can be read and written. The PUD mode of action is depending on the machine settings. Only local and program-global user data can be displayed. Up to 15 decimal places (including the place after the column) are being evaluated. If a number with more then 15 decimals is being entered, then exponential number format is used (15 places +EXXX). 8.1 Selecting the function User variable By pressing the HSK 6 User variable the R variables window opens like displayed below.
B573
Page 44
User variables
8.2 Vertical softkey bar 1 and 2 Description By pressing the VSK 1.1 R variables the R variables window opens. The entered values (R0 R999, depending on a machine datum) are retained after the control is switched off. By pressing the VSK 1.2 Global GUD a list of Global user variables (UGUD) defined by the user is displayed. Further selection is possible with VSK 1.6 GUD selection. By pressing the VSK 1.3 Channel GUD all channel-specific user variables will be displayed in a list. Further selection is possible with VSK 1.6 GUD selection. By pressing VSK 1.4 Local LUD a list with local user data will be displayed. By pressing the VSK 1.6 GUD selection, depending on the softkeys pressed before VSK 1.2 Global GUD or VSK 1.3 Channel GUD a new vertical softkey will be displayed. SGUD MGUD Depending on the control configuration a additional area (UGUD) can be selected. SGUD: Definition of SIEMENS-system applications MGUD: Definitions of machine builder applications. UGUD: Definitions of user applications By pressing the VSK 1.7 Search you can search within all available lists for any user variable by entering an arbitrary character string. By pressing the VSK 1.8 Extend a new vertical softkey bar (VSK 2) with different functions opens. By pressing the VSK 2.1 Delete in the extended vertical softkey bar you can delete R variables in a defined range (from... to...) from the R variables list. Deleting must be confirmed with the VSK 1.8 OK or aborted with the Cancel Softkey. Alternatively you can delete all R variable with the VSK Delete all. By pressing VSK 2.8 Back you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.
Section 8
Notes:
Display area
Page 45
B573
Section 8
Notes:
User variables
8.3 Arithmetic parameters (R variables) R variables (arithmetic parameters) are channel-specific variables that can be used within a G code program. G code programs can read and write R variables. 8.3.1 Selecting the function R variables By pressing the VSK 1 R variables the following window opens.
8.3.2 Displaying and editing R variables 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel and the yellow HSK 2 Parameter to open the operating area Parameter. Alternatively press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard to switch to the operating area Parameter directly. Press the HSK 6 User variable. Press the VSK 1.1 R variables. The R variables window opens Enter the desired R variable value in the corresponding R variable field.
2. 3. 4.
B573
Page 46
User variables
8.3.3 Selecting the function Delete R variables After pressing the VSK 2.7 Delete the following Delete R variables window opens.
Section 8
Notes:
8.3.4 Deleting R variables 1 Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter to open the operating area Parameter. Alternatively press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard. Press the VSK 8 Extend. The vertical softkey bar 2 opens. Press the VSK 2.7 Delete. Enter the range in which you want to delete R variables. Enter even numbers from the range 0 to 99. Accept the selection by pressing the VSK 8 OK or abort by pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. The selected R variables will be deleted. - OR 5. Press the VSK 6 Delete all to reset all R variables to 0 (zero). Accept your choice by pressing the VSK 8 OK or abort by pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. All R variables will be reset to 0 (zero).
2. 3. 4.
Page 47
B573
Section 8
Notes:
User variables
8.4 Global user data Global GUD are NC global user data (Global User Data) which remain available after switching the machine off. GUD apply in all programs. A GUD variable can be defined through: Keyword DEF Range of validity NCK Data type (INT, REAL, .) Variable names Value assignment (optional) Example.: DEF NCK INT COUNTER1 = 10 Note: GUD are defined in files with the extension *.DEF. The following file names are reserved for this purpose: File name SGUD.DEF MGUD.DEF UGUD.DEF GUD4.DEF GUD7.DEF Description Definitions for system data (reserved) Definitions for machine manufacturer data Definitions for user data Definitions for user data
8.4.1 Selecting the function Global GUD By pressing the VSK 1.2 Global GUD the following window opens.
B573
Page 48
User variables
8.4.1 Displaying and editing global GUD 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter to open the operating area Parameter. Alternatively press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard, to directly change into the operation area Parameter. Press the HSK 5 User variable. Press the VSK 1.2 Global GUD. The Global user variables window opens. A list of the defined SGUD variables respectively the data selected by VSK 6 GUD selection are displayed. -OR 4. By pressing the VSK 6 "GUD selection" further GUD data are available. Please refer to the manufacturer`s manual.
Section 8
Notes:
2. 3. 4.
Page 49
B573
Section 8
Notes:
User variables
8.5 Channel specific user data Like the GUD, channel-specific user data are applicable in all programs for each channel. However, unlike GUD, they have specific values. A channel-specific GUD variable is defined with the following: Keyword DEF Range of validity CHAN Data type Variables names Value assignment (optional) Example: DEF CHAN REAL X_POS = 100.5 8.5.1 Selecting the function Channel GUD After pressing the VSK 1.3 Channel GUD the following window opens.
8.5.2 Displaying and editing channel GUD 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter to open the operating area Parameter. Alternatively press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard, to directly change into the operation area Parameter. Press the HSK 5 User variable. Press the VSK 3 Channel GUD and the VSK 6 GUD selection to select the specific GUD area. (See section 7.6 in this module)
2. 3.
B573
Page 50
User variables
Section 8
Notes:
8.6 Local user data LUD are only valid in the program or subroutine in which they were defined. The control displays the LUD after the start of program processing. The display is available until the end of program processing. A local user variable is defined with the following: Keyword DEF Data type Variable names Value assignment (optional) 8.6.1 Selecting the function Local LUD After pressing the VSK 1.4 Local LUD a window with all present local user variables opens.
8.6.2 Displaying local user data 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter to open the operating area Parameter. Alternatively press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard, to directly change into the operation area Parameter. Press the VSK 6 User variable. Press the VSK 1.4 Local LUD. The window with the local user data opens. If no local user data are defined the window stays blank.
2. 3.
Page 51
B573
Section 8
Notes:
User variables
8.7 Search You can search for R variables and user data directly. 8.7.1 Selecting the function Search Pressing the VSK 1.7 Search opens the Find R variables window.
8.7.2 Searching for R variables and user data. 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter to open the operating area Parameter. Alternatively press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard, to directly change into the operation area Parameter. Press the VSK1.1 R variable, the VSK 1.2 Global GUD, the VSK 1.3 Channel GUD or the VSK 1.4 Locale GUD to select the list in which you would like to search for user data. Press the VSK 1.7 Search. The Find R variable or Find user variable window opens. Enter the desired search term in the orange marked input field and press the VSK 8 OK to accept or press the VSK 7 Cancel to abort the search. The cursor is automatically positioned on the R variable or user data you are searching for, if they exist.
2.
3.
4.
B573
Page 52
Setting data
With the function Setting data you have the option to install safety areas for the tool movement and to alter parameters for the spindle speed. 9.1 Selecting the function Setting data By pressing the HSK 8 Setting data the Working area limitation window will be displayed.
Section 9
Notes:
9.2
Vertical softkey bar Description By pressing the VSK 1 Working area limit. the working area limitation window opens, where you can install safety zones for the tool movement. By pressing the VSK 3 Spindle data the Spindles window opens, where you can set limitations for the Spindle speed. By pressing the VSK 6 Data lists the window Setting data list opens where you can select predefined lists of setting dates. Please refer to the machine manufacturer's documentation.
Display area
Page 53
B573
Section 9
Notes:
Setting data
9.3 Working area limitation The "Working area limitation" function can be used to limit the tool traverse range in all channel axes (e.g. X1, Y1, Z1, C1, AWZ1, SP2 and Z2). These commands allow you to set up protection zones in the working area which are out of bounds for tool movements. In this way, you are able to restrict the traversing range of the axes in addition to the limit switches. By marking the checkbox active the safety area is activated. 9.3.1 Selecting the function Working area limitation Note: You can only make changes in "AUTO" operating mode when in the RESET condition. These changes are then immediate. You can make changes in "JOG" operating mode at any time. These changes, however, only become active at the start of a new motion. By pressing the VSK 1 Working area limit. the Working area limitation window opens.
9.3.2 Specifying working area limitations 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter to open the operating area Parameter. Alternatively press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard, to directly change into the operation area Parameter. Press the HSK 8 Setting data. The Working area limitation window opens. Place the cursor in the required field and enter the new values via the numeric keyboard. The upper or lower limit of the protection zone changes according to your inputs. Click the checkbox "active" to activate the protection zone.
2. 3.
4.
B573
Page 54
Setting data
9.4 Spindle data The speed limits set for the spindles that must not be exceeded, are displayed in the "Spindles" window. You can limit the spindle speeds in the fields "Minimum" and "Maximum" within the limit values defined in the relevant machine data. In the field "Spindle speed limitation for G96", the programmed spindle speed limitation at constant cutting speed is displayed together with the permanently active limitations. A additional limitation of the Spindle speed with constant cutting speed can be entered. This speed limitation, for example, prevents the spindle from accelerating to the max. spindle speed of the current gear stage (G96) when performing tapping operations or machining very small diameters. 9.4.1 Selecting the function Spindle data By pressing the VSK 3 Spindle data the Spindles window opens.
Section 9
Notes:
9.4.2 Editing spindle data 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel, then the HSK 2 Parameter to open the operating area Parameter. Alternatively press the OFFSET-key on the keyboard, to directly change into the operation area Parameter. Press the HSK 8 Setting data. Press the VSK 3 Spindle data The Spindles window opens. If you want to change the spindle speed, place the cursor on the "Maximum", "Minimum", or "Spindle speed limitation at G96" and enter a new value.
2. 3. 4.
Page 55
B573
B573
Page 56
B574
Operating area Program
Brief description
Objective of the module: In this module you learn about the structure of the program editor in the operating area Program.
Description of the module: The SINUMERIK Operate provides the opportunity to create NC-programs, and also to integrate comfortably cycles into the program. These programs are created as G-code programs as per DIN 66025, however, elements of the high level language can be included. This module shows the general structure of a G-code programs. The creation of G-code programs is explained in detail in the following modules: B655 Programming milling, B656 Programming contour milling , B657 Programming diverse functions , and B575 Operating area Program-Manger.
Content: Structure of the program editor Options in the editor Screen elements and their meaning

B574
B574
B574
Page 2
B574
Operating area Program: Description The SINUMERIK Operate provides the opportunity to create NC-programs, and also to integrate comfortably cycles into the program. These programs are created as G-code programs as per DIN 66025, however, elements of the high level language can be included. This module shows the general structure of a Gcode programs. The creation of G-code programs is explained in detail in the following modules: B655 Programming milling, B656 Programming contour milling , B657 Programming diverse functions , and B575 Operating area ProgramManger.
Operating area Program: START
Structure of the program editor
Options in the editor
Screen elements and their meaning
Operating area Program: END
Notes :
Page 3
B574
Section 2
Notes:
Structure of the program editor

2.1 Opening a program Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. The following screen of the Sinumerik Operate will be displayed. This example shows the part program NC/WKS/DOKU/DIN_DRILLING_1.
Press the HSK 3 Program or the corresponding key on the keyboard. If a program is already loaded into the program editor, because it was processed or edited before, then it opens immediately. If no program was loaded before, then the program manager opens first, giving you the opportunity to select a program. - ORPress the HSK 4 Program-Manager or the corresponding key on the keyboard. The program manager window opens with a view to the directory structure of the NC-memory. If the desired program is not on the NC-memory, then you can switch over to a local drive by pressing the HSK 2 Local drive or to an USB device (such as an USB stick, or USB hard drive) by pressing the HSK 3 USB.
See module B575 Operating area Program manager.
B574
Page 4
Structure of the program editor 2.2 The NC main memory

The memory structure shown in the picture below, with the 3 main directories Part programs Subprograms Workpieces is always available on the NC, and does not have to be created.
Section 2
Notes:
Here you can see the free available main memory on the NC. The memory can not be fully used. If less then 0,1 MB is available, more memory should be freed by: deleting unused programs moving unused programs to another storage (e.g. memory stick). Directories: Directories are displayed with a folder icon in the program manager window and have the extension *.DIR (Directory) or *.WPD (work piece directory). Program/Data: Programs and data are displayed with a document icon.
Used file extensions: *.WPD = Workpiece *.MPF = Main program file *.SPF = Sub program file If the workpiece directory contains a part program with the same name as the directory, this part program is automatically selected for machining when the workpiece directory is selected. For example, with selecting the workpiece POCKET.WPD the main program POCKET.MPF is selected automatically. If an INI-file of the same name exists (e.g. POCKET.INI), it is executed once at the start of the part program selected.
B574
Section 2
Notes:
Structure of the program editor 2.3 Navigation and program selection

Shown below is a directory tree of the opened NC-memory:
With the blue cursor up and the cursor down keys the orange cursor is being positioned and you can navigate through the directory tree in the program manager window. With the blue cursor to the right key you can open a folder or subfolder and select and open a file. In case of further subdirectories you can also extend the directory tree with the cursor to the right. Alternatively you can use the yellow INPUT key or the VSK 1.3 Open, to load a selected program directly into the program editor window. A double click with the mouse also opens the program file. The VSK 1.1 Select loads a selected program into the main memory of the NC, ready for machining.
With the cursor to the left key on the keyboard you can close the selected folders or subfolders and step back one level higher in the directory hierarchy.
B574
Page 6
Structure of the program editor 2.4 The program editor

By pressing the yellow HSK 3 Program, or the corresponding key on the keyboard the program editor window opens with the part program selected before, as long as the program was not closed explicitly with the VSK 2.7 Exit after editing. Shown below is the opened program editor with a part program loaded:
Section 2
Notes:
With the editor you can go through the program more clearly and make necessary changes by editing them. Note: The maximum record length amounts to 512 characters. The navigation in the editor window takes place with the blue cursor keys on the keyboard. NC blocks consist of the following components: Commands (instructions) as per DIN 66025 (G-code programs) Elements of the NC high-level language
If the editing of the program is finished, you can take over all changes in the program code with pressing the HSK 8 NC Select. The program is taken over and loaded to the machine. The screens switches to the operating area Machine. If the part program is already selected for machining the HSK 8 Execute appears . The screens switches to the operating area Machine. The program editor is described precisely in the module B600 and B604 Basics of programming.
Page 7
B574
Section 2
Notes:
Structure of the program editor 3.1 Horizontal softkey bar:

In this section the general functions of programming with the SINUMERIK Operate will be described. More information is available in the corresponding modules.
By pressing the HSK 2 Drill. the following cycles for drilling will be called up: Centering Drilling and Reaming Deep hole drilling Boring Thread Positions Positions repetition See modules B608 and B609 - Drilling. By pressing the HSK 3 Mill. the following cycles for milling will be called up: Face milling Pocket Multi-edge spigot Slot Thread milling Engraving See module B615 and B616 - Milling. By pressing the HSK 4 Cont. mill. the following cycles for contour milling will be called up: Contour Path milling Rough drill Pocket Pocket residual material Spigot Spigot residual material See module B623 and B624 - Contour milling.
B574
Page 8
Options in the editor
Section 3
Notes:
By pressing HSK 6 Various the following functions will be called up: Blank High-Speed-Settings Subprogram See module B600 an B604 Basics of programming. By pressing the HSK 7 Simulation the program run and the machining of the workpiece can be simulated. Different views on the simulated workpiece are available: Top view 3D view Further views Details Program control Show tool path Delete tool path Blank See module B600 an B604 Basics of programming. Press the HSK 8 "Select" or Execute to change over to the operating area Machine and to start the machining of the program. See module B600 an B604 Basics of programming.
Page 9
B574
Section 4
Notes:

4.1 The Current block display screen The following screen shows the actual machined program blocks.
1 2
3 Program name/Program path Program code Message bar
1 2 3
4.2 Help menu By pressing the HELP-key on the CNC-keyboard, the help window with the vertical softkey bar opens . If there is a specific help item for the current cursor position the corresponding help screen is shown.
B574
Page 10
Section 4
Notes:
If there is no specific help available the following screen is shown:
A message box with the note No help available for appears. You can close this box with VSK 8 OK and afterwards you can call a specific help directly below the line Overview of Editor.
4.3 Vertical softkey bar of the help menu

Orange marked blocks will be taken over into the editor window. Shows all G-functions.
Opens a search mask for searching for help topics.
Enlarges the help window to full-screen.
Follows a reference to a help topic selected.
Returns to the table of content.
Closes the help window.
Page 11
B574
Notes:
B574
Page 12
B575
Operating area Program manager
Brief description
Objective of the module: In this module you learn to handle programs and files in the program manager of the Sumerik Operate. Description of the module: All NC-Programs, which are created with the Sinumerik Operate, are stored in the NC-work memory. These programs can be accessed via the program manager for: execution alteration copying renaming deletion The SINUMERIK Operate provides the following means of data transmission of NC-programs to other storage media depending on the system components: NC memory Local drive memory Its own hard disk (PCU 50.x) Network connection USB-storage (stick or drive) Note: The system components are described in the machine manufacturer documentation.
Content: Selection and function of the program manager Storage medium NC Storage medium Local drive Storage medium USB drive

B575
B575
B575
Page 2
B575
Operating area Program Manager: Description All NC-Programs, which are created with the Sinumerik Operate, are stored in the NC-work memory. These programs can be accessed via the program manager for: execution alteration copying renaming deletion The SINUMERIK Operate provides the following means of data transmission of NC-programs to other storage media depending on the system components: Its own hard disk (only with 840D sl and PCU 50.x) V.24-interface (with PCU 20 and PCU 50.2) Floppy disk drive (only PCU 20 and PCU 50.2) PCMCIA Card (only PCU 20) Network connection USB-storage (stick or drive) Note: The system components are described in the machine manufacturer documentation.
Operating area Program Manager: START
Selection and function of the program manager
Storage medium NC
Storage medium Local drive
Storage medium USB drive
Operating area Program Manager: END
Notes :
Page 3
B575
Section 2
Notes:
Selection and functions of the program manager

2.1 Selecting the function Program manager
The program manager can be selected as follows: Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. The following horizontal softkey bar of HMI sl will be displayed:
Press the HSK 4 Program manager to open the program manager window. - OR Press the PROGRAM MANAGER-key on the CNC -keyboard to open the program manager window directly. The following functions and softkeys will be available in the horizontal softkey bar of the Sinumerik Operate.
2.2
Horizontal softkey bar Description By pressing the HSK 1 NC all directories, folders and files of the NC/Hard disc will be displayed in a directory tree view in the program manager window. By pressing the HSK 2 Local drive all programs and directories on an allocated network drive or on an allocated user memory on a CF-Card at the NCU will be displayed. Prerequisite for this function is that the "Additional 256 MB HMI user memory on CF card of NCU" option is activated. For larger CFcards also more than 256 MB memory can be enabled. By pressing the HSK 3 USB all programs and directories on an USB drive will be displayed in a directory tree view in the program manager window. Programs created on an external PC can be copied to an USB drive and transferred to the NC via the USB interface where they can be processed further. Direct processing from the USB flash drive is not recommended. The text on the Softkey e.g USB can also be replaced by a drive letter e.g. G. Note: Refer to the documentation of the machine manufacturer.
Display area
B575
Page 4
Storage medium NC
3.1 Selecting the function NC By pressing the HSK 1 NC the program manager opens .
Section 3
Notes:
The complete NC-memory is displayed along with all workpieces, the main programs and subroutines. The directories and programs are listed with the following information: (For navigation in the directory structure refer to module B574 Operating area Program, Section 2.3) Name The name can contain up to 28 characters (24 characters for the name + dot + 3-character extension, e.g. MPF). Permissible characters include all upper-case letters (without accents), numbers, and underscores. Type Directory/ Programs *.WPD *.MPF *.SPF *.JOB *.TOA *.TMA *.UFR *.RPA *.GUD *.SEA *.PRO *.CEC *.INI Directory Program Subprogram Job list Tool data Magazine Zero points R-Parameter Definitions Setting data Protection zone Sag Initialization program (Workpiece Directory) (Main program File) (Subprogram File) (Job list) (Tool Offset Active) (Tool/Magazine data) (User Frame) (R-Parameter Active) (Global User Data) (Setting data) (Protection zones) (Sag/angularity) (Initializing Data)
Size The size of files of the selected directory is displayed in byte. Date/Time
Date and time of file creation or last change
B575
Section 3
Notes:
Storage medium NC
3.2 Vertical softkey bar 1 Description By pressing the VSK 1.1 Select you can select a program and change over to the operating area Machine in order to start machining the selected program. By pressing the VSK 1.2 New you can create a new directory. In the selected directory you can create a new ShopMill- or a programGUIDE-program . (See section 3.4 in this module)
Display area
By pressing the VSK 1.3 Open the selected program (marked with an orange cursor) will be opened. Alternatively you can also press the yellow INPUT-key on the keyboard or the blue cursor to the right-key to open a program. By pressing the VSK 1.4 Mark several programs or directories can be marked for copying or cutting. (See section 3.5 in this module) By pressing the VSK 1.5 Copy one or several programs or directories can be copied. (See section 3.6 in this module) By pressing the VSK 1.6 Paste the copied program(s) or directorie(s) are inserted into the selected place in the directory tree of the NC, of a local drive or an USB drive. (See section 3.6 in this module) By pressing the VSK 1.7 Cut one to several programs or directories can be cut out and inserted somewhere else on a location in the directory tree of the NC, a local drive or on an external USB drive. (See section 3.7 in this module) By pressing the VSK 8 Extend the extended vertical softkey bar 2 with new functions will be displayed.
Note: Files can not be copied under the same name into the same directory. The files are to be renamed.
B575
Page 6
Storage medium NC
3.3 Vertical softkey bar 2 Display area Description (continuation) By pressing the VSK 2.1 Archive a new vertical softkey bar is opened (see section 3.10 Archives) By pressing the VSK 2.2 Preview window a sub window opens below the file browser window, with a preview of the program code of the selected program (see picture in section 3.5). By pressing the VSK 2.6 Properties the Properties of ... input mask opens where you can: View program path and modify the program name. View the time and date of creation. View the time and date of last changing of the program or folder. User rights for execution, writing, listing and reading of files and folders. (See section 3.11 Properties) By pressing the VSK 2.7 Delete the program or folder marked with the cursor will be deleted. (See section 3.8) By pressing the VSK 2.8 Back on the operator panel (OP) you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.
Section 3
Notes:
Page 7
B575
Section 3
Notes:
Storage medium NC
3.4 Starting a new NC-program Press the VSK 1.2 New to start a new G-code program or workpiece. Depending on the cursor position the following input masks open. If the cursor is placed on the folder for part programs or subprograms, then a new G-code program of the type *.MPF (for part programs) or *.SPF (for subprograms) is created by pressing the VSK 1.2 New. In the name field of the input mask, a name for the program with a maximum of 28 characters (name + point + extension) has to be entered. Cursor is positioned on the directory (DIR): With the VSK 2.2 Workpiece you can create a new Workpiece directory (WPD).
Cursor is positioned on or in the workpiece directory (WPD):

Press the VSK 2.3 ShopMill to create a new sequential program.
Press the VSK 2.4 programGUIDE G-code to create a new
G code program. In this case you select between a main program (MPF) or a subprogram (SPF).
B575
Page 8
Storage medium NC
You can create a program of any type in every directory or subdirectory by pressing the VSK 5 Any. However in the area local drive and USB this does not apply. Only in the area NC you can create a program of different types (see the type list below).
Section 3
Notes:
After pressing the VSK 1.2 New the following functions in the vertical softkey bar are available. 3.4.1 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 2 Workpiece you can create a new workpiece of the type *.WPD (Workpiece directory). The current cursor position determines the folder where the workpiece is created. The New workpiece window opens. Note: The softkey is only available if the HSK 1 NC was selected before. By pressing the VSK 2.3 ShopMill a new sequential program will be created. By pressing the VSK 2.4 programGUIDE G code, a new main program or subprogram will be created, depending on the program type selected in the input mask. By pressing the VSK 2.6 Any an arbitrary program depending on the file type can be created (see the picture above). By pressing the VSK 2.7 Cancel the actual selection will be discarded and the window closed. By pressing the VSK 2.8 OK or pressing the INPUT-key on the keyboard the entered values or selection made will be accepted and the window closed.
B575
Section 3
Notes:
Storage medium NC
3.4.2 Parameters for New workpiece Parameter Type: WPD Name Meaning Program type: Workpiece directory Program name: The program name can only consist of a maximum number of 28 characters (Name + dot + 3-character extension, e.g. *.WPD). Permissible characters include all upper-case letters (without accents), numbers, and underscores (_).
3.4.3 Parameters for New G code program Parameter Type: MPF SPF Name Meaning Program type: Program (Main program file) Subprogram (Subprogram file) Program name (see section 3.4.2 above)
3.4.4 Parameters for Any new program Parameter Template Meaning If templates are available, they are shown and selectable. Program type: Job list Tool data Magazine assignment Zero points R-Variable Definitions Setting data Protection zones Sag compensation Initialization program Program name (see section 3.4.2)
Type: JOB TOA TMA UFR RPA GUD SEA PRO CEC INI Name
B575
Page 10
Storage medium NC
3.5 Marking directories / NC-programs
Section 3
Notes:
First open the desired directory in the program manager, like described in sections 2.1 and 3.1. 1. 2. Place the cursor with the blue cursor down-key on the first program or folder that you want to mark. Press the VSK 4 Mark. The program or directory selected with the orange cursor is marked. Mark more NC-programs or directories by pressing the blue cursor down-key. All selected files or directories are marked grey.
3.
Thereafter, the marked NC-programs can stored to the clipboard of the PCU by pressing the VSK 5 Copy or the VSK 7 Cut . The programs stored to the clipboard can then be: Copied in a different directory or to a different storage device Deleted from a directory (cut) and pasted into a different directory or storage device. Tip 1: To shortcut the marking process place the cursor on the first program or directory you want to copy. Now press the SHIFT-key on the keyboard, hold it pressed and move the cursor with the blue cursor down key to the last program or directory you want to copy. Release the SHIFT-key. The files are now marked. Tip 2: If you only want to mark a single program or directory place the cursor on the file and press the blue SELECT-key on the keyboard. The single file is now selected. Go on with copying, cutting or deleting, like described next.
B575
Section 3
Notes:
Storage medium NC
3.6 Copying and pasting directories / NC- programs
First open the desired directory in the program manager, like described in section 2.1 and 3.1 in this module. 1. Move the cursor with the blue cursor keys to the directory or file which you want to copy. If you want to copy more then one program or directory, mark them first with the VSK 4 Mark (see section 3.5). Press the VSK 5 Copy. If the program is to be copied into another directory on the NC, move the cursor with the cursor to the left-key to the next higher level of the directory tree. Select the new directory where you want to copy the data with the cursor up and cursor down-key and open the directory by pressing the cursor to the right or the yellow INPUT-key on the keyboard. Alternatively you can select another storage medium e.g. local drive or USB drive on the horizontal softkey bar. By pressing the VSK 6 Paste the program or directory can be inserted into the selected location. Accept with pressing the VSK 8 OK or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. The original file remains.
2. 3.
4.
5. 6.
Tip 3: To shortcut the copying process place the cursor on the program or directory you want to copy and press the CTRL + C keys on the keyboard at the same time. In order to paste the file to another location move the cursor to that location and press CTRL + V at the same time.
3.7
Cutting out directories / NC-programs
First open the desired directory in the program manager, like described in section 2.1 and 3.1 in this module. 1. Move the cursor with the blue cursor keys to the directory or file which you want to cut out. If you want to cut out more then one program or directory, mark them first with the VSK 4 Mark (see section 3.5). Press the VSK 7 Cut. In the message line the message 1 element has been cut. It can now be pasted will be displayed. If the program or directory is to be moved to another directory on the NC, move the cursor with the cursor to the left-key to the next higher level of the directory tree. Select the new directory with the cursor up and cursor down-key where you want to insert the data and open the directory by pressing the cursor to the right or the yellow INPUTkey on the keyboard. Alternatively you can select another storage medium (e.g. USB stick) on the horizontal softkey bar.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tip 4: To shortcut the cutting out of a program or directory place the cursor on the selected file and press the CTRL + X keys at the same time.
B575
Page 12
Storage medium NC
6. Press the VSK 6 Paste to insert the clipped data to the directory or storage location of your choice. Accept your selection by pressing the VSK 8 OK or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. The source file or directory will be deleted.
Section 3
Notes:
3.8
1.
Deleting directories / NC-programs

Move the cursor with the blue cursor keys to the directory or file which you want to copy. If you want to copy more then one program or directory, mark them first with the VSK 4 Mark (see section 3.5). Press the VSK 2.7 Delete in the extended vertical softkey bar 2. Accept the deletion process with pressing the VSK 8 OK or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. The selected program or directory will be deleted.
2.
3.9
1.
Opening a preview window

Press the VSK 2.2 Preview window in the extended VSK-bar. The preview sub window opens directly below the program manager window. Use the blue cursor keys to navigate to the program you want to preview. The program code of the selected program is now displayed in the preview window. To deselect the function press the VSK 2.2 Preview window again. The preview window disappears.
2.
3.
Note: You cannot edit program code in the preview window. Tip 5: Press the NEXT WINDOW-key on the keyboard to activate the preview window. Now you can navigate freely through the program code by using the blue cursor keys. Tip 6: The preview window stays active, even if you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1, in order to copy or cut a program or directory.
Page 13
B575
Section 3
Notes:
Storage medium NC
3.10 Generating archive files of programs and directories 3.10.1 Vertical softkey bar Pressing the VSK 2.1 Archive in the extended VSK-bar, will open the next vertical softkey bar. After pressing the VSK 3.1 Generate archive the following input mask appears to select the storage location.
With the VSK 3.7 Back you can go back to the previous vertical softkey bar. Afterwards the storage location is selected the next mask appears to enter the name of the archive file.
Pressing the VSK 4.2 New directory will open an input mask New directory, where you can define a new directory at the selected cursor position. Pressing the VSK 4.7 Cancel will abort the generating of archive files and the first vertical softkey bar is selected. Pressing the VSK 4.0 OK will start generating the archive file.
B575
Page 14
Storage medium NC
3.11 Properties of programs and directories By pressing the VSK 2.6 Properties in the extended vertical softkey bar depending on the cursor position and the selected program (here TEST.MPF) the properties of ....-window with security options for the selected program or directory opens.
Section 3
Notes:
Note: You can change the program name and the rights. Parameters Path and name: Meaning Program path and Program name; The program with the name TEST1.MPF is located in the folder NC/Workpieces/DOKU. Date and time of creation: On the right side of the field Created: Date and time of creation are displayed here. Date and time change: On the right side of the field Changed: Date and time since the last edit of the program are displayed. User rights for executing, writing, listing and reading of a program or directory. 7 protection levels are possible (level 1 highest protection level, level 7 the lowest). Protected by password Protected by password Protected by password Key switch 3 Key switch 2 Key switch 1 Key switch 0
Created:
Changed:
Rights:
Protection level 1 Manufacturer Protection level 2 Service Protection level 3 User Protection level 4 Programmer Protection level 5 Qualified worker Protection level 6 Skilled worker Protection level 7 Semi skilled worker
Page 15
B575
Section 4
Notes:
Storage medium NC
4.1 Selecting the function Local drive By pressing the HSK 2 Local drive the program manager shows the directory structure of the local drive.
A complete listing of all folders and files of the local drive is shown in the program manager window. For a description of the information of name, type, length and date/time displayed in this window, see section 3.1. 4.2 Vertical softkey bar
The full functionality available under the NC program manager window is available by pressing the HSK 2 local drive or HSK 3 USB (see section 3 in this module). Additional, here you can create a new directory by pressing the VSK 1 Directory. By pressing the VSK 1 Directory the New directory input mask opens where you can create a new directory on the local drive. Enter a name for the new directory and accept with pressing the VSK 8 OK, or abort with the VSK 7 Cancel.
B575
Page 16
Storage medium USB drive

5.1 Selecting the function USB By pressing the HSK 3 USB the following directory tree of the USB drive is displayed.
Section 5
Notes:
A complete listing of all folders and files of the USB drive is shown in the program manager window. For a description of the information displayed in this window, see section 3.1. 5.2 Vertical softkey bar
The full functionality available under the NC program manager window is available by pressing the HSK 2 local drive or HSK 3 USB (see section 3 in this module). Additional, here you can create a new directory by pressing the VSK 1 Directory. By pressing the VSK 1 Directory the New directory input mask opens where you can create a new directory on the USB drive. Enter a name for the new directory and accept with pressing the VSK 8 OK, or abort with the VSK 7 Cancel.
Page 17
B575
B575
Page 18
B576
Operating area Diagnostics
Brief description
Objectives of the module: With this module you learn to recognize and understand the alarms and messages that can occur during the operation of the machine. Furthermore you learn to correct the problems indicated by alarm messages. Description of the module: Faulty states which can occur during operation are shown in an alarm list on the Sinumerik Operate. If necessary the operation is interrupted, depending on the kind of error. The operator can acknowledge alarms or delete them. Messages give hints to certain behaviour patterns of cycles and to the machining progress. Generally they are displayed during a processing stage or at the end of a cycle. All present alarms and messages are shown in a sequential order of appearance in a alarm protocol.
Content: Selection and function of the operating area Diagnostics Displaying and handling alarms Displaying messages Alarm log

B576
B576
B576
Page 2
B576
Operating area Diagnostics: Description Faulty states which can occur during operation are shown in an alarm list on the Sinumerik Operate. If necessary the operation is interrupted, depending on the kind of error. The operator can acknowledge alarms or delete them. Messages give hints to certain behaviour patterns of cycles and to the machining progress. Generally they are displayed during a processing stage or at the end of a cycle. All present alarms and messages are shown in a sequential order of appearance in a alarm protocol.
Operating area Diagnostics: START
Selection and function of the operating area Diagnostics
Displaying and handling alarms
Displaying messages
Alarm log
Operating area Diagnostics: END
Notes :
Page 3
B576
Section 2
Notes:

2.1 Selecting the operating area Diagnostics
The operating area Diagnostics can be selected as follows: Press the ALARM-key on the CNC-Keyboard. The operating area Diagnostics opens immediately. - OR Press the MENU SELECT-key on the CNCkeyboard. The following horizontal softkey bar opens on the Sinumerik Operate.
Press the HSK 5 Diagnostics to open the operating area Diagnostics.
The following softkeys and functions are available in the horizontal softkey bar of the operating area Diagnostics. 2.2 Horizontal softkey bar 1 (HSK) Description By pressing the HSK 1.1 Alarm list the Alarmswindow opens. See section 3 Alarm list. By pressing the HSK 1.2 Messages the Messages -window opens and PLC or program massages are being displayed. See section 4 Messages. By pressing the HSK 1.3 Alarm log a protocol list with all alarms and messages opened so far, are being displayed. See section 5 Alarm log. By pressing the HSK 1.4 NC/PLC variab. a window opens where you can observe and modify PLC memory locations and NC system variables. This function is described in the commissioning manual of the Sinumerik Operate. By pressing the HSK 1.6 Remote diag. a window opens where you can make the settings for remote diagnostics (RCS). This function is described in the commissioning manual of the Sinumerik Operate.
Display area
B576
Page 4
Section 2
Notes:
By pressing the HSK 1.8 Version als software components with their version information will be displayed. This function is described in the commissioning manual of the Sinumerik Operate.
2.3
Horizontal softkey bar 2 (HSK)
Display area
Description By pressing the HSK 2.1 BUS TCP/IP in the extended horizontal softkey bar, the profibus status for diagnostic purposes during the configuration or when errors occur will be displayed. This function is described in the commissioning manual of the Sinumerik Operate. By pressing the HSK 2.2 Axis diag. in the extended horizontal softkey bar the Service overview-window opens. This function is described in the commissioning manual of the Sinumerik Operate. By pressing the HSK 2.3 SI diag. in the extended horizontal softkey bar the Safety integrated statuswindow opens. This function is described in the commissioning manual of the Sinumerik Operate. By pressing the HSK 2.7 System utiliz. in the extended horizontal softkey bar, the System utilization-window opens where the system resources for the NC areas are shown. This function is described in the commissioning manual of the Sinumerik Operate. By pressing the HSK 2.8 Drive system in the extended horizontal softkey bar the Overview for the drive states-window opens. This function is described in the commissioning manual of the Sinumerik Operate.
Page 5
B576
Section 3
Notes:

3.1 Selecting the function Alarm list Press the HSK 1.1 Alarm list to open the Alarms-window like displayed below. All present alarms are displayed here and can be acknowledged.
If faulty conditions are recognized in the operation of the machine, then an alarm will be generated and, if necessary, the machining will be interrupted. The error text that is displayed together with the alarm number gives you more detailed information on the error cause. Date and time - If a faulty condition is determined in the control, the system time (hh:mm:ss) and system date (TT.MM.YY) is monitored and displayed in a list. The date is above the clock time. Clearing criterion - For every alarm an icon shows the key that has to be pressed on the keyboard to clear the alarm (here the ALARM CANCEL -Taste auf dem Keyboard). Alarm number - The alarms are displayed with an alarm number, in sequence of their occurrence. Alarm text - The alarm text describes the error in short words. Attention: Please check the situation in the plant on the basis of the description of the active alarm(s). Eliminate the cause/s of the alarm/s and acknowledge it/ them as instructed. Failure to observe this warning will place your machine, workpiece, stored settings and eventually even your own safety at risk.
B576
Page 6

3.2 Vertical softkey bar
Section 3
Notes:
Press the HSK 1.1 Alarm list and select the Alarm with the blue cursor key on the keyboard. Press the following vertical softkeys shown in the VSK-bar to delete or acknowledge the Alarm. Display area Description Press the VSK 1 Delete HMI alarm to delete a marked alarm. -ORPress the VSK 2 Acknowl. alarm to delete a PLC alarm of the SQ type (Alarm numbers starting from 800000). Note: The softkeys are activated when the cursor is placed on the corresponding alarm. 3.3 Acknowledgement symbols Instruction Turn the unit off and back on (main switch), or press NCK POWER ON. Press the RESET-key. Press the ALARM CANCEL"-key. Press the Acknowl. HMI alarm-key. Press the key provided by the manufacturer. 3.4 1. Deleting or acknowledging an alarm Press the MENU SELECT-key on the CNCkeyboard and the yellow HSK 5 Diagnostics. Alternatively press the ALARM-key on the CNCkeyboard. The operating area Diagnostics opens. Press the VSK 1.1 Alarm list to open the Alarmswindow. Navigate the cursor with the blue cursor keys to the corresponding alarm. Press the corresponding key on the keyboard that is displayed in the alarm line. - OR 4. Press the VSK 1 Delete HMI alarm to cancel a HMI alarm. - OR 4. Press the VSK 2 Acknowl. Alarm to delete a PLC alarm of the SQ type (alarm number as of 800000).
Symbol
2. 3. 4.
The alarms are now deleted.
Page 7
B576
Section 4
Notes:
Displaying messages
4.1 Selecting the function Messages By pressing the HSK 1.2 Messages the Messages-window opens, showing PLC and part program messages during machining.
PLC and part program messages may be issued during machining. Messages provide information with regard to a certain behaviour of the cycles and with regard to the progress of machining and are usually kept beyond a machining step or until the end of the cycle. Date and time - On the occurrence of the message, the actual system time (hh:mm:ss) and system date (TT.MM.YY) are displayed in this list. The date is above the clock time. Number - Message number only displayed for PLC messages. Text - Message text in short words. Note: These message will not interrupt the program execution.
B576
Page 8
Alarm log
5.1 Selecting the function Alarm log By pressing the HSK 1.3 Alarm log the following Alarm log-screen will be displayed.
Section 5
Notes:
A maximum of up to 32000 alarm messages can be displayed in the Alarm log window. They are shown chronological ordered with the following parameters: Raised - If the alarm message is raised, the actual system time (hh:mm:ss) and system date (TT.MM.YY) is displayed in a list. The date is above the clock time. Cleared - If the alarm message is cleared, the actual system time (hh:mm:ss) and system date (TT.MM.YY) is displayed in a list. The date is above the clock time. Number - In this column the alarm number or massage is being output . Text - In this column a short description of the alarm or massage is being output. Note These message will not interrupt the program execution.
Page 9
B576
Section 5
Notes:
Alarm log
5.2 Vertical softkey bar Description By pressing the VSK 1 Display new the actual alarm log list will be updated. By pressing the VSK 6 Settings the Settings input mask opens, where you can limit the numbers of entries in the log list and decide to write the log into a file on the control. By pressing the VSK 7 Store log the actual alarm log is stored as a text file. 5.3 1. Showing and saving alarm logs Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel and then the yellow horizontal softkey 5 Diagnostics. Alternatively you can press the Alarm-key on the keyboard. The operating area Diagnostics opens. Press the VSK 3 Alarm-log.. The Alarm log window opens with the corresponding vertical softkey bar. Press the VSK 1 Display new to update the log list. - OR 3. Press the VSK 2 Settings to open the Settingsinput mask. In the Number of entries-field enter values for the maximum number of entries (maximum 32000) that shall be displayed in the log window and in the Write mode file select: off, if the changes are not to be written to a file. At every event, if every change is to be written to a file. Time-controlled if the file is to be overwritten after a particular time period. A new option field opens where you can insert the write interval in seconds. Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 OK or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. - OR 3. Press the VSK 7 Store log to save the log directly to the file: card/user/sinumerik/hmi/log/alarm_log/alarmlog.txt on the on the control.
Display area
2.
3.
B576
Page 10
B577
Operating area Start-up
Brief description
Objective of the module: In this module you learn to adjust the operating interface of the Sinumerik Operate to your local language and to set the password and the key-switches.
Description of the module: The user interface is adjustable to the most common global languages English, French, German, Italian, simplified Chinese and Spanish, which you can select from a list. Furthermore you can adjust the functionality of the user interface and so the functionality of the control to different levels of user groups, which allows different user groups different operations on the machine, depending on their knowledge and education. This can be done by passwords and key switches. Content: Start-up

B577
B577
B577
Page 2
B577
Operating area Start-up: Description The user interface is adjustable to the most common global languages English, French, German, Italian, simplified Chinese and Spanish, which you can select from a list. Furthermore you can adjust the functionality of the user interface and so the functionality of the control to different levels of user groups, which allows different user groups different operations on the machine, depending on their knowledge and education. This can be done by passwords and key switches.
Operating area Start-up: START
Start-up
Operating area Start-up: END
Notes :
Page 3
B577
Section 2
Notes:
Start-up
2.1 Selecting the operating area Start-up
The operating area Start-up can be selected as follows: Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. The following horizontal softkey bar of the Sinumerik Operate is displayed.
Press the HSK 6 Start-up, to open the window for Start-up. The Machine configuration window opens.
2.2 Horizontal softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the HSK 1 Mach. data the General MD-window opens. The display of the machine data or drive mechanism depend on the configuration of the control. The access rights to the machine data are restricted by the position of key switches or passwords. This function is described in the commissioning manual of the Sinumerik Operate. By pressing the HSK 6 System data the System data-window opens. This function is described in the commissioning manual of the Sinumerik Operate.
B577
Page 4
Start-up
2.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 3 Change language you can adjust the user interface language to the language of your choice. By pressing the VSK 6 Password the VSK 1 Set password becomes active. You can switch to different protection levels of the control by using different passwords. 2.3 Selecting the function Change language By pressing the VSK 3 Change language the Language selection-window opens.
Section 2
Notes:
2.4 Changing the user language 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. The yellow horizontal softkey bar opens. Press the HSK 6 Start-up. Press the VSK 3 Change language The Language selection window opens. Move the orange cursor over the language field of your choice, by using the blue cursor keys. Accept your selection by pressing the VSK 8 OK or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. The Sinumerik changes the user interface language to the language of your choice. Tip: You can change the user language of the interface directly at any time by pressing the CTRL + L key on the keyboard simultaneously.
2. 3 4
B577
Section 2
Notes:
Start-up
2.5 Selecting the function Password The access to programs, data and functions is restricted user-oriented by 8 hierarchical protection levels. They are separated into: 4 password levels for system, machine manufacturer, commissioner, and user 4 key-switch positions for the end user There are the protection levels 0 - 7, where 0 is the highest and 7 is the lowest level. By pressing the VSK 6 Password and VSK 1 Set password an input mask opens where you can set a new protection level by entering a password.
2.6 1.
Changing the protection level via password Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. The yellow horizontal softkey bar opens. Press the HSK 6 Start-up. Press the VSK 6 Password. Press the VSK 1 Set password. The Define password input mask opens. Enter the password in the orange marked input field and accept with pressing the VSK 8 OK or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. Note: The additional softkeys and functions Set password and Change password are only accessible at a higher protection level.
2. 3. 4. 5.
B577
Page 6
B604
Basics of programming with the programGUIDE
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working with this module you will learn the concept of the G code programming with help of the programGUIDE under ShopMill . Description of the module: This module explains the general program structure of a ShopMill G code program, programmed with the programGUIDE. Furthermore the functions of the Editor are described, as well as the functions Various , Simulation and NC-Selection. Content: Basics Creating G-code programs Editor Various Simulation NC Execute

B604
B604
B604
Page 2
B604
Basics of the Programming with the programGUIDE: Description This module explains the general program structure of a ShopMill G code program, programmed with the programGUIDE. Furthermore the functions of the Editor are described, as well as the functions Various , Simulation and NCSelection.
Basics with programGUIDE: START
Basics
Creating G-code programs
Editor
Various
Simulation
NC Execute
Basics with programGUIDE: END
Notes :
Page 3
B604
Section 2
Notes:
Basics
2. 1 G code programming with ShopMill ShopMill offers beside the manual operation area, also the possibility, to create a NC-program on the control. These programs can be chained sequential programs, G code programs or a mixture of both. If you do not want to program with the ShopMill functionality, you can generate G code programs with G code commands in the ShopMill user interface. G code commands can be programmed as per DIN 66025. Note: The creation of chained sequential programs is discussed in detail in the module -B600 Basics of programming with ShopMill. With the G code programming in ShopMill, with the programGUIDE, parameter masks guide you in the process of measuring, the programming of contours, as well as drilling and milling cycles. From within the parameter masks, G code will be generated, which can also be translated back into the parameter masks. The following functions support the programming of G code programs: Technology oriented program step selection (cycles) using softkeys Input masks and -windows for parameters, with animated help graphics Context sensitive online help for every input mask and window Comfortable definition of the blank Support for the contour input (geometric processor) G code programs can be represented in different views: As a work plan showing the call up of the tool, path commands, revolution settings, spindle data, feed, cycle calls, the program end, etc.
B604
Page 4
Basics
As a parameter mask, with 3-D help pictures and animation during parameter input, with the VSK 2 Graphic view deactivated.
Section 2
Notes:
As a parameter mask with an outline drawing during parameter input, with the VSK 2 Graphic view activated.
Note: The animated help pictures are displayed always in the correct position to the adjusted coordinate system. The parameters are dynamically displayed into the graphic and are highlighted in a different colour.
Page 5
B604
Section 2
Notes:
Basics
2.2 General program structure In general, a G code program can be programmed freely. For a good legibility however, the following structure is recommended:
1 2 3 4 5 5
Zero point selection, plane selection, absolute dimensioning Blank attribution for the simulation Tool call-up and tool change Technology data, path commands Programming of the technologies (cycles) Program end
1 2 3 4 5 6
B604
Page 6
Basics
2.3 Standard commands in the G code Editor Unlike in a program with ShopMill functionality, the following G-code commands are programmed through graphically supported parameter masks, where as in the programGUIDE G-code editor they have to be specifically typed into the editor. Note: Unnamed G commands are freely selectable. The documentation by the machine manufacturer must be observed. Command G 00 G 01 G 02 G 03 G 04 G 17 G 18 G 19 G 54 - G 57 Meaning Rapid traverse command Linear interpolation (Feed motion) Circular interpolation clockwise Circular interpolation anti-clockwise Dwell time: additional parameters F or S are required Plane selection XY Plane selection ZX Plane selection YZ Selection of the zero points Note: More zero points may be available. The documentation by the machine manufacturer must be observed. Absolute dimensions Incremental dimensions
Section 2
Notes:
G 90 G 91
The following standard M commands are available in the G code editor. Note: Unnamed M-commands are freely selectable. The documentation by the machine manufacturer must be observed. Command M00 M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M08 M09 M19 M30 Meaning Programmed Halt Optional Stop, see also M00 End of Program Spindle Start clockwise Spindle Start anti-clockwise Spindle Stop Tool change Coolant ON Coolant OFF Defined spindle stop End of Program (see also M02)
Page 7
B604
Section 2
Notes:
Basics
The following standard other commands are available in the G code editor. Note: The documentation by the machine manufacturer must be observed. Com- Meaning mand T S F Tool call-up (Tool) Speed (Speed) Feed rate (Feed)
2.4 Navigation in the editor window For a fast and comfortable navigation within a G code program and the parameter masks you can use the blue cursor keys. With the blue cursor-up-key on the keyboard you can navigate upwards in the program editor and the parameter masks. With the blue cursor-down-key on the keyboard you can navigate downwards in the program editor and the parameter masks. The arrow symbol (extend symbol) on the right side of a cycle or workpiece line in the editor window indicates that you can enter the parameter input mask by pressing the cursor-to-the-right-key (see picture below).
The cursor-to-the-right-key opens the parameter mask of the corresponding program block. The cursor-to-the-left-key closes the parameter mask for the cycle or workpiece settings and brings you back to the editor window, displaying the G code program.
B604
Page 8
Creating G code programs

3.1 Creating a new G code program or opening an existing one A new G code program can be created from the operating modes JOG, MDA and AUTO as follows: Press the Program Manager-key on the keyboard. The program manager for creating and administering programs opens directly. See module B575 - Operating area Program Manager. - OR Press the MENU SELECT key on the operator panel (OP). Press the yellow HSK 1.4 Program Manager. The program manager for creating new programs and administering existing programs opens. - THEN Select a storage drive (by pressing the horizontal softkey NC, Local drive or USB) where you want to create the program. Move the orange cursor with the blue cursor-keys to the directory of your choice. For the navigation process refer to the modules B566 Operating elements or B575 - Operating area Program Manager. Press the VSK 2 New. The vertical softkey bar with functions for creating new programs opens. Press the VSK 3 programGUIDE G code, to open the input mask for creating a new ShopMill G code program. Here you can create a new main program
Section 3
Notes:
or a new subprogram.
Enter a name for the program and confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 OK, or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel.
Page 9
B604
Section 3
Notes:

After creating a new programGUIDE program, the program is loaded into the G code editor in the operating area Program, where all the functions for tool selection, entering and editing G code commands and cycles are available (see picture below).
3.2 Programming a tool Within the editor, tools can be selected and inserted in the G code program comfortably by using a softkey. Under the function Edit HSK 1 press the VSK 1.1 Select Tool to open the tool list in the operating area Parameter. Press the VSK 1.2 New tool to create a new tool (see module - B573 Operating area Parameter). - OR Select an already existing tool from the tool list by placing the orange selection cursor on that tool and pressing the VSK 1.1 To program. Afterwards program the tool change (M06), the spindle start (M03/M04), the coolant (M07/M08), the speed (S...), the feed (F) and if needed, some tool specific functions.
B604
Page 10

3.3 Programming the blank The blank is needed for the simulation and the simultaneous recording. Only with a blank, that represents the real blank as precise as possible, a accurate simulation is possible. For the blank you have to define the shape (Block, Pipe, Cylinder, N-corner or Block centric) and dimensions. In the operating area Program press the HSK 1.6 Various to open the vertical softkey bar with various functions. Here, press the VSK 1.1 Blank to open the input mask for defining the blank. Fill in the needed parameters and press the VSK 8 Accept to take over the blank settings into the program, or abort by pressing the VSK 7 Cancel (see section 5.3). 3.4 Programming a cycle Cycles (technologies) can be programmed easily by using softkeys and parameter masks as follow. In the operating area Program press the HSK 1.2 Drill., or press the HSK 1.3 Mill., or press the HSK 1.4 Cont. mill., to open the cycles for drilling, milling or contour milling. Select the corresponding technology (cycle) and a position pattern and accept the input. See module B609 - Drilling, B616 - Milling and B624 - Contour milling. 3.5 Inserting G code and programming the program end In the G code editor window several functions for inserting, copying and cutting G code commands are available. In the operating area Program press the HSK 1 Edit to program a part program with G code commands or to edit an already loaded program. Then program the program end (M02/M30) (see section 4). Press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to simulate the machining (see section 6). - OR Press the HSK 1.8 NC Execute to load the program to the NC memory, ready for machining (see section 7).
Section 3
Notes:
Page 11
B604
Section 4
Notes:
Edit
With the editor you can create, supplement, or change part programs. 4.1 Selecting the function Edit The program editor can be opened from the operating modes JOG, MDA or AUTO. By pressing the PROGRAM-key on the keyboard the editor window opens directly, with the last opened program. If no program was loaded before, the program manager window opens instead, where you can create or select an existing program. - OR Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. Press the yellow HSK 3 Program to open the operating area Program. By default the editor window opens with the last opened program (see picture below). Note: If the function is not active, press the HSK 1 Edit. If no program had been opened for editing purpose, then the Sinumerik Operate opens the Program Manager window, offering a chance to the user for choosing the desired program for editing. For further details see module - B574 Operating area Program, and also module - B576 Operating area Program Manager.
The following softkeys are available for editing a program:
B604
Page 12
Edit
4.2 Vertical softkey bar 1 and 2 Display area Description The VSK 1.1 Select tool opens the tool management area (tool list) in the operating area Parameter. Here you can select an existing tool or create a new one. By pressing the VSK 1.1 To program you can insert the selected tool data into the G code program. By pressing the VSK 1.3 Search you can search for any text in the current program. A search window opens where you can enter a search string. You can continue searching afterwards (see section 4.3). By pressing the VSK 1.4 Mark you can mark one or several program blocks in order to copy or cut (delete) them. By pressing the VSK 1.5 Copy you can copy one or several program blocks to the internal memory of the control, to paste them to a different location in the active program or to another program. By pressing the VSK 1.6 Paste copied program code can be inserted anywhere into the active program or into another program on a different location. The pasted program code will be inserted behind the program block marked with the orange selection cursor in the work plan. You can paste the code to the active program as well as to another program on the NC, local drive or USB-drive. By pressing the VSK 1.7 Cut you can cut out one or several program blocks, to paste them later somewhere in a program or to delete them. Cut program steps remain in the clipboard and can be inserted again with the VSK 1.6 Paste (see VSK 1.6 Paste). By pressing the VSK 1.8 Extend the extended vertical softkey bar 2, with the following functions, will be displayed. By pressing the VSK 2.3 Renumbering you can assign new numbers for every program step in the editor window. (see section 4.4). By pressing the VSK 2.6 Settings you can change the setting for the program editor (see section 4.5). By pressing the VSK 2.7 Exit you close the editor with the active program. By pressing the VSK 2.8 Back you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.
Section 4
Notes:
Page 13
B604
Section 4
Notes:
Edit
4.3 Search
With the function Search you can search for any text in a sequential program and even replace the text with other text. 4.3.1 Selecting the function Search By pressing the VSK1.3 Search the search window opens, where you can search for any program code in the current program.
4.3.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1 Go to start the cursor will be positioned on the first line of the program. By pressing the VSK 2 Go to end the cursor will be positioned on the last line of the program. By pressing the VSK4 Search the search mask opens, where you can decide to search for complete words, select the search direction (forward/ backwards) and enter the search text. By pressing the VSK5 Find + replace the Search and replace mask opens where you can decide to search for complete words, select the search direction (forward/backwards), enter the search text and enter the text you want to use for the replacement. With pressing the VSK 7 Cancel you can abort the search process. By pressing the VSK 8 OK you start a search run with the above mentioned search criteria.
B604
Page 14
Edit
4.4 Renumbering
Section 4
Notes:
With the function Renumbering you can renumber manually the program steps in the work plan with an increment you can select here. 4.4.1 Selecting the function Renumbering By pressing the VSK 2.3 Renumbering the input window opens where you can change the settings for the renumbering of the program blocks in the editor window.
4.4.2 Parameters for Renumbering Parameters First block number Meaning The first block number you want to start with. The values shown here by default can be adjusted under the function Settings in the input field First block number (see section 4.5). The Increment between the program blocks. The values shown here by default can be adjusted under the function Settings in the input field Increment (see section 4.5).
Increment
Page 15
B604
Section 4
Notes:
Edit
4.5 Settings With the function Settings you can change the settings for the program editor. 4.5.1 Selecting the function Settings By pressing the VSK 2.6 Settings the settings window for the program editor opens.
4.5.2 Parameters for Settings Parameters Number automatically (Yes/No) First block number Increment Show hidden lines (Yes/No) Meaning Program blocks will be numbered automatically. Deactivating this parameter, hides the following two parameters too. Block number of first block. Increment between block numbers. Show hidden line (with the ID ;*HD).
Display block end as A symbol is displayed at the end of each block. symbol (Yes/No) Move horizontally (Yes/No) Save automatically (only local and external drives) (Yes/No) Blocks are displayed in one line with a scroll bar at the right side. Changes are saved automatically without a query.
B604
Page 16
Various
5.1 Selecting the function Various The function Various can be selected from the operating mode JOG, MDA or AUTO in the operating area Program as follows: Press the HSK 6 Various to switch over to the function Various. Following functions are displayed in the vertical Softkey-bar in the program editor.
Section 5
Notes:
5.2 Vertical softkey bar 1 and 2 Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1.1 Blank an input mask opens where you can change the settings for the blank (see section 5.3 Blank). By pressing the VSK 1.4 HighSpeed settings the input mask for adjusting the settings for the optimal speed in relation to the machining method opens (see section 5.4 HighSpeed settings). By pressing the VSK 1.6 Subprogram the input mask for calling a subprogram opens in the main program (see section 5.8). By pressing the VSK 1.8 Extend the vertical softkey bar 2 opens By pressing the VSK 2.8 Back you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.
Page 17
B604
Section 5
Notes:
Various
5.3 Blank The blank is needed for the simulation and the simultaneous recording during machining. Only with a blank, which corresponds to the real workpiece as exactly as possible, a meaningful simulation is possible. For defining the blank, the form (block, pipe, cylinder, N corner, block centred) and the dimensions are needed.
5.3.1 Selecting the function Blank By pressing the VSK 1.1 Blank the blank input window opens.
B604
Page 18
Various
5.3.2 Parameters for the Blank Meaning The following blank can be selected: Block centred Block Pipe Cylinder N-corner X0 Y0 X1 (abs/ink) Y1 (abs/ink) ZA ZI (abs/ink) XA XI N SW W L 1 corner point X 1 corner point Y 2 corner point related to X0 (absolute or incremental) (only with block) 2 corner point related to Y0 (absolute or incremental) (only with block) Initial dimension Final dimension related to ZA (absolute or incremental) Outside diameter (only with pipe or cylinder) Inside diameter (absolute or incremental) Number of edges (only with N corner) Width across flats (only with N corner) Width of blank (only with Block centred) Length of blank (only with Block centred))
Section 5
Notes:
Parameter Blank
Page 19
B604
Section 5
Notes:
Various
5.3.3 Changing the graphical view on the blank The graphic view on the blank is adjustable in the operation area Program under the functions Edit, Drilling, Milling, Contour milling, Various and Straight Circle by pressing the VSK 1.2 Graphic view. Within the function Various you can adjust the graphic settings with the Softkey Graphic view for the blank. Help pictures and animations are only displayed if the VSK 2 Graphic view is deselected and then only in the side view. You can change the graphic view on the blank as follows: 1. In the operating area Program and operation mode JOG, MDA, or AUTO press the HSK 1.6 Various. Press the VSK 1.1 Blank to open the input mask for the blank settings. By activating and deactivating the VSK 2 Graphic view you can switch the graphical representation of the blank, the help pictures and animations between 2 different views: 3D view/side view
2.
A wireframe model
B604
Page 20
Various
5.3.4 Changing the setting for the blank 1. In the operating area Program and operation mode JOG, MDA, or AUTO press the HSK 1.6 Various. Press the VSK 1 Settings. Optionally change the graphic view for the blank between 3D-/side view or wireframe model by pressing the VSK 2 Graphic view. Enter the parameter values for the blank (see parameter list in section 5.3.2). Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. A new program block Workpiece is inserted in the program (see the picture below).
Section 5
Notes:
2. 3.
4.
5.
5.4 High Speed Settings With the machining of free form surfaces, there are high demands on machining speed as well as accuracy and surface finish. The optimal speed profile in conjunction with the machining method (roughing, pre-finishing, finishing) can be adjusted easily with the function HighSpeed settings. It is advisable to program the cycle in the technology part first, before programming the geometry part. Machining methods: With the function HighSpeed settings you can select from 3 different technological machining methods: "roughing" "pre-finishing" "finishing" "deselect" (default setting) These four machining methods are associated directly with accuracy, velocity and surface quality of the contour path (see the triangle in the Help pictures). The operator/programmer can make an appropriate weighting by adjusting the tolerance value. Different tolerance values and technologies can be assigned to the four machining methods.
Page 21
B604
Section 5
Notes:
Various
5.4.1 Selecting the function HighSpeed settings By pressing the VSK 4 HighSpeed settings the High-speed Settings screen opens. The screens roughing, pre-finishing and finishing change in intervals between Help picture and animation.
5.4.2 Parameter for HighSpeed settings Parameter PL Tolerance Machining: Roughing Help picture Animation
The parameter for the machining plane is optional and has to be activated by a machine datum. Tolerance values for the machining
Pre-finishing
B604
Page 22
Various
Parameter Finishing Help picture Animation (continuation)
Section 5
Notes:
Deselect
none
5.4.3 Changing the High-speed settings 1. In the operating area Program and operation mode JOG, MDA, or AUTO press the HSK 6 Various. Press the VSK 4 HighSpeed settings. Optionally change the graphic view for the blank by pressing the VSK 2 Graphic view. Enter the parameter values for Tolerance and Machining. Press the VSK 8 Accept to accept your inputs or abort by pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. A new program block CYCLE832 with the High Speed settings is inserted into the program (see picture below).
2. 3. 4.
Page 23
B604
Section 5
Notes:
Various
5.5 Subprogram If you require the same machining steps in the programming of different workpieces, you can define these machining steps in a separate routine. You can then call this subroutine in any programs. Identical machining steps therefore only have to be programmed once. ShopMill does not differentiate between main program and subprogram. This means that you can call a "standard" sequential control or G code program as subprogram in another sequential control program. In this subprogram, you can also call another subprogram. The maximum nesting depth is 8 subroutines. You cannot insert subroutines among blocks chained by the control. If you want to call a sequential control program as a subroutine, the program must already have been calculated once (load or simulate program in Machine Auto mode). This is not necessary for G code subroutines. The subroutine must always be stored in the NCK main memory (in a separate directory "XYZ" or in the "ShopMill", "Part programs", "Subroutines" directories). If you want to call a subprogram located on another drive, you can use the G code command "EXTCALL". Note: Please note that, when a subprogram is called, ShopMill evaluates the settings in the program header of the subroutine. These settings also remain active even after the subprogram has ended. If you wish to activate the settings from the program header for the main program again, you can make the settings again in the main program after calling the subprogram. 5.5.1 Selecting the function Subprogram By pressing the VSK 3 Subprogram, the input window for calling up a subprogram opens.
B604
Page 24
Various
5.5.2 Loading subprograms 1. In the operating area Program and operating mode JOG, MDA or AUTO press the HSK 6 Various. Press the VSK 1.6 Subprogram. Enter the directory path to the subprogram and the name of the subprogram in the input mask. Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your inputs or press the VSK 7 Cancel to abort. A new program block Execute with the directory path to the subprogram is inserted (see picture below):
Section 5
Notes:
2. 3. 4.
Page 25
B604
Section 5
Notes:
Simulation
ShopMill provides various extensive and detailed simulation functions for displaying the simulation of the machining. During simulation, the current program is calculated in its complete form and the result is displayed in graphic form. You can select the following modes of representation for simulation: Top view 3-D view Side view The simulation uses the correct proportions for the tools and workpiece contours. Cylindrical die-sinking cutters, bevel cutters, bevel cutters with corner rounding and tapered die-sinking cutters are displayed as end milling tools. The traverse paths for the tools are shown in colour: Red line = tool is moving at rapid traverse Green line = tool is moving at machining feedrate In all views, a clock is displayed during graphical processing. The displayed machining time (in hours/minutes/seconds) indicates the approximate time that would actually be required to execute the machining program on the machine (incl. tool change). If a program is interrupted during simultaneous recording, the clock stops. In addition, the current axis coordinates, the override, and the program block currently being executed are also displayed. The active tool with the cutting edge number and feedrate are also displayed in the simulation. Transformations are displayed differently during simulation and simultaneous recording: Coordinate transformations (translation, scaling, ) are displayed as programmed. Cylinder surface transformations are displayed as a developed surface. After swivel transformation, the previous machining operations are deleted from the display and only machining of the swivelled plane is displayed (viewing angle perpendicular to the swivelled plane). Zero offsets (G54, etc.) do not alter the zero in the graphical display. This means that, in the case of multiple clamping, the machining operations for each of the individual workpieces are plotted on top of one another. Note: If you want to display a different portion of the workpiece from the one defined in ShopMill, you can define a new blank in the program (see section 5.3 Blank in this module).
B604
Page 26
Simulation
6.1 Selecting the function Simulation The function Simulation can be selected from the operating mode JOG, MDA and AUTO as follows: With a program loaded, press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to start a simulation run. The following screen opens. The simulation starts after a short computing time in the top view by default.
Section 6
Notes:
Press the VSK 1.4 3D view the simulated workpiece is displayed 3-dimesionally (see picture below).
The following functions will be available in the vertical softkey bar.

B604
Section 6
Notes:
Simulation
6.2 Vertical softkey bar 1 and 2 Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1.1 Stop the simulation will be halted. The softkey will be replaced with the VSK 1.1 Start, in order to continue the simulation again. By pressing the VSK 1.1 Start the simulation will be started or continued. The softkey will be replaced with the VSK Stop. By pressing the VSK 1.1 SBL the simulation will be processed block by block. This softkey replaces the softkey Start, if the VSK 4 Single block is activated under the function Program control. By pressing the VSK 1.2 Reset the simulation will be aborted, and can be started again by pressing the VSK 1.1 Start. The Top view is activated by default and shows the simulation in a plan view from above By pressing the VSK 1.4 3D view the simulation will be shown in a 3-D view By pressing the VSK 1.5 Further views the vertical softkey bar opens, with more options to adjust the view on the simulation process (see section 6.3). By pressing the VSK 1.6 Details the vertical softkey bar opens, where you can adjust the level of details that will be shown during the simulation (see section 6.4). By pressing the VSK 1.7 Program control the vertical softkey bar opens, with further functions to control the simulation run (see section 6.5). By pressing the VSK 1.8 Extend the vertical softkey bar 2 with the following functions will be displayed. By pressing the VSK 2.3 Show tool path the display of the simulated tool path can be switched on and off. By pressing the VSK 2.4 Delete tool path the animated tool path in the simulation window will be deleted. A new tool path is shown immediately after pressing this softkey or after running a new simulation (if the simulation is in Stop- or Reset- mode). By pressing the VSK 2.5 Blank you can change the dimensions of the simulated blank (see also section 5.3). This softkey is active if the simulation is in Reset mode. By pressing the VSK 2.8 Back you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.
B604
Page 28
Simulation
6.3 Further views With the function Further views you can change the graphical side-views on the blank, to view the simulation process in an optimal way. You can change the sides from which you want to see the simulation. 6.3.1 Selecting the function Further views By pressing the VSK 1.5 Further views the following window with side views on the blank opens.
Section 6
Notes:
6.3.1 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1 From front the simulated workpiece will be shown in a front view. By pressing the VSK 2 From rear the simulated workpiece will be shown in a rear view. By pressing the VSK 3 From left the simulated workpiece will be shown from the left side. By pressing the VSK 4 From right the simulated workpiece will be shown from the right side. By pressing the VSK 8 Back on the operator panel (OP) you switch back to the vertical softkey bar of the operating area Details.
Page 29
B604
Section 6
Notes:
Simulation
6.4 Details With the function Details you can zoom in, zoom out, rotate and cut out parts of the workpiece. 6.4.1 Selecting the function Details By pressing the VSK 1.6 Details the following functions are available in a vertical softkey bar.
6.4.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1 Autozoom the workpiece fills out the simulation window in an optimal way. By pressing the VSK 2 Zoom + you zoom in into the simulation window. Alternatively you can press the +-key on the number block of the keyboard. By pressing the VSK 3 Zoom - you can zoom out of the simulation window. Alternatively you can press the --key on the keyboard. By pressing the VSK 4 Zoom a frame opens in the simulation window, that lets you zoom in to the frame size. Press the VSK1 Zoom + to increase and the VSK 2 Zoom - to decrease the frame size. Alternatively you can change the frame size of the zoom area with the +or - key on the number pad of the keyboard. Move the frame with the blue cursor keys on the keyboard. Press the VSK 8 Accept to zoom to the selected extent or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel.
B604
Page 30
Simulation
Display area Description (continuation) By pressing the VSK 5 Rotate view a vertical softkey bar opens to the right, with functions to rotate the workpiece in the simulation window (see section 6.4.2.1). By pressing the VSK 6 Cut the functions for cutting out parts of the workpiece are available in a vertical softkey bar (see section 6.4.2.3). By pressing the VSK 8 Back on the operator panel you switch back to the vertical softkey-bar 1.
Section 6
Notes:
6.4.2.1 Selecting the function Rotate view By pressing the VSK 5 Rotate view the following functions will be displayed in a vertical softkey bar.
6.4.2.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK Arrow right the workpiece will be turned right around the centre of the simulation window. By pressing the VSK Arrow left the workpiece will be turned left around the centre of the simulation window. By pressing the VSK 3 Arrow up the work piece will be turned up around the centre of the simulation window. By pressing the VSK 4 Arrow down the work piece will be turned down around the centre of the simulation window. By pressing the 5 Arrow turns left the workpiece will be rotated to the left, around the centre of the simulation window (counter clockwise). By pressing the 5 Arrow turns right the workpiece will be rotated to the right, around the centre of the simulation window (clockwise). By pressing the VSK 8 Back you switch back to the VSK-bar Details.
Page 31
B604
Section 6
Notes:
Simulation
6.4.2.3 Selecting the function Cut By pressing the VSK 1.7 Cut the functions for cutting out parts of the simulated workpiece will be shown in a vertical softkey bar. The cut surface areas are only displayed during simulation run.
6.4.2.4 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1 Cut active you can activate the cut surfaces on the workpiece and activate the greyed out axes softkeys in the vertical softkey bar. The function Cut stays active until the VSK Cut active is deactivated. By pressing the VSK 2 X+ the cutting plane is shifted on the X-axis to the positive (to the right). By pressing the VSK 3 X- the cutting plane is shifted on the X-axis to the negative (to the left). By pressing the VSK 4 Y+ the cutting plane is shifted on the y-axis (ordinate) to the positive (to the rear ). By pressing the VSK 5 Y- the cutting plane is shifted on the y-axis (ordinate) to the negative (forward). By pressing the VSK 6 Z+ the cutting plane will be shifted on the Z-axis (applicate) to the positive (up).
B604
Page 32
Simulation
Anzeigebereich Beschreibung (Fortsetzung) Durch Drcken des VSK 7 Z- wird die Schnittebene auf der Z-Achse (Ablikate) zum negativen (nach unten) verschoben. Durch Drcken des VSK 8 Zurck gelangt man wieder in den Bedienbereich Details zurck.
Section 6
Notes:
6.5 Programmsteuerung Mit der Funktion Programmsteuerung kann der Override fr die Simulation eingestellt werden, das Programm kann Block fr Block abgearbeitet werden, und Alarm Meldungen die whrend der Simulation auftreten, knnen angezeigt werden. 6.5.1 Anwahl der Funktion Programmsteuerung Durch Drcken des VSK 1.7 Programmsteuerung werden die folgenden Funktionen in der vertikalen Softkey-Leiste zur Verfgung gestellt.. 6.5.2 Vertikale Softkey-Leiste Beschreibung Durch Drcken des VSK 1 Override 100% wird der Vorschub-Override auf die maximale Vorschubgeschwindigkeit von 100% gesetzt. Durch Drcken des VSK 2 Override + wird der Vorschub um jeweils 5%-Schritte bis zur maximalen Vorschubgeschwindigkeit von 100% erhht. Durch Drcken des VSK 3 Override - wird der Vorschub-Override um jeweils 5%-Schritte reduziert. Bei einem Vorschub-Override von 0% wird die Simulation pausiert. Durch Drcken des VSK 4 Einzelsatz wird die Abarbeitung des Programms Satz fr Satz simuliert. Mit jedem Drcken des VSK 1 SBL im Bedienbereich Simulation wird jeder Programm-Block nacheinander abgearbeitet (siehe Abschnitt 6.2, Vertikale Softkey-Leiste 1 und 2). Durch Drcken des VSK 7 Alarm wird das Fenster mit den Alarmmeldungen geffnet, die whrend des Simulationslaufs auftreten, um bspw. eine Fehlerdiagnose durchzufhren. Durch Drcken des VSK 8 Zurck gelangt man wieder in zur Vertikalen Softkey-Leiste 1 zurck.
Anzeigebereich
Page 33
B604
Section 6
Notes:
Simulation
6.6.1 Selecting the function Alarm By pressing the VSK 7 Alarm the Simulation alarms window opens, with a list of all current active alarm messages that occurred during the simulation. For error messages and acknowledgement symbols see module - B576 Operating area Diagnostics, section 3.
6.6.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1 Acknowl. Alarm all with the Reset- or Cancel-symbol marked alarm messages can be deleted. This softkey is inactive as long as no appropriate error message is shown. By pressing the VSK 2 Simulation Power On you can trigger a warm restart for the active simulation.
Press the VSK 8 OK to confirm or the VSK 7 Cancel to abort the warm restart. With a warm start the simulation will be ended and started new. By pressing the VSK 8 Back you switch back to the operating area Program control.
B604
Page 34
NC Execute
7.1 NC Execute The function NC Execute lets you load the active program from the editor to the operating area Machine in the operating mode AUTO. 7.1.1 Selecting the function NC Execute By pressing the HSK 1.8 NC Execute the control, switches to the operating area Machine under the operating mode AUTO. The program is loaded into the internal memory of the NC and is now ready for machining (see picture below). The Softkey NC Execute is inactive on a running program.
Section 7
Notes:
Page 35
B604
B604
Page 36
B609
Drilling
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working through this module you become familiar with the technology Drilling by programming two G code programs with the programGUIDE in ShopMill. Description of the module: This module explains the programming of a simple drilling example with the programGUIDE in ShopMill, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of drilling cycles and position patterns. Content: Simple programming example Complex programming example

B609
B609
B609
Page 2
B609
Drilling - programGUIDE: Description This module explains the programming of a simple drilling example with the programGUIDE in ShopMill, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of drilling cycles and position patterns.
Drilling programGUIDE: START
Simple programming example
Complex programming example
Drilling programGUIDE: END
Notes :
Page 3
B609
Section 2
Notes:

Description: A simple drilling using the drill cycle is to be programmed with the programGUIDE in ShopMill.
Objective: A new G code program is to be created and opened. The G code lines and the drill cycle must be programmed and the program is to be simulated. For this, the tool and technology data below are to be used: Tool data: Technology data: Drill 8,5 mm (DRILL_D8.5) As a start position for the machining, the first programmed drill hole is to be used. This position is approached in rapid traverse.
2.1 Creating a new programGUIDE program A new G code program can be created from within the operating modes JOG, MDA and AUTO as follows: 1. Press the Program Manager-key on the keyboard. The program manager will be opened directly. - OR 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. Press the yellow HSK 1.4 Program Manager. The program manager opens. 2. Select a drive by pressing a horizontal softkey where you want to create the program (NC, Local drive, USB). Press the VSK 2 New. The vertical softkey bar with functions for creating new programs opens. Press the VSK 4 programGUIDE G code to open the input mask for creating a new G code program. Select Main program MPF. Enter a name for the program in the Name field, e.g DIN_DRILLING_1.MPF and accept with pressing the VSK 8 OK. The editor window for entering G code commands opens.
3.
4.
5.
B609

2.2 Example: Drilling The following G code program, with the call up of a simple drilling cycle, is to be programmed.
Section 2
Notes:
Create a new G code programGUIDE program, as described before in section 2.1 and give the program the name DIN_DRILLING_1. 1. 2. Program the first line of the program: N10 G54 G17 G90 Insert now a blank for the simulation. Press the HSK 1.6 Various to open the operating area Various. Press the VSK 1 Blank to open the input mask for the blank. 3. Fill in the following parameters for the blank:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N20 WORKPIECE(,,,"RECTANGLE",64,0,-20,80,100,100) 4. Now, insert a drill tool into the program. Press the VSK 1.1 Select tool. The tool list window opens. Select the tool DRILL_D8.5 by using the blue cursor key on the keyboard.
Page 5
B609
Section 2
Notes:

Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The following program line is inserted into the program: N30 T="DRILL_D8.5" 5. Program the following G code commands: N40 M6 N50 S1000 M3 F150 N60 G0 X0 Y0 Z100 Program the drilling-cycle CYCLE82. For this, press the HSK 1.2 Drill. to open the technology Drilling. Press the VSK 2 Drilling Reaming. Press the VSK 3 Drilling. The input mask for the drilling cycle CYCLE82 opens. 7. Insert the values into the parameter mask like displayed below:
6.
The following program line will be inserted into the program: N70 CYCLE82(100,0,1,,25,0,10,1,11) 9. 10. Program the program end: N80 M30 Simulate the machining. Press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to run the simulation of the program.
B609
Page 6

Press the VSK 1.4 3D view to view the simulation in a 3D view.
Section 2
Notes:
Page 7
B609
Section 3
Notes:

Description: By using different drilling cycles (Centering, Drilling, Thread drilling) and a position pattern, a more complex programGUIDE-program (drill pattern) is to be created in ShopMill.
Aim: The workpiece shown below is to be programmed. Afterwards, the program is to be simulated.
The following tools and technology data are to be used. Tool data: Center drill 12 mm (CENTERDRILL_D12) Drill 8,5 mm (DRILL_D8.5) Tap M10 (TAP_M10) As a start position for the machining, the first programmed drill hole is to be used. This position is approached in rapid traverse.
Technology data:
B609
Page 8

3.1 Example: Drill pattern The following program, with the call up of a drilling-, center drilling- and thread drilling-cycle, is to be programmed:
Section 3
Notes:
Create a new programGUIDE-program in ShopMill, like described in section 2.1 in this module. Give the program a name, for example DIN_DRILLING_2. 1. 2. Program the first line of the program: N10 G54 G17 G90 Now insert a blank for the simulation. For this, press the HSK 1.6 Various to open the operating area Various. Press the VSK 1 Blank to open the parameter mask for the blank. 3. Insert the values into the parameter mask like displayed below:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N20 WORKPIECE(,,,"BOX",112,0,-20,80,0,0,150,100) 4. Insert a tool into the program. Press the VSK 1.1 Select tool. The tool list window opens. Use the blue cursor keys to select the tool: CENTERDRILL_D12.
B609
Section 3
Notes:

Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The program line N30 T="CENTERDRILL_D12" is inserted into the program. 5. Program the following G code commands: N40 M6 N50 S2000 M3 F100 Program the center drill cycle CYCLE 81. Press the HSK 1.2 Drill., to open the technology Drilling. Press the VSK 1 Centering. The input mask for the centering cycle CYCLE81 opens. Insert the values into the parameter mask like displayed below:
6.
Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N60 MCALL CYCLE81(100,0,1,10,,0,10,1,11). 7. Insert now the position patterns (CYCLE802) for centering. Press the VSK 7 Positions for selecting a position pattern. Press the VSK 3 Positions to program the CYCLE802. Insert DRILLING_1 into the LAB field to set a name for the jump marks for the repeat positions. Fill out the rest of the input mask like displayed below.
B609
Page 10

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N70 DRILLING_1: CYCLE802(111111111, 111111111,30,25,120,25,120,75,30,75,,,,,,,,,,,0,0,1) 8. Program the following G code command: N80 MCALL Insert the tool DRILL_D8.5 into the program (see step 4) or type into the editor the following line by hand: N90 T="DRILL_D8.5" Program the following G code commands: N100 M6 N110 S1000 M3 F150 Program the cycle for drilling (CYCLE82). Press the VSK 2 Drilling Reaming. Press the VSK 3 Drilling. The input mask for the drilling cycle CYCLE82 opens. 12. Insert the values into the parameter mask like displayed below:
Section 3
Notes:
9.
10.
11.
Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N120 MCALL CYCLE82(100,0,1,,25,0,10,1,11). 13. Program the following G code commands: N130 REPEATB DRILLING_1 N140 MCALL Insert the tool TAP_M10 into the program (see step 4) or type into the editor the following line by hand: N150 T="TAP_M10" Program the following G code commands: N160 M6 N170 S1000 M3 F150
Page 11
14.
15.
B609
Section 3
Notes:

16. Finally program the cycle for the thread drilling. Press the VSK 6 Thread to open the input mask for the CYCLE84 Tapping. 17. Insert the values into the parameter mask like displayed below:
Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N180 MCALL CYCLE84(100,0,1,25,,0,5,,1.5,0,500,500,0,1,0,0,,1.4,,"ISO_METRIC"," M10",,1001,1001002) 18. Program the following lines and complete the program: N190 REPEATB DRILLING_1 N200 MCALL N210 M30 Start the simulation of the program. Press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to open the simulation window. The control calculates the simulation and shows the simulation in a top view.
19.
B609
Page 12
Section 3
Notes:
Press the VSK 1.4 3D view to run the simulation in a 3-dimensional view.
Page 13
B609
B609
B616
Milling
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working through this module you learn about the technology Milling by programming two G code programs with the programGUIDE in ShopMill. Description of the module: This module explains the explains the programming of a simple milling example with the programGUIDE in ShopMill, as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of milling cycles and a position pattern. Content: Simple programming example Complex programming example

B616
B616
B616
Page 2
B616
Milling - programGUIDE: Description This module explains the explains the programming of a simple milling example with the programGUIDE in ShopMill, as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of milling cycles and a position pattern.
Milling programGUIDE: START
Milling programGUIDE: END
Notes :
Page 3
B616
Section 2
Notes:

Description: A simple milling operation is to be programmed with the programGUIDE in ShopMill.
Objective: A new G code program is to be created and opened in the editor window. The G code lines and the milling cycle are to be programmed and the program is to be simulated For this the tool and technology data shown below are to be used: Tool data: Technology data: Milling cutter 10 mm (CUTTER_D10) F 0,15 mm/tooth, V120 m/min
2.1 Creating a new programGUIDE program A new programGUIDE program can be created from within the operating modes JOG, MDA and AUTO as follows: 1. Press the Program Manager-key on the keyboard. The program manager will be opened directly. - OR 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. Press the yellow HSK 4 Program Manager. The program manager opens. 2. Select a drive, where you want to create the program (NC, Local drive, USB). Press the VSK 2 New. The vertical softkey bar for creating new programs opens. Press the VSK 4 programGUIDE G code to open the input mask for creating a new ShopMill G code program. Select Main program. Enter a name for the program in the Name field, e.g DIN_MILLING_1.MPF and accept with pressing the VSK 8 OK. The G code program is loaded to the editor.
3.
4.
B616
Page 4

2.2 Example: Rectangular pocket The following program, with a simple call up of a milling cycle, is to be programmed with the programGUIDE in ShopMill:
Section 2
Notes:
1.
Program the first line of the program: N10 G54 G17 G90
2.
Insert now a blank for the simulation. Press the HSK 1.6 Various to open the operating area Various. Press the VSK 1 Blank to open the parameter mask for the Blank input.
3.
Insert the following values into the parameter mask:
Confirm your inputs with pressing the VSK 8 Accept: The following line is inserted into the program_ N20 WORKPIECE(,,,"BOX",112,0,-20,80,0,0,150,100) 4. Insert now a tool into the program. Press the VSK 1.1 Select tool. The tool list window opens. Place the orange selection cursor on the tool CUTTER_D10 by using the blue cursor keys on the keyboard.
B616
Section 2
Notes:

Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The program line N30 T="CUTTER_D10" is inserted into the program. Alternatively you can also program the line by hand. 5. Insert the following G code commands into the program: N40 M6 N50 S3820 M3 N60 G95 FZ=0.15 6. Program now the rectangular pocket. For this, press the HSK 1.2 Mill., to call up the technology Milling. Press the VSK 2 Pocket. Press the VSK 3 Rectang. pocket. The input mask for the rectangular pocket opens. 7. Insert the following values into the parameter mask:
Confirm your inputs with pressing the VSK 8 Accept: The following line will be inserted into the program: N70 POCKET3(100,0,1,-10,60,30,7,75,50,0,10, 0,0,0.15,0.1,0,21,40,8,3,15,2,2,0,1,2,11100,1,111) 9. Program now the program end with the following G-code command: N80 M30
B616
Page 6

10. Simulate the machining of the workpiece. Press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to start the simulation run. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in Top view.
Section 2
Notes:
To view the simulation in 3-dimensional press the VSK 1.4 3D view.
Page 7
B616
Section 3
Notes:

Description: A more complex program (slanted rectangular pocket) is to be created with the programGUIDE in ShopMill, using milling cycles and a position pattern.
Objective: The workpiece shown below is to be programmed and simulated afterwards. For this the tool and technology data shown below are to be used:
The following tool- and technology data are needed for the programming: Tool data:: Milling cutter 10 mm (CUTTER_D10) F 0,15 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) and F 0,08 mm/tooth, V 150 m/min (finishing) The pocket is to be roughed first and later on to be finished.
Technology data:
B616
Page 8

3.1 Example: Slanted rectangular pocket The following program is to be programmed using the milling cycle Rectang. Pocket.
Section 3
Notes:
For this, create a new programGUIDE G code program, like described in section 2.1 in this module. Give the program for example following name DIN_MILLING_2. 1. 2. Program in the first line following G code command: N10 G54 G17 G90 Insert now a blank for the simulation into the program. Press the HSK 1.6 Various to open the operating area Various. Press the VSK 1 Blank to open the parameter window for the blank input. 3. Insert the following parameters into the parameter window:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line is inserted into the program: N20 WORKPIECE(,,,"BOX",112,0,-20,80,0,0,150,100) 4. Insert now a tool into the program.
Page 9
B616
Section 3
Notes:

Press the VSK 1.1 Select tool. The tool list in the operating area Parameter opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to select the tool CUTTER_D10. Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The program line N30 T="CUTTER_D10" is inserted into the program. Optionally you can program this line by typing it into the editor. 5. Program the following G code commands: N40 M6 N50 S3820 M3 N60 G95 FZ=0.15 6. Rough the rectangular pocket. Press the HSK 1.3 Mill., to open the technology Milling.. Press the VSK 2 Pocket. Press the VSK 3 Rectang. pocket. The parameter mask for the rectangular pocket cycle opens. 7. Here, enter the values displayed below and press the VSK 8 Accept.
The following line is inserted into the program:

N70 POCKET3(100,0,1,-15,60,40,6,75,50,30,2.5, 0.3,0.3,0.15,0.1,0,21,80,8,3,15,2,2,0,1,2,11100,1,110)
B616
Page 10

8. Insert now the following G code command: N80 S4775 9. Finish the rectangular pocket. Press the VSK 2 Pocket. Press the VSK 3 Rectang. pocket. The parameter mask for the rectangular pocket cycle opens. 10. Insert the following values into the parameter mask and press the VSK 8 Accept.
Section 3
Notes:
The following line is inserted into the program: N90 POCKET3(100,0,1,-15,60,40,6,75,50,30,15,0.3, 0.3,0.08,0.1,0,22,80,8,3,15,2,2,0,1,2,11100,1,110) 11. Program the following G code command and end the program: N100 M30 12. Start the Simulation of the program. Press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to start the simulation run. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in Top view.
B616
Section 3
Notes:
To view the simulation 3-dimensional press the VSK 1.4 3D view.
B616
Page 12
B624
Contour milling
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working with this module you learn about the technology Contour milling, by programming two G code programs with the programGUIDE in ShopMill. Description of the module: This module explains the programming of a simple contour milling example (straight line) with the programGUIDE in ShopMill, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece (mould plate) by means of contour milling cycles and contour descriptions. Content: Simple programming example Complex programming example

B624
B624
B624
Page 2
B624
Contour milling - programGUIDE: Description This module explains the programming of a simple contour milling example (straight line) with the programGUIDE in ShopMill, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece (mould plate) by means of contour milling cycles and contour descriptions.
Contour milling programGUIDE: START
Contour milling programGUIDE: END
Notes :
Page 3
B624
Section 2
Notes:

Description: A simple straight line is to be programmed using the technology Contour milling with the programGUIDE in ShopMill. Objective: A new G code program is to be created and opened. The G code lines and the contour milling cycles must be programmed and the program is to be simulated For this the tool and technology data below are to be used: Tool data: Technology data: Milling cutter 32 mm (CUTTER_D32) F 0,15 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min As a start position for the machining, the following position is to be used: X0, Y-100 This position is approached in the cycle in rapid traverse.
2.1 Creating a new programGUIDE program

A new G code program can be created from within the operating modes JOG, MDA and AUTO as follows: 1. Press the Program Manager-key on the keyboard. The program manager will be opened directly. - OR 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. Press the yellow HSK 1.4 Program Manager. The program manager opens. 2. Select a drive by pressing a horizontal softkey where you want to create the program (NC, Local drive, USB). Press the VSK 2 New. The vertical softkey bar with functions for creating new programs opens. Press the VSK 4 programGUIDE G code to open the input mask for creating a new G code program. Select Main program MPF. Enter a name for the program in the Name field, e.g. DIN_CONTOURMILLING_1.MPF and accept with pressing the VSK 8 OK. The editor window for entering G code commands opens.
3.
4.
B624
Page 4
Simple programming example 2.2 Programming example: Straight line

The following G code program DIN_CONTOURMILLING_1.MPF is to be programmed:
Section 2
Notes:
1. 2.
Program the first line of the program: N10 G54 G17 G90 Insert now a blank for simulation. Press the HSK 1.6 Various to open the operating area Various. Press the VSK 1 Blank to open the input mask for the blank.
3.
Fill in the following parameters for the blank:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N20 WORKPIECE(,,,"BOX",64,0,-25,-80,-50,100,100,150) 4. Now, insert a tool into the program. First Press HSK 1 Edit. A vertical softkey-bar with additional functions shows on the right of the screen. Press the VSK 1.1 Select tool. The tool list window opens. Select the tool CUTTER_D32 by using the blue cursor key on the keyboard.
B624
Section 2
Notes:

Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The program line N30 T="CUTTER_D32" is inserted into the program. Alternatively you can type this line by hand into the editor. 5. Insert the following G code commands into the program: N40 M6 N50 S1194 M3 N60 G95 FZ=0.15 6. Insert a contour call (CYCLE62) into the program. For this, press the HSK 1.4 Cont. mill. to open the technology Contour milling. Press the VSK 2 Contour. Press the VSK2 Contour call to open the input mask for the contour call. 7. Give the contour a name:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line is inserted into the program: N70 CYCLE62("STRAIGHTLINE",1,,) Press VSK 2.8 to return to the VSK-bar 1. 8. Insert the cycle Path milling (CYCLE72) into the program. Press the VSK 2 Path milling to open the parameter mask for the Path milling cycle. 9. Enter following values into the input mask. Use the Select key on the MCP where indicated.
B624
Page 6

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program. N80 CYCLE72("",100,0,1,-15,5,0,0,0.15,0.1, 1,41,1,5,0.1,1,5,0,1,2,101,1001,100) 10 Program the following line: N90 M30 11. At the end, program the contour for the straight line that you have called up in step 7. Press the VSK 1 Contour. The vertical softkey bar with functions for calling up, or creating a new contour description opens. Press the VSK1 New contour to insert a new contour description for the contour milling machining into the program. 12. The input window for a new contour opens. Fill in the following name into the name field:
Section 2
Notes:
Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. 13. The contour editor for the input of the start point of the contour description opens.
Page 7
B624
Section 2
Notes:

14. Insert the following coordinates for the starting point:
Confirm by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. 15. Program the contour with a straight line in Ydirection. Press the VSK 1.3 Straight line Y. The input mask for the Straight line Y opens. 16. Enter the coordinates as follows:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description is now finished. 17. Now, check the outline of the programmed contour. In order to do this, use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard, to place the orange selection cursor on the symbol, on the left side of the screen. The contour graphic is being displayed.
B624
Page 8

18. Complete the contour description by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The editor window opens and the following program lines are entered into the program: N100 E_LAB_A_STRAIGHTLINE: ;#SM Z:2 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X0 Y-100 ;*GP* G1 Y150 ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,2,2,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;* HD* ;S,EX:0,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:150;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_STRAIGHTLINE: Notes: The lines marked as italic are shown optionally (see Settings - Show hidden lines). 19. Now simulate the machining of the workpiece. Press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to start the simulation of the program. The control calculates the simulation and opens the animation of the machining in top view by default.
Section 2
Notes:
Page 9
B624
Section 2
Notes:

Press the VSK 1.4 3D view to view the simulation in a 3-dimensional.
B624
Page 10

Description: A more complex program (moulding plate) is to be created with the programGUIDE in ShopMill. Objective: The workpiece shown below is to be programmed and simulated.
5
Section 3
Notes:
A-A
20
100
40
50 35
20
A
R36
150
90
R30
A
R5
60
70
Tool & technology data:
Milling cutter 32 mm (CUTTER_D32) F 0,15 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) F 0,08 mm/tooth, V 150 m/min (finishing) Milling cutter 16 mm (CUTTER_D16) F 0,15 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) Milling cutter 8.0 mm (CUTTER_D8) F 0,10 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) F 0,05 mm/tooth, V 150m/min (finishing) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Outer contour roughing + finishing Spigot contour roughing + finishing Contour pocket roughing Contour pocket rest material roughing Contour pocket wall + base finishing
Operations list:
Page 11
B624
Section 3
Notes:
Complex programming example 3.1 Programming example: Moulding plate

The following program is to be programmed with the technology Contour milling.
Create a new programGUIDE program in ShopMill, like described in section 2.1 in this module, with the name DIN_CONTOURMILLING_2.MPF. 1. Program the first line of the program with the following G code commands: N10 G54 G17 G90 2. Insert a blank for the simulation. Press the HSK 1.6 Various to open the operating area Various. Press the VSK 1 Blank to open the parameter window for the blank. 3. Insert the following parameters for the blank:
Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your inputs. The following line is inserted into the program: N20 WORKPIECE(,,,"BOX",64,0,-25,-80,-50,100,100,150)
B624
Page 12

4. Insert now a tool call into the program. First Press HSK 1 Edit. A vertical softkey-bar with additional functions shows. Press the VSK 1.1 Select tool. The Tool list window opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to select the tool CUTTER_D32. Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The line N30 T="CUTTER_D32" will be inserted into the program. Alternatively you can also program this line by hand. 5. Program now the following G code commands: N40 M6 N50 S1194 M3 N60 G95 FZ=0.15 ; Feedrate per tooth 6. Insert a contour call into the program (CYCLE62), for the moulding plate outside. To do this, press the HSK 1.4 Cont. Mill to open the technology Contour milling. Press the VSK 1 Contour. Press the VSK 2 Contour call to open the input mask for calling up a contour in the program. The input mask for naming the contour opens. 7. Fill out the name field like displayed below:
Section 3
Notes:
Confirm the contour name by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N70 CYCLE62("MOULDINGPLATE_OUTSIDE",1,,) Press VSK 2.8 to return to the VSK-bar 1. 8. Insert now the first path milling cycle (CYCLE72) into the program, for roughing the outside contour. Press the VSK 2 Path milling to open the input mask for the CYCLE72 Path milling.
Page 13
B624
Section 3
Notes:

Enter following values into the input mask. Use the Select key on the MCP where indicated.
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N80 CYCLE72("",100,0,1,-15,5,0.3,0.3,0.15, 0.1,1,41,1,5,0.1,1,5,0,1,2,101,1001,100) 10. Program now the following G code command: N90 S1942 11. Insert now the second path milling cycle (CYCLE72) into the program, for finishing the outside contour. Press the VSK 2 Path milling to open the parameter mask for the path milling cycle (CYCLE72). Enter following values into the input mask. Use the Select key on the MCP where indicated.
B624
Page 14

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program. N100 CYCLE72("",100,0,1,-15,5,0.3,0.3, 0.08,0.1,2,41,1,5,0.1,1,5,0,1,2,101,1001,100) 12. Insert another contour call into the program (CYCLE62), for the spigot boundary. Press now the VSK 1 Contour. Press the VSK 2 New contour to insert a new contour description into the program. The input mask for naming the contour opens. 14. Give the contour a name as shown below:
Section 3
Notes:
Confirm the contour name by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N110 CYCLE62 ("MOULDINGPLATE_BOUNDARY",1,,) Press VSK 2.8 to return to the VSK-bar 1. 15. Insert another contour call (CYCLE62) into the program for the moulding plate spigot. Press the VSK 1 Contour. Press the VSK 2 Contour call to open the input mask for calling up a contour in the program. The input mask for naming the contour opens. 16. Give the contour a name as shown below:
Confirm the contour name by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N120 CYCLE62("MOULDINGPLATE_SPIGOT",1,,) Press VSK 2.8 to return to the VSK-bar 1.
Page 15
B624
Section 3
Notes:

17. Insert now the first spigot milling cycle (CYCLE63), into the program, for roughing. Press the VSK 6 Spigot to open the input mask for the CYCLE63 Mill Spigot. 18. Enter following values into the input mask. Use the Select-key on the MCP where indicated.
Note: With the blue Select-key the machining depth Z1 can be set to inc or abs and the tool path step over DXY can be set to % of tool or as value in mm. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N130 CYCLE63 ("SPIGOT",1001,100,0,1,5,0.15,,50,2.5,0.3,0,0,0,0,,, ,1,2,,,,0,201,111) 19. Insert now another spigot milling cycle (CYCLE63) into the program for wall finishing Press the VSK 6 Spigot to open the input mask for the CYCLE63 Mill Spigot. Enter following values into the input mask. Use the Select-key on the MCP where indicated.
B624
Page 16

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N140 CYCLE63 ("SPIGOT_FINISH_WALL",1004,100,0,1,5,0.08,,50 ,2.5,0.3,0,0,0,0,,,,1,2,,,,0,201,111) 20. Insert now a tool call into the program. First Press HSK 1 Edit. A Vertical softkey-bar with additional functions opens. Press the VSK 1.1 Select tool. The Tool list window opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to select the tool CUTTER_D16. Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The line N150 T="CUTTER_D16" will be inserted into the program. Alternatively you can also program this line by hand. 21. Program now the following G code commands: N160 M6 N170 S2388 M3 N180 G95 FZ=0.15; Feedrate per tooth 22. Insert another contour call (CYCLE62) into the program for the Moulding plate pocket. To do this, press the HSK 1.4 Cont. Mill to open the technology Contour milling. Press the VSK 1 Contour. Press the VSK 2 Contour call to open the input mask for calling up a contour in the program. The input mask for naming the contour opens. 23. Fill out the name field like displayed below:
Section 3
Notes:
Confirm the contour name by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N190 CYCLE62 ("MOULDINGPLATE_POCKET",1,,) Press VSK 2.8 to return to the VSK-bar 1.
Page 17
B624
Section 3
Notes:

25. Insert now a pocket milling cycle (CYCLE63) into the program for roughing the pocket. Press the VSK 4 Pocket to open the input mask for the CYCLE63 Mill pocket. Enter following values into the input mask. Use the Select key on the MCP where indicated.
Note: With the blue Select-key the machining depth Z1 can be set to inc or abs and the tool path step over DXY can be set to % of tool or a value in mm of the tool . Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N200 CYCLE63("CONTOUR_POCKET",1011,100,5,1,15,0.15,0.1,50,5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,6,1.25,15,1,2,,,,0,1 01,111) 26. Insert now a tool call into the program. First Press HSK 1 Edit. Vertical softkey-bar with additional functions opens. Press the VSK 1.1 Select tool. The Tool list window opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to select the tool CUTTER_D8. Press the VSK 1.1 To program. The line N210 T="CUTTER_D8" will be inserted into the program. Alternatively you can enter this line by hand.
B624
Page 18

27. Program now the following G code commands: N220 M6 N230 S4774 M3 N240 G95 FZ=0.1; Feed rate per tooth 28. Insert now a Pocket residual material cycle (CYCLE63) for residual material roughing of the pocket into the program. To do this, press the HSK 1.4 Cont. Mill to open the technology Contour milling. Press the VSK 5 Pocket res.mat. to open the input mask for the CYCLE63 Pocket residual material. Enter following values into the input mask. Use the Select key on the MCP where indicated.
Section 3
Notes:
Note: With the blue Select-key the machining depth Z1 can be set to inc or abs and the tool path step over DXY can be set to % of tool or a value in mm of the tool . Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N250 CYCLE63 ("POCKET_RESID_MAT",1001,100,0,1,20,0.1,,50, 2.5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,,,,,,"CUTTER_D16",1,,0,1101,11) 29. Insert another pocket milling cycle (CYCLE63) into the program for base finishing. Press the VSK 4 Pocket to open the input mask for the CYCLE63 Mill pocket. 30. Program now the following G code commands: N260 S5968
Page 19
B624
Section 3
Notes:

Enter following values into the input mask. Use the Select key on the MCP where indicated.
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N270 CYCLE63 ("POCKET_FINISH_BASE",1003,100,0,1,20,0.05,0 .1,50,5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,6,1.25,15,1,2,,,,0,101,111) 31. Insert another pocket milling cycle (CYCLE63) into the program for Wall finishing. Press the VSK 4 Pocket to open the input mask for the CYCLE63 Mill pocket. Enter following values into the input mask. Use the Select key on the MCP where indicated.
B624
Page 20

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line will be inserted into the program: N280 CYCLE63 ("POCKET_FINISH_WALL",1004,100,0,1,20,0.05,0 .1,50,5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,6,1.25,15,1,2,,,,0,101,111) 32. Program the following G code command to end the program: N290 M30 33. Now program the contour description for the Moulding plate outside, that you have called up in step 7 and in the program line N70 before. Press now the VSK 1 Contour. Press the VSK New contour to insert a new contour description for the machining operation. The window for the contour name input opens. Assign the following name for the new contour.
Section 3
Notes:
Confirm your input by pressing VSK 8 Accept. 34. The contour description window opens, where you can enter a starting point for the new contour.
Page 21
B624
Section 3
Notes:

Enter the starting point coordinates as follows:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description is being started and new functions to define the contour are available on the vertical softkey-bar on the right of the screen. 35. Start now the contour description with the first contour element Straight line Y. Press the VSK 1.3 Straight line Y. The input mask for the straight line in Y-direction opens. Enter the following coordinates:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The first contour element is to be created. 36. Extend the contour now, by adding a straight line in X-direction. Press the VSK 1.2 Straight line X. The input mask for the straight line in X-direction opens. Enter the following coordinates:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description is extended by a new element. 37. Finish the contour description by adding a straight line in Y-direction.
B624

Press the VSK 1.3 Straight line Y The input mask for the Straight line Y opens. Enter the following coordinates:
Section 3
Notes:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description will be finished. 38. Check now the outline of the programmed contour. For this, use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to place the orange selection cursor on the symbol on the left side of the screen. The following screen will be shown.
Page 23
B624
Section 3
Notes:

Finish now the contour description by pressing the VSK 8 Accept . The editor window opens and the following lines will be inserted into the program: N300 E_LAB_A_MOULDINGPLATE_OUTSIDE: ;#SM Z:2 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X-35 Y-100 ;*GP* G1 Y35 RND=15 ;*GP* X35 RND=15 ;*GP* Y-100 ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,3,3,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;* HD* ;S,EX:-35,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:35;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:15;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:35;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:15;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LD,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_MOULDINGPLATE_OUTSIDE:
39.
Now program the contour description for the Moulding plate pocket, that you have called up in step 22 and in the program line N180. Press now the VSK 1 Contour. Press the VSK New contour to insert a new contour description for the machining operation.
40.
The window for the contour name input opens. Assign the following name for the new contour.
Confirm your input by pressing VSK 8 Accept. 41. The contour description window opens, where you can enter a starting point for the new contour,
B624
Page 24
Section 3
Notes:
42.
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description is being started and new functions to define the contour are available on the vertical softkey-bar on the right of the screen. 43. Start now the contour description with the first contour element Straight line X. Press the VSK 1.2 Straight line X. The input mask for the straight line in X-direction opens. Enter the following coordinates:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The first contour element is being created. 44. Extend the contour now, by adding a straight line in Y-direction. Press the VSK 1.3 Straight line Y. The input mask for the straight line in Y-direction opens.
Page 25
B624
Section 3
Notes:

. Enter the following coordinates:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description is extended by a new element. 45. Extend the contour now, by adding a circle in clockwise direction. Press the VSK 1.5 Circle. The input mask for the circle opens. Enter the following coordinates:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept . The contour description is extended by a new element. 46. Extend the contour now, by adding a straight line in Y-direction. Press the VSK 1.3 Straight line Y. The input mask for the straight line in Y-direction opens.
B624
Page 26

Enter the following coordinates:
Section 3
Notes:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description is extended by a new element. 47. Finish the contour description by adding a straight line in X-direction. Press the VSK 1.2 Straight line X The input mask for the Straight line X opens. Enter the following coordinates:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description of the pocket will be finished. 48. Check now the outline of the programmed contour.
Page 27
B624
Section 3
Notes:

For this, use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to place the orange selection cursor on the symbol on the left side of the screen. The following screen will be shown.
Finish now the contour description by pressing the VSK 8 Accept . The editor window opens and the following lines will be inserted into the program: N310 E_LAB_A_MOULDINGPLATE_POCKET: ;#SM Z:5 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X0 Y-90 ;*GP* G1 X30 RND=5 ;*GP* Y-20 RND=5 ;*GP* G2 X-30 I=AC(0) J=AC(-.1) RND=5 ;*GP* G1 Y-90 RND=5 ;*GP* X0 ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,6,6,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;* HD* ;S,EX:0,EY:-90;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:-20;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:0/235,EX:-30,EY:20,RAD:36;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LD,EY:-90;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:0;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_MOULDINGPLATE_POCKET:
B624
Page 28

49. Now program the contour description for the Boundary, that you have called up in step 13 and in the program line N110. Press now the VSK 1 Contour. Press the VSK New contour to insert a new contour description for the machining operation. The window for the contour name input opens. Assign the following name for the new contour.
Section 3
Notes:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description is being started and new functions to define the contour are available on the vertical softkey-bar on the right of the screen. 51. Start now the contour description with the first contour element Straight line Y.
Page 29
B624
Section 3
Notes:

Press the VSK 1.3 Straight line Y. The input mask for the straight line in Y-direction opens. Enter the following coordinates:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The first contour element is being created. 52. Extend the contour now, by adding a Straight line in X-direction. Press the VSK 1.2 Straight line X. The input mask for the straight line X opens. Enter the following coordinates:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description is extended by a new element. 53. Extend the contour now, by adding a Straight line in Y-direction. Press the VSK 1.3 Straight line Y. The input mask for the straight line Y opens. Enter the following coordinates:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description is extended by a new element.
B624
Page 30

54. Finish the contour description by adding a straight line in X-direction. Press the VSK 1.2 Straight line X The input mask for the Straight line X opens. Enter the following coordinates:
Section 3
Notes:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description of the Boundary will be finished. 55. Check now the outline of the programmed contour. For this, use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to place the orange selection cursor on the symbol on the left side of the screen. The following screen will be shown.
Page 31
B624
Section 3
Notes:

Finish now the contour description by pressing the VSK 8 Accept . The editor window opens and the following lines will be inserted into the program: N320 E_LAB_A_BOUNDARY: ;#SM Z:2 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X-30 Y-100 ;*GP* G1 Y40 ;*GP* X30 ;*GP* Y-100 ;*GP* X-30 ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,5,5,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;* HD* ;S,EX:-30,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:40;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LD,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LL,EX:-30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_BOUNDARY: 56. Now program the contour description for the Moulding plate spigot, that you have called up in step 7 and in the program line N120. Press now the VSK 1 Contour. Press the VSK New contour to insert a new contour description for the machining operation. . The window for the contour name input opens. Assign the following name for the new contour:
B624
Page 32
Section 3
Notes:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description is being started and new functions to define the contour are available on the vertical softkey-bar on the right of the screen. 58. Start now the contour description with the first contour element a Circle in clockwise direction. Press the VSK 1.5 Circle. The input mask for the circle opens. Enter the following coordinates:
B624
Section 3
Notes:

59. Extend the contour now, by adding a Straight line in Y-direction. Press the VSK 1.3 Straight line Y. The input mask for the straight line in Y-direction opens. Enter the following coordinates:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description is extended by a new element. 60. Extend the contour now, by adding a circle in clockwise direction. Press the VSK 1.5 Circle. The input mask for the circle opens. Enter the following coordinates:
B624
Page 34

61. Extend the contour now, by adding a Straight line in Y-direction. Press the VSK 1.3 Straight line Y. The input mask for the straight line in Y-direction opens. Enter the following coordinates:
Section 3
Notes:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description is extended by a new element. 62. Finish the contour description by adding a circle in clockwise direction. Press the VSK 1.3 Circle The input mask for the Straight line X opens. Enter the following coordinates:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description of the Spigot is now finished. 63. Check now the outline of the programmed contour.
Page 35
B624
Section 3
Notes:

For this, use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to place the orange selection cursor on the symbol on the left side of the screen. The following screen will be shown.
Finish now the contour description by pressing the VSK 8 Accept . The editor window opens and the following lines will be inserted into the program: N330 E_LAB_A_MOLDINGPLATE_SPIGOT: ;#SM Z:5 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X0 Y-30 ;*GP* G2 X-20 Y-22.361 I=AC(0) J=AC(0) ;*GP* G1 Y22.361 ;*GP* G2 X20 I=AC(0) J=AC(0) ;*GP* G1 Y-22.361 ;*GP* G2 X0 Y-30 I=AC(0) J=AC(-0) ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,6,6,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;* HD* ;S,EX:0,EY:-30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:207/15,EX:20,CX:0,RAD:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:22.361;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:7/215,EX:20,CX:0,RAD:30;*GP*;*RO*;*H D* ;LD,EY:-22.361;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:0/35,EX:0,EY:30,RAD:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_MOLDINGPLATE_SPIGOT:
B624
Page 36

Program overview DIN_COUNTOURMILLING_2.MPF after completion of all inputs.
N10 G54 G17 G90 N20 WORKPIECE(,,,"BOX",64,0,-25,-80,-50,-100,100,150) N30 T="CUTTER_D32" N40 M6 N50 S1194 M3 N60 G95 FZ=0.15 N70 CYCLE62("MOULDINGPLATE_OUTSIDE",1,,) N80 CYCLE72("",100,0,1,15,5,0.3,0.3,0.15,0.1,1,41,1,5,0.1,11,5,0,1,2,101,1011,100) N90 S1942 N100 CYCLE72("",100,0,1,15,5,0.3,0.3,0.08,0.1,2,41,1,5,0.1,1,5,0,1,2,101,1011,100) N110 CYCLE62("BOUNDRY",1,,) N120 CYCLE62("MOLDINGPLATE_SPIGOT",1,,) N130 CYCLE63 ("SPIGOT_ROUGHING",1001,100,0,1,5,0.15,,50,2.5,0.3,0,0,0,0,,,,1,2,,,,0,201,111) N140 CYCLE63 ("SPIGOT_FINISH_WALL",1004,100,0,1,5,0.08,,50,2.5,0.3,0,0,0,0,,,,1,2,,,,0,201,111) N150 T="CUTTER_D16" N160 M6 N170 S2388 M3 N180 G95 FZ=0.15 N190 CYCLE62("MOULDINGPLATE_POCKET",1,,) N200 CYCLE63("POCKET_ROUGHING",1011,100,5,1,15,0.15,0.1,50,5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,6,1.25,15,1,2,,,,0,101,111) N210 T="CUTTER_D8" N220 M6 N230 S4766 M3 N240 G95 FZ=0.1 N250 CYCLE63 ("POCKET_RESID_MAT",1001,100,0,1,20,0.1,,50,2.5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,,,,,,"CUTTER_ D16",1,,0,1101,11) N260 S5968 N270 CYCLE63 ("POCKET_FINISH_BASE",1003,100,0,1,20,0.05,0.1,50,5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,6,1.25,15, 1,2,,,,0,101,111) N280 CYCLE63 ("POCKET_FINISH_WALL",1004,100,0,1,20,0.05,0.1,50,5,0.3,0.3,0,0,0,6,1.25,15, 1,2,,,,0,101,111) N290 M30 N300 E_LAB_A_MOULDINGPLATE_OUTSIDE: ;#SM Z:2 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X-35 Y-100 ;*GP* G1 Y35 RND=15 ;*GP* X35 RND=15 ;*GP* Y-100 ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,4,4,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;*HD ;S,EX:-35,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:35;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:15;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:35;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:15;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LD,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_MOULDINGPLATE_OUTSIDE:
Section 3
Notes:
B624
Section 3
Notes:
N310 E_LAB_A_MOULDINGPLATE_POCKET: ;#SM Z:5 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X0 Y-90 ;*GP* G1 X30 RND=5 ;*GP* Y-20 RND=5 ;*GP* G2 X-30 I=AC(0) J=AC(-.1) RND=5 ;*GP* G1 Y-90 RND=5 ;*GP* X0 ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,6,6,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;S,EX:0,EY:-90;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:-20;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:0/235,EX:-30,EY:-20,RAD:36;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LD,EY:-90;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;R,RROUND:5;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:0;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_MOULDINGPLATE_POCKET: N320 E_LAB_A_BOUNDARY: ;#SM Z:2 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X-30 Y-100 ;*GP* G1 Y40 ;*GP* X30 ;*GP* Y-100 ;*GP* X-30 ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,5,5,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;S,EX:-30,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:40;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LR,EX:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LD,EY:-100;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LL,EX:-30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_BOUNDARY: N330 E_LAB_A_MOLDINGPLATE_SPIGOT: ;#SM Z:5 ;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* G17 G90 DIAMOF;*GP* G0 X0 Y-30 ;*GP* G2 X-20 Y-22.361 I=AC(0) J=AC(0) ;*GP* G1 Y22.361 ;*GP* G2 X20 I=AC(0) J=AC(0) ;*GP* G1 Y-22.361 ;*GP* G2 X0 Y-30 I=AC(0) J=AC(-0) ;*GP* ;CON,0,0.0000,6,6,MST:0,0,AX:X,Y,I,J;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;S,EX:0,EY:-30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:207/15,EX:-20,CX:0,RAD:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LU,EY:22.361;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:7/215,EX:20,CX:0,RAD:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;LD,EY:-22.361;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;ACW,DIA:0/35,EX:0,EY:-30,RAD:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* ;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD* E_LAB_E_MOLDINGPLATE_SPIGOT:
B624
Page 38

64. Start the simulation of the program. Press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to open the simulation window. The control calculates the simulation and shows the simulation by default in the top view.
Section 3
Notes:
Press the VSK 1.4 3D view to run the simulation in a 3D view.
Page 39
B624
Section End
Notes:
B624
Page 40
B656
Measurement milling
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working through this module you become familiar with the technology Measurement milling by programming two G-code programs with the programGUIDE in ShopMill. Description of the module: This module shows the efficient measuring of the top side of a workpiece, as well as the measuring of the 4 edges of a rectangular workpiece
Content: Simple programming example Complex programming example

B656
B656
B656
Page 2
B656
Measure milling - programGUIDE: Description This module shows the efficient measuring of the top side of a workpiece, as well as the measuring of the 4 edges of a rectangular workpiece
Measure milling programGUIDE: START
Measure milling programGUIDE: END
Notes :
Page 3
B656
Section 2
Notes:

Description: A simple measuring movement on the top side of the work piece is to be programmed with the programGUIDE in ShopMill.
Aim: A new G code program is to be created and opened in the editor window. The G code lines and the measuring cycle are to be programmed and the program is to be simulated For this, the data shown below is to be used: Tool data: 3D-Probe (3D_PROBE)
2.1 Creating a new programGUIDE program A new programGUIDE program can be created from within all operating modes as follows: 1. Press the Program Manager-key on the keyboard. The program manager is opened directly. - OR 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. Press the yellow HSK 4 Program Manager. The program manager opens. 2. Select a drive, where you want to create the program (NC, Local drive, USB). Press the VSK 2 New. The vertical softkey bar for creating new programs opens. 4. Press the VSK 4 programGUIDE G code to open the input mask for creating a new G code program. Enter a name for the program in the Name field, e.g. DIN_MEASURING_1.MPF and accept with pressing the VSK 8 OK. The program is loaded to the editor.
3.
B656
Page 4

2.2 Programming example: Measuring a surface The following program, with a simple call up of a measuring cycle (CYCLE978), is to be programmed with the programGUIDE in ShopMill:
Section 2
Notes:
1.
Program the first line of the program: N100 G54 G17 G90
2.
Insert a blank for the simulation into the program. Press the HSK 1.6 Various to open the operating area Various. Press the VSK 1 Blank to open the parameter mask for the Blank input.
3.
Confirm your inputs with pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line is inserted into the program: N110 WORKPIECE(,,"","RECTANGLE",0,0,-50,80,70,70) 4. Insert now a measuring probe into the program. Press the HSK 1 Edit to open the operating area Edit. Press the VSK 1.1 Select tool. The tool list window opens.
B656
Section 2
Notes:

Place the orange selection cursor on the tool 3D_PROBE by using the blue cursor keys on the keyboard an press the VSK 1.8 OK. The program line N120 T="3D_PROBE" is inserted into the program. 5. Insert the following G code commands into the program: N130 M6 N140 G0 Z100 N150 G0 X0 Y0 N160 G0 Z10 6. Program now the measuring cycle (CYCLE978): Press the Extend-key on the operator panel in order to switch to the horizontal softkey bar 2. The horizontal softkey bar 2 opens. Press the HSK 2.6 Measurem. milling. The work area Measurement milling with extended measuring functions opens. Press the VSK 4 Workpiece measure. A vertical softkey bar with functions for measuring workpieces opens. Press the VSK 4 Plane. The input window for the cycle 1-pt. Meas./ CYCLE978 opens. 7. Insert the following values into the parameter mask:
Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 OK.
B656
Page 6

The following lines are inserted into the program:
_MVAR=100 _SETVAL=0 _PRNUM=1 _MA=3 _KNUM=1 _FA=5 _TSA=1 _VMS=0 _NMSP=1 _EVNUM=0 CYCLE978
Section 2
Notes:
11.
Program the program end with the following G code command: N170 M30
12.
At the end, simulate the machining of the workpiece. Switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1, by pressing the Extend-key on the operator panel.
Press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to start the simulation of the program. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in Top view.
To view the simulation in 3-D press the VSK 1.4 3D view.
Page 7
B656
Section 2
Notes:
B656
Page 8

Description: A more complex measurement movement on the top side and the 4 edges of the work piece is to be programmed with the programGUIDE in ShopMill. A new G code program is to be created and opened in the editor window. The G code lines and the milling cycle are to be programmed and the program is to be simulated For this, the data shown below are to be used: Tool data: 3D-Probe (3D_PROBE)
Section 3
Notes:
3.1 Programming example: Measuring edges The following program with the call up of two measuring cycles is to be programmed.
For this, create a new programGUIDE G code program, like described in section 2.1. Give the program the following name: DIN_MEASURING_2.MPF. 1. Program the first line of the program: N100 G54 G17 G90 2. Insert now a blank for the simulation into the program. Press the HSK 1.6 Various to open the operating area Various. Press the VSK 1 Blank to open the parameter window for the blank input.
B656
Section 3
Notes:

3. Insert the following values into the parameter mask:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following line is inserted into the program: N110 WORKPIECE(,,"","RECTANGLE",0,0,-50,80,70,70) 4. Insert now a measuring probe into the program. Press the HSK 1 Edit to open the operating area Edit. Press the VSK 1.1 To program. The tool list window in the operating area Parameter opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to select the tool 3D_PROBE. Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The program line N120 T="3D_PROBE" Is inserted into the program. Optionally you can program the tool by hand. 5. Program now the following G code commands: N130 M6 N140 G0 Z10 N150 G0 X0 Y0 6. Program now the measurement cycle (CYCLE978): Press the Extend-key on the operator panel in order to switch to the horizontal softkey bar 2. The horizontal softkey bar 2 opens. Press the VSK 2.6 Measurem. milling. The work area Measurement milling with extended measuring functions opens . Press the VSK 4 Workpiece measure. A vertical softkey bar with functions for measuring workpieces opens. Press the VSK 4 Plane. The input window for the cycle 1-pt. Meas./ CYCLE978 opens.
B656
Page 10

Section 3
Notes:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 OK. The following lines are inserted into the program: _MVAR=100 _SETVAL=0 _PRNUM=1 _MA=3 _KNUM=1 _FA=5 _TSA=1 _VMS=0 _NMSP=1 _EVNUM=0 CYCLE978 8. Program now the CYCLE977 to measure the edges of the workpiece. Press the VSK 4 Workpiece measure. The vertical softkey bar with different functions for measuring workpieces opens. Press the VSK 1.7 Extend to open the vertical softkey bar 2, with more functions for measuring workpieces Here, press the VSK 2.2 Rectangle The input window for the cycle Meas.rectang/ CYCLE977 opens.
Page 11
B656
Section 3
Notes:

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 OK. The following line is inserted into the program: _MVAR=106 _SETV[0]=100 _SETV[1]=100 _PRNUM=1 _KNUM=1 _FA=10 _TSA=1 _VMS=0 _NMSP=1 _ID=-20 CYCLE977 10. At last, program the end of the program with the following G code command: N160 M30 11. Simulate now the measuring of the workpiece. Switch back to the horizontal softkey bar 1, by pressing the Extend-key on the operator panel. Press the HSK 1.6 Simulation to start the simulation of the program. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in Top view. First, the top side of the workpiece is measured, then successively the edges.
B656
Page 12
Section 3
Notes:
To view the simulation in 3-D press the VSK 1.4 3D view.
Page 13
B656
Notes:
B656
Page 14
B600
Basics of programming with ShopMill
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working with this module you will learn the basics of creating ShopMill sequential programs. Description of the module: This module explains the general structure of a ShopMill program which includes the program header, the program block and the program ending. In addition to this, the programming of chained programming blocks (sequential programs), the functions of the Editor, as well as the functions Various, Simulation and NC Execute will be described. Content: Basics Creating ShopMill programs Editor Various Simulation NC Execute

B600
B600
B600
Page 2
B600
Basics of programming with Shopmill: Description
Basics of programming with Shopmill: START
This module explains the general structure of a ShopMill program which includes the program header, the program block and the program ending. In addition to this, the programming of chained programming blocks (sequential programs), the functions of the Editor, as well as the functions Various, Simulation and NC Execute will be described.
Basics
Creating ShopMill programs
Editor
Various
Simulation
NC Execute
Basics of programming with Shopmill: END
Notes :
Page 3
B600
Section 2
Notes:
Basics
2. 1 Programming with ShopMill ShopMill offers the option to create NC programs directly on the control in the manner of chained sequential block programs. It also offers the option to program G-code programs directly, with additional ShopMill functionality. Note: The creation of G code programs under ShopMill is described in detail in module - B604 Basics of programming programGUIDE. The advantage of programming a ShopMill program lies in the graphical guiding of the programming process in the editor. The following functions are available for this task: Technology oriented program step selection (technology/cycles) using softkeys Input masks and windows for parameters, with animated help graphics Context sensitive online help for every input mask and window Support for the contour input (geometric processor) ShopMill programs can be represented in different views: As a work plan, showing the program header, the programming steps with their linkages (chains) and the end of the program.
B600
Page 4
Basics
As a programming graphic in the graphic view (with activated VSK 3 Graphic view): The workpiece or machining step are shown as an outline graphic in side view or top view. The marked program block in the work plan is shown with a different colour.
Section 2
Notes:
As a parameter mask with a help graphic in 3-D, or a simulation of the machining step in side view or top view. If available, the view changes continuously from Help picture to animation.
The animated help graphics are displayed always in the correct position to the adjusted coordinate system. The parameters are dynamically overlayed into the graphic and are highlighted in a different colour.
Page 5
B600
Section 2
Notes:
Basics
2.2 The work plan Main aspect of programming with ShopMill is the Work plan in the editor window. The structure of the Work plan is as below: Program header (with the base settings of the program like measuring units, work offset, blank dimensions, retraction plane, safety distance etc.) Program blocks (the program steps with the cycles) End of program (see also picture below)
2.2.1 Program header The program header (also see section 2.2) contains the dimensions of the blank for the simulation, as well as the parameters that influence the whole program, as for example: Work offset Dimension units (mm/inch) Tool axis X, Y or Z Retraction plane, safety distance and machining sense In the work plan, the program header is at the beginning of the program and is labelled with the icon , and the signature Program header and the corresponding parameters (see picture below).
2.2.2 Program blocks Program blocks are programmed working steps, which are shown in the editor in single rows marked with an icon and text representing the corresponding technology and the entered parameters (alike the picture below).
2.2.3 Sequential program blocks For the functions Drill, Mill, and Contour milling, technology blocks and contours are programmed separately. These programming blocks are automatically linked by the control and connected in the work plan with square brackets. Technology blocks are blocks that describe in which manner the machining is to be processed, such as for instance centring and drilling. Position blocks or geometry blocks respectively, describe the positions where machining takes place, e.g. holes on a bolt hole pattern. A sequential program block (chain) is only considered closed, if one ore more Technology blocks, end with a Position block. A error massage will be output if one of these elements is missing.
B600
Page 6
Basics
The icons of these blocks are marked by a square bracket, right beside the Technology block icon, from the beginning of the program chain to the end of the program chain. Every technology is represented by a unique icon. This icon and its chaining are also displayed on the left edge of the screen in the programming graphics and parameter input masks. (here centering, drilling and position circle). 2.2.4 End of program The program end indicates to the control the end of the processing of the workpiece. Besides, you can define to repeat the program for multiple workpieces. The program end is marked with the icon and the text End of program and if selected with the text Repetition = Yes (see picture below).
Section 2
Notes:
2.2.5 G code programming steps In the work plan, G code program blocks can also be inserted. For this, you must place the cursor on the desired position in the editor window, where you want to insert the G code block. Pressing the yellow INSERT-key on the keyboard, opens a new orange command line, marked with the letter G and a blinking cursor where you can enter G code commands. With the blue cursor up or cursor down the block can be closed. The input value is now accepted. From a G code line you can not switch to a parameter mask window.
2.3 Navigation in the editor window For a fast and comfortable navigation within a sequential program and the parameter masks you can use the blue cursor keys. With the blue cursor-up key on the keyboard you can navigate upwards in the program editor and the parameter masks. With the blue cursor-down-key on the keyboard you can navigate downwards in the program editor and the parameter masks. The arrow symbol (extend-symbol) on the right side of program block line in the editor window indicates that you can enter the parameter input mask by pressing the cursor-to-the-right key. The cursor-to-the-right key opens the parameter mask of the corresponding program block. The cursor-to-the-left key closes the parameter mask of the corresponding program block and brings you back to the editor window, displaying the ShopMill program steps.
Page 7
B600
Section 3
Notes:

3.1 Creating a new ShopMill program A new ShopMill program can be created from the operating modes JOG, MDA and AUTO as follows: Press the Program Manager key on the keyboard. The window for creating and manage programs opens directly. See module B575 - Operating area Program Manager. - OR Press the MENU SELECT key on the operator panel (OP). Press the yellow HSK 4 Program Manager. The window for creating and managing programs opens.
- THEN Select a storage drive by pressing the horizontal softkey NC, Local drive or USB where you want to create the program. Move the orange cursor with the blue cursor-keys to the directory of your choice. For the navigation process refer to the modules B566 Operating elements or B575 - Operating area Program Manager. Press the VSK 2 New. The vertical softkey bar with functions for creating new programs opens. Press the VSK 3 ShopMill, to open the input mask for creating a new sequential ShopMill program, like displayed below.
B600
Page 8

3.2 Defining the program header After entering a name for the program and pressing the VSK 8 OK the mask for entering the parameters for the program header opens automatically. Here you can enter parameters for the measuring units, the work offset, blank shape, blank dimensions, retraction plane, safety distance, machining sense and the retract position patterns (see picture below).
Section 3
Notes:
Enter the appropriate parameter values and confirm with pressing the VSK 8 Accept or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel, to switch back to the editor window. The view changes to the work plan view in the editor window. Program header and program end are automatically programmed.
Page 9
B600
Section 3
Notes:

3.3 Creating program blocks Place the orange cursor on the program header block, or any other program block after which you want to insert a new program block. Select a technology you want to apply like Drilling, Milling, Contour milling, Straight Circle. For example select Milling -> Pocket -> Rectangular pocket to open the corresponding parameter window and help screen by means animation for this technology.
Enter the appropriate parameter values and confirm with pressing the VSK 8 Accept or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel, to switch back to the editor window. The new program block is inserted automatically into the editor window. The cursor-to-the-right key opens the parameter window anytime, to change the input parameters you have done before.
If necessary enter more program steps like described above.
B600
Page 10

3.4 End of program The program block End of program is already created automatically upon creation of a new program. if you want to make changes to the program end, you have to place the orange selection cursor with the blue arrow keys on the End of program block and extend the display by pressing the cursor-to-the-right key. The parameter input mask for END of program opens as displayed below. You can set here , if the program is to be repeated for multiple workpieces.
Section 3
Notes:
Select Yes if you want to repeat the workpiece and confirm with pressing the VSK 8 Accept or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel to switch back to the editor window. The new values entered are updated automatically .
Page 11
B600
Section 4
Notes:
Edit
With the editor you can create, supplement and change part programs. 4.1 Selecting the function Edit The function Editor can be opened from the operating mode JOG, MDA and AUTO. By pressing the PROGRAM-key on the keyboard the operating area Program opens, showing the last program you have worked on. - OR Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel (OP). Press the yellow HSK 3 Program to switch to the operating area Program. The operating area Program opens, showing the last program you have worked on (see picture below). If not selected, press the HSK 1 Edit. If no program was loaded after starting the control, the program manager window opens first, after pressing the HSK 3 Program. Here you can select either a existing ShopMillprogram or create a new one. See module - B574 Operating area Program und module - B576 Operating area Program Manager. The following softkeys with their corresponding functions are now available in the vertical softkey bar:
B600
Page 12
Edit
4.2 Vertical softkey bar 1 and 2 Display area Description In a ShopMill program the tool call is inside the cycle mask. The function Select tool is available for ShopMill programs under the technologies Drilling, Milling, Contour milling, Straight Circle or in a corresponding program block with tool utilization. This is the reason for VSK 1.1 Select tool being grayed out (inactive) as long their is no G code line inserted. (see section 2.2.5) By pressing the VSK 1.2 Graphic view you can see the simulated workpiece from a top view as an outline drawing (see section 2.1, picture programming graphic). By pressing the VSK 1.3 Search you can search for any text in the program blocks. A search window opens where you can enter a search string. You can continue searching afterwards (see section 4.3). By pressing the VSK 1.4 Mark you can mark one or several program blocks in order to copy or cut (delete) them. By pressing the VSK 1.5 Copy you can copy one or several program blocks to the internal memory of the control, to paste them to a different location in the active program or to another program. By pressing the VSK 1.6 Paste copied or cut program blocks can be inserted behind the selected program block (actual cursor position). You can paste the block to the active program as well as to another ShopMill program. By pressing the VSK 1.7 Cut you can cut out one or several program blocks, to paste them later somewhere in a program or to delete them. Cut out program blocks remain in the clip board and can be inserted again with the VSK 1.6 Paste (see VSK 1.6 Paste). By pressing the VSK 1.8 Extend the extended vertical softkey bar 2 will be displayed. By pressing the VSK 2.3 Renumbering you can assign new numbers for every program step in the Work plan window. (see section 4.4) By pressing the VSK 2.6 Settings you can change the settings for the editor (see section 5.3) By pressing the VSK 2.7 Exit you close the editor with the active program. By pressing the VSK 2.8 Back you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.
Section 4
Notes:
Page 13
B600
Section 4
Notes:
Edit
4.3 Search
With the function Search you can search for any text in a sequential program and even replace the text with other text. 4.3.1 Selecting the function Search By pressing the VSK1.3 Search the search window opens like displayed below, with the following functions available in the vertical softkey bar.
4.3.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1 Go to start the cursor will be positioned on the first line of the program. By pressing the VSK 2 Go to end the cursor will be positioned on the last line of the program. By pressing the VSK4 Search the search mask opens, where you can decide to search for complete words, select the search direction (forward/ backwards) and enter the search text. By pressing the VSK5 Find + replace the Search and replace mask opens where you can decide to search for complete words, select the search direction (forward/backwards), enter the search text and enter the text you want to use for the replacement. With pressing the VSK 7 Cancel you can abort the search process. By pressing the VSK 8 OK you start a search run with the above mentioned search criteria.
B600
Page 14
Edit
4.4 Renumbering
Section 4
Notes:
With the function Renumbering you can renumber the program steps in the editor window with an increment you can select here. 4.4.1 Selecting the function Renumbering By pressing the VSK 2.3 Renumbering the input mask for the renumbering settings of blocks opens.
4.4.2 Parameters for Renumbering Parameters First block number Meaning The first block number you want to start with. The values shown here by default can be adjusted under the function Settings in the input field First block number (see section 4.5). The Increment between the program blocks. The values shown here by default can be adjusted under the function Settings in the input field Increment (see section 4.5).
Increment
Page 15
B600
Section 4
Notes:
Edit
4.5 Settings
With the function Settings you can change the settings for the editor. 4.5.1 Selecting the function Settings By pressing the VSK2.6 Settings the input mask for the editor settings opens.
4.5.2 Parameters for Settings Parameters Number automatically (Yes/No) First block number Increment Show hidden lines (Yes/No) Meaning Program blocks will be numbered automatically. Deactivating this parameter, hides the following two parameters too. Block number of first block. Increment between block numbers. Show hidden line (with the ID ;*HD).
Display block end as A symbol is displayed at the end of each block. symbol (Yes/No) Move horizontally (Yes/No) Save automatically (only local and external drives) (Yes/No) Blocks are displayed in one line with a scroll bar at the right side. Changes are saved automatically without a query.
B600
Page 16
Various
5.1 Selecting the function Various The function Various can be selected from the operating mode JOG, MDA or AUTO in the operating area Program as follows: Press the HSK 1.6 Various to switch over to the function Various. A screen similar to the screen shown below opens.
Section 5
Notes:
The following functions with their corresponding softkeys are displayed in a vertical softkey bar: 5.2 Vertical softkey bar 1 and 2 Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1.1 Settings an input mask opens where you can change the settings for the blank (see section 5.3 Settings). By pressing the VSK 1.4 HighSpeed settings the input mask for adjusting the settings for the optimal speed in relation to the machining method opens (see section 5.4). By pressing the VSK 1.5 Transformations the vertical softkey bar with the functions for the coordinate transformations is displayed (see section 5.5). By pressing the VSK 1.6 Subprogram the input mask for loading a subprogram to the main program opens (see section 5.8). By pressing the VSK 1.8 Extend the vertical softkey bar 2 opens.
Page 17
B600
Section 5
Notes:
Various
Display area Description (Continuation) By pressing the VSK 2.3 Repeat program the vertical softkey bar with the function for repeating parts of programs opens (see section 5.7). By pressing the VSK 2.8 Back you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.
5.3 Settings Each parameter defined in the program header, except the measuring units, can be changed everywhere in the program. The settings in the program header are constant, as long as they are not altered later in the program. For example you can define a new blank in a sequential program later on, if during a simulation run there is the need to change the visible view on the workpiece. This can be reasonable within the functions Work offset Coordinate transformation Cylinder barrel transformation and Swivelling. With that you can program the above mentioned functions first, and then define the blank afterwards. The function Settings can be opened as follows: 5.3.1 Selecting the function Settings By pressing the VSK 1.1 Settings the following window for entering the parameters for the blank opens.
B600
Page 18
Various
5.3.2 Parameters for setting the blank Meaning 1 corner point X 1 corner point Y 2 corner point related to X0 (absolut or incremental) 2 corner point related to Y0 (absolut or incremental) Initial dimension Finishing dimension related to ZA (absolut or incremental) Help picture/animation
Section 5
Notes:
Parameter X0 Y0 X1 (abs/ink)
Y1 (abs/ink)
ZA ZI (abs/ink)
PL
Machining plane: G17 G18 G19
RP SC
Retraction plane Safety distance
Page 19
B600
Section 5
Notes:
Various
Parameter Machining sense Meaning Down-cut Help picture/animation (continuation)
Up-cut
Retraction position RP: pattern Liftmode before new infeed related to parameter RP
Optimized: Lift mode before anew infeed, optimized
B600
Page 20
Various
5.3.3 Changing the graphical view on the blank The graphic view on the blank is adjustable under the functions Edit, Drilling, Milling, Contour milling, Various and Straight Circle by pressing the softkey Graphic view. Within the function Various you can adjust the graphic settings with the Softkey Graphic view for the blank. Help pictures and animations are only displayed if the VSK 2 Graphic view is deselected and only in the side view. You can change the graphic view on the blank as follows: 1. In the operating area Program and operation mode JOG, MDA, or AUTO press the HSK 1.6 Various. By activating and deactivating the VSK 2 Graphic view you can switch the graphical representation of the blank, the help pictures and animations between 2 different views: 3D-/side view
Section 5
Notes:
2.
A wireframe model
Page 21
B600
Section 5
Notes:
Various
5.3.4 Changing the setting for the blank 1. In the operating area Program and operation mode JOG, MDA, or AUTO press the HSK 1.6 Various. Press the VSK 1 Settings. Optionally change the graphic view for the blank between 3D-/side view or wireframe model by pressing the VSK 2 Graphic view. Enter the parameter values for the blank (see parameter list in section 5.3.2). Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. A new program block Settings is inserted in the program (see the picture below).
2. 3.
4.
5.
5.4 High Speed Settings With the machining of free form surfaces, there are high demands on machining speed as well as accuracy and surface finish. The optimal speed profile in conjunction with the machining method (roughing, pre-finishing, finishing) can be adjusted easily with the function HighSpeed settings. It is advisable to program the cycle in the technology part first, before programming the geometry part. Machining methods: With the function HighSpeed settings you can select from 3 different technological machining methods: "roughing" "pre-finishing" "finishing" "deselect" (default setting) These four machining methods are associated directly with accuracy, velocity and surface quality of the contour path (see the triangle in the Help pictures). The operator/programmer can make an appropriate weighting by adjusting the tolerance value. Different tolerance values and technologies can be assigned to the four machining methods.
B600
Page 22
Various
5.4.1 Selecting the function HighSpeed settings By pressing the VSK 4 HighSpeed settings the High-speed Settings screen opens. The screen changes in intervals between Help picture and animation.
Section 5
Notes:
5.4.2 Parameter for HighSpeed settings Parameter PL Tolerance Machining: Roughing Help picture Animation
The parameter for the machining plane is optional and has to be activated by a machine datum. Tolerance values for the machining
Pre-finishing
Page 23
B600
Section 5
Notes:
Various
Parameter Finishing Help picture Animation (continuation)
Deselect
none
5.4.3 Changing the High-speed settings 1. In the operating area Program and operation mode JOG, MDA, or AUTO press the HSK 6 Various. Press the VSK 4 HighSpeed settings. Optionally change the graphic view for the blank between sectional drawing/3-D model or wireframe model by pressing the VSK 2 Graphic view. Enter the parameter values for Tolerance and Machining. Press the VSK 8 Accept to accept your inputs or abort by pressing the VSK 7 Cancel. A new program block High-speed settings is inserted into the program (see picture below).
2. 3.
4.
B600
Page 24
Various
5.5 Transformations To make programming easier, you can transform the coordinate system. Use this function, for example, to rotate the coordinate system. Coordinate transformations only apply in the current program. You can define displacement, rotation, scaling or mirroring. You can select between a new or an additive coordinate transformation. In the case of a new coordinate transformation, all previously defined coordinate transformations are deselected. An additive coordinate transformation acts in addition to the currently selected coordinate transformations. Supported are: Offset: For each axis, you can program an offset of the zero point. Rotation: You can rotate every axis through a specific angle. A positive angle corresponds to a counter-clockwise rotation. Scaling: You can specify a scale factor for the active machining plane as well as for the tool axis. The programmed coordinates are then multiplied by this factor. Note that the scaling always refers to the zero point of the workpiece. For example, if you increase the size of a pocket whose centre point does not coincide with the zero point, scaling will shift the centre of the pocket. Mirroring: Furthermore, you can mirror all axes. Enter the axis to be mirrored in each case. Note that with mirroring, the travel direction of the cutting tool (conventional/climb) is also mirrored.
Section 5
Notes:
Page 25
B600
Section 5
Notes:
Various
5.5.1 Selecting the function Transformations By pressing the VSK 5 Transformations the following vertical softkey bar in the editor window opens.
5.5.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1 Work offset the parameter window for the work offset opens (see section 5.5.3). By pressing the VSK 2 Offset the parameter window for the offset opens (see section 5.5.4). By pressing the VSK 3 Rotation the parameter window for the rotations opens (see section 5.5.5). By pressing the VSK 4 Scaling the parameter window for the scaling opens (see section 5.5.6). By pressing the VSK 5 Mirroring the parameter window for the mirroring opens (see section 5.5.7). The VSK 8 Back brings you back to the start screen of the function Various.
B600
Page 26
Various
5.5.3 Work offset You can call work offsets (G54, etc.) from any program. You can use these offsets, for example, when you want to machine workpieces with various blank dimensions using the same program. The offset will, in this case, adapt the workpiece zero to the new blank. 5.5.3.1 Selecting the function Work offset By pressing the VSK 1 Work offset the input mask work offset opens.
Section 5
Notes:
5.5.3.2 Parameters for the work offset Parameter Work offset. Basic ref. G54 G55 G56 G57 Meaning Alternative work offsets Basic Reference G500
Storable Zero offset Storable Zero offset Storable Zero offset Storable Zero offset
Page 27
B600
Section 5
Notes:
Various
5.5.3.3 Setting the work offset 1. In the operating area Program and operation mode JOG, MDA, or AUTO press the HSK 6 Various and the VSK5 Transformations. Press the VSK 1 Work offset. Optionally change the graphic view for the blank between sectional drawing/3-D model or wireframe model by pressing the VSK 2 Graphic view. Select the work offset (Basic reference, G54, G55, G56 or G57). Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your selection or press the VSK 7 Cancel to abort. A new program block Work offset is inserted into the program in the editor window (see picture below).
2. 3.
4.
5.5.4 Offset Offsets apply only to the current program. Besides, you can select between a new and an additive offset. With a new offset, all offsets defined before are deselected. An additive offset works additional to the current selected offset. For every axis an offset can be programmed.
5.5.4.1 Selecting the function Offset By pressing the VSK 2 Offset the input screen mask Offset opens.
B600
Page 28
Various
5.5.4.2 Parameters for the Offset Parameters Offset: New Adds a new offset Description Help picture/Animation
Section 5
Notes:
Additive
Adds an additive offset
Axes: X Y Z Offset X-axis Offset Y-axis Offset Z-axis
Unit mm mm mm
5.5.4.3 Setting the Offset 1. In the operating area Program and operation mode JOG, MDA, or AUTO press the HSK 6 Various and the VSK5 Transformations. Press the VSK 2 Offset. Optionally change the graphic view for the blank between sectional drawing/3-D model or wireframe model by pressing the VSK 2 Graphic view. Select the kind of offset new or additive. Enter the offset values for the different axes (X,Y,Z) in millimetre. Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your inputs or press the VSK 7 Cancel to abort. A new program block Offset is inserted into the program in the editor window (see picture below).
2. 3.
4.
Page 29
B600
Section 5
Notes:
Various
5.5.5 Rotation Rotations apply only to the current program. Besides, you can select between a new and an additive rotation. With a new rotation, all rotations defined before are deselected. An additive rotation works additional to the current selected rotation. For every axis an rotational angle in degrees can be programmed. A positive angle means a rotation counter clockwise. 5.5.5.1 Selecting the function Rotation By pressing the VSK 3 Rotation the input screen mask Rotation opens.
5.5.5.2 Parameters for Rotation Parameters Rotation: New Adds a new rotation Description Help picture/Animation
B600
Page 30
Various
Parameter Rotation: Additive Incremental rotation Description Help picture/Animation (continuation)
Section 5
Notes:
Axes: X Rotation around the X-axis Y Rotation around the Y- axis Z Rotation around the Z-axis 5.5.5.3 1. Setting the rotations
Units mm
mm
mm
In the operating area Program and operation mode JOG, MDA, or AUTO press the HSK 6 Various and the VSK5 Transformations. Press the VSK 3 Rotation. Optionally change the graphic view for the blank between sectional drawing/3-D model or wireframe model by pressing the VSK 2 Graphic view. Select if you want to add a new or a additive rotation. Enter the values for the rotation about the axes X, Y, und Z in degrees. Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your inputs or press the VSK 7 Cancel to abort. A new program block Rotation is inserted into the program in the editor window (see picture below).
2. 3.
4.
Page 31
B600
Section 5
Notes:
Various
5.5.6 Scaling Scaling applies only to the current program. Besides, you can select between a new and an additive scaling. With a new scaling, every scaling defined so far is deselected. An additive scaling works incremental to the current selected scaling. You can specify a scale factor for the active machining plane as well as for the tool axis. The programme coordinates are then multiplied by this factor. Note: Note that the scaling always refer to the zero point of the workpiece. For example, if you increase the size of a pocket whose centre point does not coincide with the zero point, scaling will shift the centre of the pocket. 5.5.6.1 Selecting the function Scaling By pressing the VSK 4 Scaling the input screen mask Scaling opens.
5.9.2 Parameters for Scaling Parameter Scaling: New Adds a new scaling Description Help picture/Animation
B600
Page 32
Various
Parameter Scaling: Additive Adds an additive scaling Description Help picture/Animation (continuation)
Section 5
Notes:
Axes: XY Z Scaling factor XY Scaling factor Z
5.5.6.3 Setting the scaling 1. In the operating area Program and operation mode JOG, MDA, or AUTO press the HSK 6 Various and the VSK5 Transformations. Press the VSK 4 Scaling. Optionally change the graphic view for the blank between sectional drawing/3-D model or wireframe model by pressing the VSK 2 Graphic view. Select whether the scaling new or additive. Insert the values for the scaling factor XY and Z. Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your inputs or press the VSK 7 Cancel to abort. A new program block Rotation is inserted into the program in the editor window (see picture below).
2. 3.
4.
Page 33
B600
Section 5
Notes:
Various
5.5.7 Mirroring Mirroring applies only to the current program. Besides, you can select between a new and an additive mirroring. With a new mirroring, all mirror images defined so far are deselected. An additive mirroring works additional to the current selected mirroring. Furthermore it is possible to mirror all axes. Activate the axis to be mirrored in each case. Note: Note that with mirroring, the travel direction of the cutting tool (down-cut/up -cut) is also mirrored. 5.5.7.1 Selecting the function Mirroring By pressing the VSK 5 Mirroring the input screen mask Mirroring opens.
5.5.7.2 Parameters for Mirroring Parameter Mirroring: New Adds a new mirroring Description Help picture/Animation
B600
Page 34
Various
Parameters Mirroring: Additive Adds an additive mirroring Description Help picture/animation (continuation)
Section 5
Notes:
Axes: X Y Z Mirroring for the Xaxis (on/off) Mirroring for the Yaxis (on/off) Mirroring for the Zaxis (on/off)
5.5.7.3 Mirroring the axes 1. In the operating area Program and operation mode JOG, MDA, or AUTO press the HSK 6 Various and the VSK5 Transformations. Press the VSK 5 Mirroring. Optionally change the graphic view for the blank between sectional drawing/3-D model or wireframe model by pressing the VSK 2 Graphic view. Select whether the Mirroring is new or additive. Switch on or off the axis that you want to have mirrored. Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your inputs or press the VSK 7 Cancel to abort. A new program block Mirroring is inserted into the program in the editor window (see picture below).
2. 3.
4.
Page 35
B600
Section 5
Notes:
Various
5.6 Subprogram If you require the same machining steps in the programming of different workpieces, you can define these machining steps in a separate subroutine. You can then call this subroutine in any program. Identical machining steps therefore only have to be programmed once. ShopMill does not differentiate between main program and subprogram. This means that you can call a "standard" sequential program or G code program as subprograms in another sequential program. In this subprogram, you can also call another subprogram. The maximum nesting depth is 8 subroutines. You cannot insert subroutines among blocks chained by the control. If you want to call a sequential control program as a subroutine, the program must already have been calculated once (load or simulate program in AUTO operating mode). This is not necessary for G code subroutines. The subroutine must always be stored in the NCK main memory (in a separate directory "XYZ" or in the "ShopMill", "Part programs", "Subprograms" directories). If you want to call a subprogram located on another drive, you can use G code command "EXTCALL". Note: Please note that, when a subprogram is called, ShopMill evaluates the settings in the program header of the subroutine. These settings also remain active even after the subprogram has ended. If you wish to activate the settings from the program header for the main program again, you can make the settings again in the main program after calling the subprogram. 5.6.1 Selecting the function Subprogram By pressing the VSK 3 Subprogram the input screen mask Subprogram opens.
B600
Page 36
Various
5.6.2 Inserting a subprogram 1. In the operating area Program and operation mode JOG, MDA, or AUTO press the HSK 6 Various Press the VSK 1.6 Subprogram. Optionally change the graphic view on the blank by pressing the VSK 2 Graphic view. Enter the path to the subprogram folder and the name of the subprogram in the input mask. Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your inputs or press the VSK 7 Cancel to abort. A new program block Execute is inserted into the program in the editor window (see picture below).
Section 5
Notes:
2. 3. 4.
5.7 Repeating program blocks If certain steps in the machining of a workpiece have to be executed more than once, it is only necessary to program these steps once. ShopMill offers a function for repeating program blocks. You must mark the program blocks that you want to repeat with a start and end marker. You can then call these program blocks up to 9999 times again within a program. The markers must be unique, i.e. they must have different names. No names used in the NCK can be used for this. You can also set markers and repeats after creating the program, but not within chained program blocks. Note: It is also possible to use the same marker as the end marker of the preceding program blocks and as the start marker for the following program blocks. 5.7.1 Selecting the function Repeat program By pressing the VSK 3 Repeat Program the following vertical softkey bar with the functions for repeating program parts opens. 5.7.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1 Set Mark the window for setting a start or end mark opens. By pressing the VSK 2 Repeat program an input mask opens where you can specify the start and end marker which enclose the program parts you want to repeat.
Page 37
B600
Section 5
Notes:
Various
5.7.3 1. Repeating a program block In the operating area Program and operation mode JOG, MDA, or AUTO press the HSK 6 Various Press the VSK 1.8 Extend to open the extended vertical softkey bar 2. Press the VSK 2.3 Repeat program. Place the orange selection cursor on the program block before the program block that you want to repeat. Press the VSK 1 Set Mark to open the input screen mask for input of the start mark. In the Set mark input window, enter a unique name for the start mark (see the following picture).
2.
3. 4.
5.
With pressing the VSK 8 Accept a new program block MARK1 is inserted into the work plan (see picture below).
6.
Place the orange selection cursor on that program block in the editor window that shall be the last block in the repetition sequence. Press the VSK 1 Set mark to open the input screen mask for input of the end mark. In the Set mark input window, enter a unique name for the end mark (see the following picture).
7.
With pressing the VSK 8 Accept A new program block MARK2 is inserted into the work plan (see picture below)..
B600
Page 38
Various
8. Place the orange selection cursor on that block, after that you want to repeat the program sequence. Press the VSK 2.3 Repeat program. In the input mask enter the name for the start mark and the end mark as well as the number of repetitions.
Section 5
Notes:
9.
Confirm your selection by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. A new program block Repetition MARK1 MARK2 is inserted into the work plan (see picture below).
10.
The program blocks between the marks will be repeated during machining of the program.
Page 39
B600
Section 6
Notes:
Simulation
ShopMill provides various extensive and detailed simulation functions for displaying the simulation of the machining. During simulation, the current program is calculated in its complete form and the result is displayed in graphic form. You can select the following modes of representation for simulation: Top view 3-D view Side view The simulation uses the correct proportions for the tools and workpiece contours. Cylindrical die-sinking cutters, bevel cutters, bevel cutters with corner rounding and tapered die-sinking cutters are displayed as end milling tools. The traverse paths for the tools are shown in colour: Red line = tool is moving at rapid traverse Green line = tool is moving at machining feedrate In all views, a clock is displayed during graphical processing. The displayed machining time (in hours/minutes/seconds) indicates the approximate time that would actually be required to execute the machining program on the machine (incl. tool change). If a program is interrupted during simultaneous recording, the clock stops. In addition, the current axis coordinates, the override, and the program block currently being executed are also displayed. The active tool with the cutting edge number and feedrate are also displayed in the simulation. Transformations are displayed differently during simulation and simultaneous recording: Coordinate transformations (translation, scaling, ) are displayed as programmed. Cylinder surface transformations are displayed as a developed surface. After swivel transformation, the previous machining operations are deleted from the display and only machining of the swivelled plane is displayed (viewing angle perpendicular to the swivelled plane). Zero offsets (G54, etc.) do not alter the zero in the graphical display. This means that, in the case of multiple clamping, the machining operations for each of the individual workpieces are plotted on top of one another. Note: If you want to display a different portion of the workpiece from the one defined in ShopMill, you can define a new blank in the program (see section 5.3 in this module).
B600
Page 40
Simulation
6.1 Selecting the function Simulation The function Simulation can be selected from the operating mode JOG, MDA and AUTO as follows: With a program loaded, press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to start a simulation run. The following screen opens. The simulation starts after a short computing time in the top view by default.
Section 6
Notes:
Press the VSK 1.4 3D view the simulated workpiece is displayed 3-dimesionally (see picture below).
The following functions will be available in the vertical softkey bar.

B600
Section 6
Notes:
Simulation
6.2 Vertical softkey bar 1 and 2 Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1.1 Stop the simulation will be halted. The softkey will be replaced with the VSK 1.1 Start, in order to continue the simulation again. By pressing the VSK 1.1 Start the simulation will be started or continued. The softkey will be replaced with the VSK Stop. By pressing the VSK 1.1 SBL the simulation will be processed block by block. This softkey replaces the softkey Start, if the VSK 4 Single block is activated under the function Program control. By pressing the VSK 1.2 Reset the simulation will be aborted, and can be started again by pressing the VSK 1.1 Start. The Top view is activated by default and shows the simulation in a plan view from above By pressing the VSK 1.4 3D view the simulation will be shown in a 3-D view By pressing the VSK 1.5 Further views the vertical softkey bar opens, with more options to adjust the view on the simulation process (see section 6.3). By pressing the VSK 1.6 Details the vertical softkey bar opens, where you can adjust the level of details that will be shown during the simulation (see section 6.4). By pressing the VSK 1.7 Program control the vertical softkey bar opens, with further functions to control the simulation run (see section 6.5). By pressing the VSK 1.8 Extend the vertical softkey bar 2 with the following functions will be displayed. By pressing the VSK 2.3 Show tool path the display of the simulated tool path can be switched on and off. By pressing the VSK 2.4 Delete tool path the animated tool path in the simulation window will be deleted. A new tool path is shown immediately after pressing this softkey or after running a new simulation (if the simulation is in Stop- or Reset- mode). By pressing the VSK 2.5 Blank you can change the dimensions of the simulated blank (see also section 5.3). This softkey is active if the simulation is in Reset mode. By pressing the VSK 2.8 Back you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.
B600
Page 42
Simulation
6.3 Further views With the function Further views you can change the graphical side-views on the blank, to view the simulation process in an optimal way. You can change the sides from which you want to see the simulation. 6.3.1 Selecting the function Further views By pressing the VSK 1.5 Further views the following window with side views on the blank opens.
Section 6
Notes:
6.3.1 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1 From front the simulated workpiece will be shown in a front view. By pressing the VSK 2 From rear the simulated workpiece will be shown in a rear view. By pressing the VSK 3 From left the simulated workpiece will be shown from the left side. By pressing the VSK 4 From right the simulated workpiece will be shown from the right side. By pressing the VSK 8 Back on the operator panel (OP) you switch back to the vertical softkey bar of the operating area Details.
Page 43
B600
Section 6
Notes:
Simulation
6.4 Details With the function Details you can zoom in, zoom out, rotate and cut out parts of the workpiece. 6.4.1 Selecting the function Details By pressing the VSK 1.6 Details the following functions are available in a vertical softkey bar.
6.4.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1 Autozoom the workpiece fills out the simulation window in an optimal way. By pressing the VSK 2 Zoom + you zoom in into the simulation window. Alternatively you can press the +-key on the number block of the keyboard. By pressing the VSK 3 Zoom - you can zoom out of the simulation window. Alternatively you can press the --key on the keyboard. By pressing the VSK 4 Zoom a frame opens in the simulation window, that lets you zoom in to the frame size. Press the VSK1 Zoom + to increase and the VSK 2 Zoom - to decrease the frame size. Alternatively you can change the frame size of the zoom area with the +or - key on the number pad of the keyboard. Move the frame with the blue cursor keys on the keyboard. Press the VSK 8 Accept to zoom to the selected extent or abort with pressing the VSK 7 Cancel.
B600
Page 44
Simulation
Display area Description (continuation) By pressing the VSK 5 Rotate view a vertical softkey bar opens to the right, with functions to rotate the workpiece in the simulation window (see section 6.4.2.1). By pressing the VSK 6 Cut the functions for cutting out parts of the workpiece are available in a vertical softkey bar (see section 6.4.2.3). By pressing the VSK 8 Back on the operator panel you switch back to the vertical softkey-bar 1.
Section 6
Notes:
6.4.2.1 Selecting the function Rotate view By pressing the VSK 5 Rotate view the following functions will be displayed in a vertical softkey bar.
6.4.2.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK Arrow right the workpiece will be turned right around the centre of the simulation window. By pressing the VSK Arrow left the workpiece will be turned left around the centre of the simulation window. By pressing the VSK 3 Arrow up the work piece will be turned up around the centre of the simulation window. By pressing the VSK 4 Arrow down the work piece will be turned down around the centre of the simulation window. By pressing the 5 Arrow turns left the workpiece will be rotated to the left, around the centre of the simulation window (counter clockwise). By pressing the 5 Arrow turns right the workpiece will be rotated to the right, around the centre of the simulation window (clockwise). By pressing the VSK 8 Back you switch back to the VSK-bar Details.
Page 45
B600
Section 6
Notes:
Simulation
6.4.2.3 Selecting the function Cut By pressing the VSK 1.7 Cut the functions for cutting out parts of the simulated workpiece will be shown in a vertical softkey bar. The cut surface areas are only displayed during simulation run.
6.4.2.4 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1 Cut active you can activate the cut surfaces on the workpiece and activate the greyed out axes softkeys in the vertical softkey bar. The function Cut stays active until the VSK Cut active is deactivated. By pressing the VSK 2 X+ the cutting plane is shifted on the X-axis to the positive (to the right). By pressing the VSK 3 X- the cutting plane is shifted on the X-axis to the negative (to the left). By pressing the VSK 4 Y+ the cutting plane is shifted on the y-axis (ordinate) to the positive (to the rear ). By pressing the VSK 5 Y- the cutting plane is shifted on the y-axis (ordinate) to the negative (forward). By pressing the VSK 6 Z+ the cutting plane will be shifted on the Z-axis (applicate) to the positive (up).
B600
Page 46
Simulation
Display area Description (continuation) By pressing the VSK 7 Z- the cutting plane will be shifted on the Z-axis (Ablikate) to the negative (downward). By pressing the VSK 8 Back you switch back to the operating area Details. 6.5 Program control With the function Program control the override can be adjusted for the simulation, the program can be executed in single blocks and alarm messages, that occurred during simulation, can be displayed. 6.5.1 Selecting the function Program control By pressing the VSK 1.7 Program control the following functions will be shown in a vertical softkey bar on the right side of the screen. 6.5.2 Vertical softkey bar Description By pressing the VSK 1 100% override the feedrate override is set to the maximum override of 100%. By pressing the VSK 2 Override + the override will be increased in 5% steps each time you press the softkey, until a maximum of 100% is reached. By pressing the VSK 3 Override - the override will be decreased in 5% steps each time you press the softkey until a minimum of 0% is reached. With a feedrate override of 0% the simulation is paused. By pressing the VSK 4 Single block the simulation will be executed block by block. With pressing this softkey the VSK 1.1 Start in the operating area Simulation will be exchanged with the VSK 1.1 SBL (see section 6.2). By pressing the VSK 7 Alarm the Simulation alarms window opens, with alarm messages that have occurred during a simulation run. This can be used for error detection. By pressing the VSK 8 Back you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.
Section 6
Notes:
Display area
Page 47
B600
Section 6
Notes:
Simulation
6.6 Selecting the function Alarm By pressing the VSK 7 Alarm the Simulation alarms window opens, with a list of all current active alarm messages that occurred during the simulation. For error messages and acknowledgement symbols see module - B576 Operating area Diagnostics, section 3.
6.6.2 Vertical softkey bar Display area Description By pressing the VSK 1 Acknowl. Alarm all with the Reset- or Cancel-symbol marked alarm messages can be deleted. This softkey is inactive as long as no appropriate error message is shown. By pressing the VSK 2 Simulation Power On you can trigger a warm restart for the active simulation.
Press the VSK 8 OK to confirm or the VSK 7 Cancel to abort the warm restart. With a warm start the simulation will be ended and started new. By pressing the VSK 8 Back you switch back to the operating area Program control.
B600
Page 48
NC Execute
7.1 NC Execute The function NC Execute lets you load the active program from the editor to the operating area Machine in the operating mode AUTO. 7.1.1 Selecting the function NC Execute By pressing the HSK 1.8 NC Execute the control, switches to the operating area Machine under the operating mode AUTO. The program modified in the editor is now ready for machining (see picture below). The Softkey is deactivated if the program is running.
Section 7
Notes:
Page 49
B600
Notes:
B600
Page 50
B608
Drilling
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working through this module you become familiar with the technology Drilling by programming two chained sequential ShopMill programs. Description of the module: This module explains the programming of a simple drilling example with ShopMill functionality, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of chained drilling cycles and position patterns. Content: Simple programming example Complex programming example

B608
B608
B608
Page 2
B608
Drilling - Shopmill: Description This module explains the programming of a simple drilling example with ShopMill functionality, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of chained drilling cycles and position patterns.
Drilling Shopmill: START
Drilling Shopmill: END
Notes :
Page 3
B608
Section 2
Notes:

Description: A simple drilling machining, using a drill cycle is to be programmed as a sequential program with ShopMill functionality. Aim: A new sequential ShopMill program is to be created and opened in the editor. The program header, as well as drilling cycle and position cycle (sequential chain program) are programmed. After this the program is to be simulated. For this, the below listed tool and technology data are to be used: Tool data: Approach strategy: Drill 8,5 mm (DRILL_D8.5) As a start position for the machining, the first programmed drill hole is to be used. This position is approached in rapid traverse.
2.1 Creating a new sequential program A new ShopMill program can be created from within the operating modes JOG, MDA and AUTO as follows: 1. Press the Program Manager-key on the keyboard. The program manager will be opened directly. - OR 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel and then the yellow HSK 4 Program Manager. The program manager opens. 2. 3. Select a drive, where you want to create the program (NC, Local drive, USB). Press the VSK 2 New. The vertical softkey bar for creating new programs opens. Press the VSK 3 ShopMill to open the input mask for creating a new ShopMill sequential program. Enter a name for the program in the Name field and accept with pressing the VSK 8 OK. The program is loaded to the editor and the parameter window for the program header is opened by default.
4.
B608
Page 4

2.2 Example: Drilling The following sequential program, with the call up of a simple drilling cycle, chained with a position pattern, is to be programmed.
Section 2
Notes:
1.
Create a new ShopMill program like described in the previous section 2.1 and give the program a name, for example SM_DRILL_1.MPF. The input window for the program header opens.
2.
Enter following values in the program header like displayed below, and confirm your inputs with by pressing the VSK 8 Accept.
The following program block Program header will be inserted into the program.
Page 5
B608
Section 2
Notes:

3. Program the drilling cycle. For this, press the HSK 1.2 Drill., to open the technology Drilling. Press the VSK 2 Drilling Reaming. Press the VSK 3 Drilling. The input mask for the drilling cycle opens. 4. Enter the following parameters like displayed below:
To insert a tool into the parameter window, press the VSK 1 Select tool, mark the desired tool (here DRILL_D8.5) in the tool list with the orange selection cursor and press the VSK 8 OK. The following program block Drilling will be inserted into the program.
5.
Insert now the position pattern for the drilling. Press the VSK 7 Positions. Select the VSK 4 Positions as a position pattern for the drilling. The input window for the position settings opens.
6.
Enter the following position values into the mask and confirm by pressing the VSK 8 Accept.
The program block Positions will be inserted into the program:
7.
Program the end of the program and simulate the machining. Place the orange selection cursor on the program block End of program and extend the program block by pressing the blue cursor-to-the-right-key on the keyboard.
B608
Page 6

8. The settings window for the program end opens, where you can define to repeat the workpiece.
Section 2
Notes:
Accept the default value by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. For starting the simulation, press the VSK 1.7 Simulation. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in Top view.
To view the simulation in 3-dimensional press the VSK 1.4 3D view.
Page 7
B608
Section 3
Notes:

Description: A more complex program (hole pattern) with chained program blocks is to be created in ShopMill. For this, different drilling cycles and a position pattern cycle will be called up and chained to a sequential program. Objective: The following workpiece is to be programmed and simulated. For this, the tool data and technology data shown below shall be used.
The following tool- and technology data are needed for the programming: Tool data: Center drill 12 mm (CENTERDRILL_D12) Drill 8,5 mm (DRILL_D8.5) Tap M10 (TAP_M10) As a start position for the machining, the first programmed drill hole is to be used. This position is approached in rapid traverse.
Approach strategy:
B608
Page 8

3.1 Example: Hole pattern The following program with call of the drilling cycles Centering, Drilling, Taping and a hole pattern is to be programmed.
Section 3
Notes:
Create a new ShopMill program, like described in section 2.1 in this module. Give the program a name, for example SM_DRILL_2.MPF. The program with the parameter mask for the program header opens automaticlly. 1. Program the Program header, by taking over the following values:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block Program header will be inserted into the program:
Page 9
B608
Section 3
Notes:

2. Program the center drilling cycle. Press the HSK 1.2 Drill.. Press the VSK 1 Centering. The parameter mask for the Centering opens. 3. Insert the following values for centering in the parameter input mask, like displayed below.
To insert a tool into the parameter window, press the VSK 1 Select tool. Mark the desired tool (CENTERDRILL_D12) in the tool list with the orange selection cursor and press the VSK 8 OK. Confirm the input with the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block Centering will be inserted into the program. The program chain starts (see bracket symbol). 4. Program the drill cycle. Press the VSK 2 Drilling Reaming. Select the VSK 3 Drilling to open the input mask for the drilling. 5. Fill out the input mask like displayed below:
To insert a tool into the parameter window, press the VSK 1 Select tool. Mark the desired tool (DRILL_D8.5) in the tool list with the orange selection cursor and press the VSK 8 OK. Confirm the input with the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block Drilling will be inserted into the program. The program chain will be extended.
B608
Page 10

6. Now program the tapping cycle. Press the VSK 5 Thread. The Tapping window opens. 7. Insert the following values into the input mask:
Section 3
Notes:
To insert a tool into the parameter window, press the VSK 1 Select tool. Mark the desired tool (here TAP_M10) in the tool list with the orange selection cursor and press the VSK 8 OK. Confirm the input with the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block Tapping will be inserted into the program. The chaining of the program blocks will be extended. 8. Program now the position pattern for the drilling, in order to close the program block chain. Press the VSK 7 Positions. The positions window opens. To set the positions for the drillings press the VSK 4 Positions. The drill position window opens. 9. Insert following values:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block Positions will be inserted: The program block chain will be closed.
Page 11
B608
Section 3
Notes:

10. Program the program end and simulate the machining. Place the orange selection cursor on the End of Program program block. Extend the program block by pressing the blue cursor-to-the-right-key on the keyboard. The input mask for the End of program opens. 11. The settings window for the program end opens, where you can define to repeat the workpiece.
Accept the default value by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. Press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to start the simulation of the program. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in Top view.
B608
Page 12

To view the simulation 3-dimesional press the VSK 1.4 3D View.
Section 3
Notes:
Page 13
B608
Notes:
B608
Page 14
B615
Milling
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working through this module you become familiar with the technology Milling by programming two chained sequential ShopMill programs. Description of the module: This module explains the programming of a simple milling machining with ShopMill functionality, as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of milling cycles and a position pattern. Content: Simple programming example Complex programming example

B615
B615
B615
Page 2
B615
Milling - Shopmill: Description This module explains the programming of a simple milling machining with ShopMill functionality, as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of milling cycles and a position pattern.
Milling Shopmill: START
Milling Shopmill: START END
Notes :
Page 3
B615
Section 2
Notes:

Description: A simple milling machining is to be programmed as a chained sequential program in ShopMill.
Objective: A new ShopMill program is to be created and opened in the editor. The program header, a milling cycle and a position pattern (program chain) are programmed. After this the program is to be simulated. For this, the tool and technology data below are to be used: Tool data: Technology data: Milling cutter 10mm (CUTTER_D10) F 0,15 mm/tooth, V120 m/min
2.1 Creating a new ShopMill program A new ShopMill program can be created from within the operating modes JOG, MDA and AUTO as follows: 1. Press the Program Manager-key on the keyboard. The program manager will be opened directly. - OR 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. Press the yellow HSK 4 Program Manager. The program manager opens. 2. Select a drive, where you want to create the program (NC, Local drive, USB). Press the VSK 2 New. The vertical softkey bar for creating new programs opens. Press the VSK 3 ShopMill to open the input mask for creating a new ShopMill sequential program. Enter a name for the program in the Name field and accept with pressing the VSK 8 OK. The program is loaded to the editor and the parameter window for the program header is opened by default.
3.
4.
B615
Page 4

2.2 Example: Rectangular pocket The following program with a chained milling cycle and position pattern is to be programmed.
Section 2
Notes:
1.
Create a new ShopMill program like described in the previous section 2.1 and give the program a name, for example SM_MILLING_1.MPF. The input window for the program header opens automatically.
2.
In the parameter mask for the program header enter the following values.
Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block is inserted into the program:
Page 5
B615
Section 2
Notes:

2. Program now the rectangular pocket. For this, press the HSK 1.3 Milling to open the technology Milling. Press the VSK 2 Pocket. Press the VSK 3 Rectang. pocket. The parameter mask for the rectangular pocket cycle opens. 3. In the parameter mask for the rectangular pocket enter the following values:
To insert a tool into the parameter window, press the VSK 1 Select tool, mark the desired tool (here CUTTER_D10) in the tool list, with the orange selection cursor and press the VSK 8 OK Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The program block Rectangular pocket will be inserted into the program. The program chain opens. 4. Insert now a position pattern for the milling cycle. Press the HSK 1.2 Drill.. Press the VSK 7 Positions. Select the VSK 4 Positions as a position pattern for the milling. The input window for the position settings opens.
B615
Page 6

5. In the parameter mask for the Position pattern, enter the following values and confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept.
Section 2
Notes:
The program block Row of positions is inserted into the work plan. The program chain closes. 6. Program now the end of the program and simulate the machining. For this, place the orange selection cursor on the program block End of program using the blue cursor keys and switch over to the parameter window by pressing the blue cursor-to-the-right key on the keyboard. 7. The settings window for the program end opens, where you can define to repeat the workpiece.
Accept the default value and press the VSK 8 Accept. In order to start the simulation, press the HSK 1.7 Simulation. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in Top view.
Page 7
B615
Section 2
Notes:
B615
Page 8

Description: A more complex program (a slanted rectangular pocket) with chained program blocks is to be created in ShopMill.
Section 3
Notes:
Objective: The workpiece shown below is to be programmed and simulated. For this, the tool and technology data below are to be used:
The following tool- and technology data are needed for the programming: Tool data: Technology data: Milling tool 10 mm (CUTTER_D10) F 0,15 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) and F 0,08 mm/tooth, V 150 m/min (finishing) The pocket is to be roughed first and finished afterwards.
Page 9
B615
Section 3
Notes:

3.1 Example: Slanted rectangular pocket The following program, with the call up of rectangular pocket cycles and a position pattern, is to be programmed.
Create a new ShopMill program first, like described in Section 2.1 in this module. Name the program, e. g. SM_MILLING_2.MPF. The new ShopMill program, with the parameter window for the program header opens. 1. Program the program header like displayed below:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block will be inserted into the program.
B615
Page 10

2. Rough the rectangular pocket. Press the HSK 1.3 Mill. to open the technology Milling. Press the VSK 2 Pocket. Press the VSK 3 Recttang. pocket. The input mask for the rectangular pocket cycle opens. 3. Insert the following values and confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept.
Section 3
Notes:
: To insert a tool into the program, press the VSK 1 Select tool, in the opening tool list, select the tool CUTTER_D10 with the orange selection cursor and press the VSK 8 OK. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The program block Rectang. Pocket is inserted into the program: The program chain starts (see chain symbol). 4. After this finish the rectangular pocket. Press the VSK 2 Pocket. Press the VSK 3 Rectang. pocket. The parameter mask for the rectangular pocket cycle opens.
Page 11
B615
Section 3
Notes:

5. Insert the following values into the parameter mask and confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept:
To insert a tool into the program, press the VSK 1 Select tool, in the opening tool list, select the tool CUTTER_D10 with the orange selection cursor and press the VSK 8 OK. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The program block Rectang. Pocket is inserted into the program: The program chain is extended (see chain symbol). 6. Insert now a position pattern for the rectangular pocket. Press the HSK 1.2 Drill.. Press the VSK 7 Positions. The window for setting a position patterns for the rectangular pocket opens. Press the VSK 4 Position pattern to open the position pattern input mask for the pocket positions.
B615
Page 12

7. Enter the following values into the parameter window:
Section 3
Notes:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The program block Row of positions is inserted into the program: The program chain closes. 8. Program now the program end and simulate the machining. Place the orange selection cursor on the program block Program end and open the parameter list by pressing the blue cursor-to-the-right-key on the keyboard. The input mask for the End of program settings opens. 9. Here you can define to repeat the program for multiple workpieces.
Take over the default value and press the VSK 8 Accept. Press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to start the simulation of the program run. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in Top view.
Page 13
B615
Section 3
Notes:
To view the simulation 3-dimensional, press the VSK 1.4 3D view.
B615
Page 14
B623
Contour milling
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working with this module you become familiar with the technology Contour milling by programming two chained sequential ShopMill programs Description of the module: This module explains the programming of a simple and a more complex contour in ShopMill, with the technology contour milling and with help of the contour editor. Content: Simple programming example Complex programming example

B623
B623
B623
Page 2
B623
Contour milling - Shopmill: Description This module explains the programming of a simple and a more complex contour in ShopMill, with the technology contour milling and with help of the contour editor.
Contour milling Shopmill: START
Contour milling Shopmill: END
Notes :
Page 3
B623
Section 2
Notes:

Description: A simple contour milling operation is to be programmed as a chained sequential program in ShopMill. Objective: A new ShopMill program is to be created and opened in the editor. The program header, a contour description and a contour milling cycle (as chain program) are to be programmed. Afterwards, the program is to be simulated. For this, the tool and technology data below are to be used: Tool data: Technology data: Milling cutter 32 mm (CUTTER_D32) F 0,3 mm/tooth, V120m/min
2.1 Creating a new ShopMill program

A new ShopMill program can be created from within the operating modes JOG, MDA and AUTO as follows: 1. Press the Program Manager-key on the keyboard. The program manager will be opened directly. - OR 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. Press the yellow HSK 4 Program Manager. The program manager opens.
2.
Select a drive, where you want to create the program (NC, Local drive, USB). Press the VSK 2 New. The vertical softkey bar for creating new programs opens. Press the VSK 3 ShopMill to open the input mask for creating a new ShopMill sequential program. Enter a name for the program in the Name field and accept with pressing the VSK 8 OK. The program is loaded to the editor and the parameter window for the program header is opened by default.
3.
4.
B623
Page 4
Simple programming example 2.2 Programming example: Straight line

The following ShopMill program with a contour description and a contour milling cycle, chained together, is to be programmed.
Section 2
Notes:
1.
Create a new ShopMill sequential program like described in the previous section 2.1 and give the program for example the name SM_CONTOURMILLING_1.MPF. The input window for the program header opens automatically.
2.
Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue Select-key on the MCP where indicated.
Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept.

B623
Section 2
Notes:

The following program block is inserted into the program:
3.
Start with the programming of a contour path for the contour milling machining. For this, press the HSK 1.4 Cont. mill. to open the technology Contour milling. Press the VSK 1 New contour. A parameter mask where you can insert a new name for the new contour opens.
4.
Enter a name for the new contour, e.g. PATH,
Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour editor opens automatically and the parameter mask for entering a start point for the contour is active by default. 5. Insert the following coordinates for the starting point:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description begins and new functions for defining a contour are available as yellow vertical softkeys on the right side of the screen. 6. Extend the contour path by adding a straight line in Y-direction. Press the VSK 3 Straight line Y. The parameter mask where you can define a straight line in Y direction opens. Enter following coordinates into the parameter mask:
B623
Page 6

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour path will be extended with a straight line in Y-direction. Note: In the input field Y you can switch between inc and abs by pressing the blue SELECT-key on the keyboard. 7. Now, check the programmed contour. For this, place the orange selection cursor on the -symbol in the yellow column on the left side of the screen, by using the blue cursor keys on the keyboard. The contour path is displayed graphically.
Section 2
Notes:
Note: In the white column on the left side of the screen you see all the program blocks programmed so far as symbols (representing the technology) and in the yellow column you see the symbols of all the programmed contour elements. 8. Finish now the contour description by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The program editor opens and the following program block is inserted into the program: The program chain opens.
Page 7
B623
Section 2
Notes:

9. Program now the contour milling cycle. Press the HSK 1.4 Cont. Mill. to open the technology Contour milling. Press the VSK 1.2 Path milling to select the function Path milling. The parameter mask for the path milling cycle opens. 10. Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue Select key on the MCP where indicated.
Note: In the input field F you can switch between mm/tooth or mm/min . The input field for Speed can either be V in m/min or S in rev/min by pressing the blue SELECT-key on the keyboard. To insert a tool into the cycle input mask, press the VSK 1 Select tool. The Tool list window opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard, to mark the tool CUTTER_D32, with the orange selection cursor. Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The tool CUTTER_D32" will be inserted into the cycle input mask. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block will be inserted into the program. The program chain closes. 11. End the programming by placing the orange selection cursor on the program block End of program and switch to the parameter mask by pressing the blue cursor-to-the-right-key on the keyboard.
B623
Page 8

The setting window for the program end opens, where you can define to repeat the program for multiple workpieces.
Section 2
Notes:
Accept the default value No and press the VSK 8 Accept. 12. Simulate now the program to verify tool path. Press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to start the simulation. The control calculates the simulation and opens the simulation window in a Top view on the workpiece.
To view the simulation 3-dimensional, press the VSK 1.4 3D view.
Page 9
B623
Section 3
Notes:

Description: A more complex program (moulding plate) with chained program blocks is to be created in ShopMill with the technology Contour milling. Objectives: Following workpiece is to be programmed and simulated.
5
A-A
20
100
40 R15
50 35
20
A
R36
150
90
R30
A
R5
60
70
The following Tool & technology data are needed in the program: Tool & technology data:
Milling cutter 32 mm (CUTTER_D32) F 0,30 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) F 0,15 mm/tooth, V 150 m/min (finishing) Milling cutter 16 mm (CUTTER_D16) F 0,15 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) Milling cutter 8.0 mm (CUTTER_D8) F 0,10 mm/tooth, V 120 m/min (roughing) F 0,05 mm/tooth, V 150m/min (finishing) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Page 10
Operations list:
Outer contour roughing + finishing Spigot contour roughing + finishing Contour pocket roughing Contour pocket rest material roughing Contour pocket wall + base finishing
B623
Complex programming example 3.1 Programming example: Moulding plate

The following program is to be programmed with the technology Contour milling.
Section 3
Notes:
1.
Create a new ShopMill program like described in section 2.1 in this module with the name SM_CONTOURMILLING_2.MPF. The program with the parameter mask for the program header opens automatically.
2.
Insert following values for the program header. Use the Select key on the MCP where indicated.
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block is inserted into the program:
Page 11
B623
Section 3
Notes:

3. Start programming the contour description for the Moulding plate outside with help of the contour editor. Press the HSK 1.4 Cont. mill., to open the technology Contour milling. Press the VSK 1 New contour. A parameter mask where you can enter a name for the new contour opens. 4. Enter a name for the new contour, e.g. MOULDINGPLATE_OUTSIDE,
Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour editor opens automatically and the parameter mask for entering a start point for the contour is active by default.
5.
Enter the following coordinates for the starting point:
Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description starts and new functions for defining a contour are available as yellow vertical softkeys on the right side of the screen. 6. Extend the contour description by adding a straight line in Y-direction. Press the VSK 3 Straight line Y. The input window for the Straight line Y opens.
B623
Page 12

Enter following values into the parameter mask:
Section 3
Notes:
Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. A straight line in Y-direction is added to your contour description. 7. Extend the contour description by adding a straight line in X-direction. Press the VSK 2 Straight line X. The input window for the Straight line X opens. Enter the following values into the parameter mask:
Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. A straight line in X-direction is added to your contour description. 8. Now finish the programming of the contour path by adding a straight line in Y-direction. Press the VSK 3 Straight line Y. The input window for the straight line in Y-direction opens. Enter the following values into the parameter mask:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description is finished.
B623
Section 3
Notes:

9. Now, check the outline of the contour path. For this, place the orange selection cursor on the -symbol in the yellow column on the left side of the screen, by using the blue cursor keys on the keyboard. The contour is displayed graphically.
Note: The white column on the left side of the help screen shows all the program blocks programmed as symbols (representing the technology). The yellow column next to it shows all the programmed contour elements as symbols. 10. Finish now the programming of the contour by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The program editor opens and the following program block is inserted into the program: The program chain opens.
B623
Page 14

11. Insert now a path milling cycle into the program for roughing the moulding plate. Press the HSK 1.4 Cont. mill. to open the technology Contour milling. Press the VSK 1.2 Path milling. The input window for the path milling cycle opens. 12. Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue Select key on the MCP where indicated.
Section 3
Notes:
Note: In the input field F you can switch between mm/tooth or mm/min . The input field for Speed can either be set to cutting speed V in m/min or Spindle speed S in rpm. The machining depth Z1 can be inc or abs. To insert a tool into the cycle input mask, press the VSK 1 Select tool. The Tool list window opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard, to mark the tool CUTTER_D32, with the orange selection cursor. Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The tool CUTTER_D32" will be inserted into the cycle input mask. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block will be added to the program chain. The program chain closes.
Page 15
B623
Section 3
Notes:

13. Extend now the program chain by inserting another path milling cycle for finishing the outside. Press the VSK 1.2 Path milling. The input window for the path milling cycle opens. 14. Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue Select key on the MCP where indicated.
Note: In the input field F you can switch between mm/tooth or mm/min . The input field for Speed can either be set to cutting speed V in m/min or Spindle speed S in rpm. The machining depth Z1 can be inc or abs. To insert a tool into the cycle input mask, press the VSK 1 Select tool. The Tool list window opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard, to mark the tool CUTTER_D32, with the orange selection cursor. Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The tool CUTTER_D32" will be inserted into the cycle input mask. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block will be added to the program chain. The program chain is now complete and closed.
B623
Page 16

15. Start programming the contour description for the Spigot boundary with help of the contour editor. Press the VSK 1 New contour. A parameter mask where you can enter a name for the new contour opens. 16. Enter a name for the new contour, e.g. SPIGOT_BOUNDARY.
Section 3
Notes:
17.
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description starts and new functions for defining a contour are available as yellow vertical softkeys on the right side of the screen. 18. Enter the first contour element by adding a straight line in Y-direction. Press the VSK 3 Straight line Y. The input window for the Straight line Y opens.
Page 17
B623
Section 3
Notes:

Enter following coordinates into the parameter mask:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. A straight line in Y-direction is added to your contour description. 19. Extend the contour description by adding a straight line in X-direction. Press the VSK 2 Straight line X. The input window for the Straight line X opens. Enter following coordinates into the parameter mask:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. A straight line in X-direction is added to your contour description. 20. Extend the contour description by adding a straight line in Y-direction. Press the VSK 3 Straight line Y. The input window for the straight line in Y-direction opens. Enter following coordinates into the parameter mask:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. A straight line in Y-direction is added to your contour description. 21. Now finish the contour description by adding a straight line in X-direction. Press the VSK 2 Straight line X. The input window for the straight line in Y-direction opens.
B623
Page 18

Section 3
Notes:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description of the Spigot Boundary is finished. 22. Now, check the outline of the contour path. For this, place the orange selection cursor on the -symbol in the yellow column on the left side of the screen, by using the blue cursor keys on the keyboard. The contour is displayed graphically.
Note: The white column on the left side of the help screen shows all the program blocks programmed as symbols (representing the technology). The yellow column next to it shows all the programmed contour elements as symbols. 23. Finish now the contour description by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The program editor opens again and the following program block is inserted into the program:
The program chain opens.

B623
Section 3
Notes:

24. Start programming the contour description for the Spigot with help of the contour editor. Press the VSK 1 New contour. A parameter mask where you can enter a name for the new contour opens. 25. Enter a name for the new contour, e.g. SPIGOT,
26.
Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your updates. The contour description starts and new functions for defining a contour are available as yellow vertical softkeys on the right side of the screen. 27. Start the contour description with a circle in clockwise direction. Press the VSK 1.5 Circle. The input window for the Circle opens.
B623
Page 20

Section 3
Notes:
Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. A circle in clockwise direction is added to your contour description. 28. Extend the contour description by adding a straight line in Y-direction. Press the VSK 3 Straight line Y. The input window for the Straight line Y opens. Enter following coordinates into the parameter mask:
Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. A straight line in Y-direction is added to your contour description. 29. Extend the contour description by adding a circle in clockwise direction. Press the VSK 5 Circle. The input window for the Circle opens.
Page 21
B623
Section 3
Notes:

Confirm the VSK 8 Accept. A circle in clockwise direction is added to your contour description. 30. Extend the contour description by adding a straight line in Y-direction. Press the VSK 1.3 Straight line Y. The input window for the Straight line Y opens. Enter following coordinates into the parameter mask:
Confirm the VSK 8 Accept. A straight line in Y-direction is added to your contour description. 31. Now finish the contour description by adding a circle in clockwise direction. Press the VSK 5 Circle. The input window for the circle opens.
B623
Page 22

Section 3
Notes:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description of the Spigot is finished. 32. Now, check the outline of the contour path. For this, place the orange selection cursor on the -symbol in the yellow column on the left side of the screen, by using the blue cursor keys on the keyboard. The contour is displayed graphically.
33.
Finish now the programming of the contour by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The program editor opens and the following program block is inserted into the program:
The program chain remains open.

B623
Section 3
Notes:

34. Insert now a spigot milling cycle into the program for roughing the spigot contour within the defined boundary area. Press the VSK 1.6 Spigot. The input window for the spigot milling cycle opens. 35. Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue Select key on the MCP where indicated. .
Note: In the input field F you can switch between mm/tooth or mm/min . The input field for Speed can either be set to cutting speed V in m/min or Spindle speed S in rpm. The machining depth Z1 can be inc or abs. The tool path step over DXY can be set to % of tool or a value in mm of the tool . To insert a tool into the cycle input mask, press the VSK 1 Select tool. The Tool list window opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard, to mark the tool CUTTER_D32, with the orange selection cursor. Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The tool CUTTER_D32" will be inserted into the cycle input mask. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block will be added to the program chain. The program chain closes.
B623
Page 24

36. Extend the program chain by inserting another spigot milling cycle into the program for finishing the spigot Wall. Press the VSK 1.6 Spigot. The input window for the spigot milling cycle opens. 37. Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue Select key on the MCP where indicated. .
Section 3
Notes:
Note: In the input field F you can switch between mm/tooth or mm/min . The input field for Speed can either be set to cutting speed V in m/min or Spindle speed S in rpm. The machining depth Z1 can be inc or abs. To insert a tool into the cycle input mask, press the VSK 1 Select tool. The Tool list window opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard, to mark the tool CUTTER_D32, with the orange selection cursor. Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The tool CUTTER_D32" will be inserted into the cycle input mask. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block will be added to the program chain.
The program chain is now complete and closed.
Page 25
B623
Section 3
Notes:

38. Start programming the contour description for the Moulding plate pocket with help of the contour editor. Press the VSK 1 New contour. A parameter mask where you can enter a name for the new contour opens. Enter a name for the new contour, e.g. MOULDINGPLATE_POCKET.
39.
Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your inputs. The contour description starts and new functions for defining a contour are available as yellow vertical softkeys on the right side of the screen.
B623
Page 26

40. Begin the contour description by adding a straight line in X-direction. Press the VSK 1.2 Straight line X. The input window for the Straight line X opens. Insert the following values into the parameter mask.
Section 3
Notes:
Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your inputs. The first Kontur element is generated and a straight line in X-direction is added to your contour description. 41. Extend the contour description by adding a straight line in Y-direction. Press the VSK 3 Straight line Y. The input window for the Straight line X opens. Insert the following values into the parameter mask.
Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your inputs. A straight line in Y-direction is added to your contour description. 42. Extend the contour description by adding a circle in clockwise direction. Press the VSK 5 Circle. The input window for the Circle opens.
Page 27
B623
Section 3
Notes:

Confirm the VSK 8 Accept. A circle in clockwise direction is added to your contour description. 43. Extend the contour description by adding a straight line in Y-direction. Press the VSK 3 Straight line Y. The input window for the Straight line Y opens. Insert the following values into the parameter mask.
Confirm the VSK 8 Accept. A straight line in Y-direction is added to your contour description. 44. Now finish the programming of the contour path by adding a straight line in X-direction. Press the VSK 2 Straight line X. The input window for the straight line Y opens. Enter following coordinates into the parameter mask:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The contour description is now closed by a straight line in Y-direction and therefore finished.
B623
Page 28

45. Now, check the outline of the contour path. For this, place the orange selection cursor on the -symbol in the yellow column on the left side of the screen, by using the blue cursor keys on the keyboard. The contour is displayed graphically.
Section 3
Notes:
Note: The white column on the left side of the help screen shows all the program blocks programmed as symbols (representing the technology). The yellow column next to it shows all the programmed contour elements as symbols. 46. Finish now the programming of the contour by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The program editor opens and the following program block is inserted into the program:
The program chain opens.
Page 29
B623
Section 3
Notes:

47. Insert now a pocket milling cycle into the program for roughing the moulding plate pocket. Press the VSK 1.4 Pocket. The input window for the pocket milling cycle opens. 48. Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue Select key on the MCP where indicated.
Note: In the input field F you can switch between mm/tooth or mm/min . The input field for Speed can either be set to cutting speed V in m/min or Spindle speed S in rpm. The machining depth Z1 can be inc or abs. The tool path step over DXY can be set to % of tool or a value in mm . To insert a tool into the cycle input mask, press the VSK 1 Select tool. The Tool list window opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard, to mark the tool CUTTER_D16, with the orange selection cursor. Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The tool CUTTER_D16" will be inserted into the cycle input mask. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block will be added to the program chain. The program chain closes.
B623
Page 30

49. Extend the program chain by inserting a Pocket residual material cycle for roughing of the residual material of the moulding plate pocket. Press the VSK 1.5 Pocket resid. mat.. The input window for the pocket residual material cycle opens. 50. Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue Select key on the MCP where indicated. .
Section 3
Notes:
Note: In the input field F you can switch between mm/tooth or mm/min . The input field for Speed can either be set to cutting speed V in m/min or Spindle speed S in rpm. The tool path step over DXY can be set to % of tool or a value in mm . To insert a tool into the cycle input mask, press the VSK 1 Select tool. The Tool list window opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard, to mark the tool CUTTER_D8, with the orange selection cursor. Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The tool CUTTER_D8" will be inserted into the cycle input mask. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block will be added to the program chain. The program chain is closed.
Page 31
B623
Section 3
Notes:

49. Extend the program chain by inserting another Pocket milling cycle for finishing the base of the moulding plate pocket. Press the VSK 1.4 Pocket. The input window for the pocket milling cycle opens. 50. Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue Select key on the MCP where indicated.
Note: In the input field F you can switch between mm/tooth or mm/min . The input field for Speed can either be set to cutting speed V in m/min or Spindle speed S in rpm. The machining depth Z1 can be inc or abs. The tool path step over DXY can be set to % of tool or a value in mm of the tool . To insert a tool into the cycle input mask, press the VSK 1 Select tool. The Tool list window opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard, to mark the tool CUTTER_D8, with the orange selection cursor. Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The tool CUTTER_D8" will be inserted into the cycle input mask. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block will be added to the program chain. The program chain is closed.
B623
Page 32

51. Insert another Pocket milling cycle into the program for finishing the base of the moulding plate pocket. Press the VSK 1.4 Pocket. The input window for the pocket milling cycle opens. 52. Insert the following parameter values. Use the blue Select key on the MCP where indicated.
Section 3
Notes:
Note: In the input field F you can switch between mm/tooth or mm/min . The input field for Speed can either be set to cutting speed V in m/min or Spindle speed S in rpm. The machining depth Z1 can be inc or abs. To insert a tool into the cycle input mask, press the VSK 1 Select tool. The Tool list window opens. Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard, to mark the tool CUTTER_D8, with the orange selection cursor. Press the VSK 1.8 OK. The tool CUTTER_D8" will be inserted into the cycle input mask. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block will be inserted into the program. The program chain is now finished and closed.
Page 33
B623
Section 3
Notes:

53. End the programming by placing the orange selection cursor on the program block End of program and switch to the parameter mask by pressing the blue cursor-to-the-right-key on the keyboard. The parameter mask for the program end opens, where you can define to repeat the program for multiple workpieces.
Accept the default value No and press the VSK 8 Accept. The program is now completed and ready for simulation.
B623
Page 34

54. Simulate now the program to verify tool path. Press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to start the simulation. The control calculates the simulation and opens the simulation window in a Top view on the workpiece.
Section 3
Notes:
Press the VSK 1.4 3D view to run the simulation in a 3-dimensional view.
Page 35
B623
Section 3
Notes:

Press the blue highlighted HSK 1.7 Simulation" to return to the ShopMill chain program. After completion of the workpiece Simulation, the Total machining time is being displayed behind the End of program program block
Note: The total time represents approximately the real time of machining. Tool change time and rapid traverse movements are being taken into consideration based on the values in the machine data.
B623
Page 36
B639
Straight Circle
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working with this module you become familiar with the technology Straight Circle in ShopMill with the programming of two sequential ShopMill programs. Description of the module: This module explains the programming of a simple program using the straight circle technology in ShopTurn, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of chained straight circle cycles.
840D/828D SINUMERIK Operate

840D/828D SINUMERIK Operate Page 1
B639
B639
B639
Page 2
B639
Straight - Circle: Description This module explains the programming of a simple program using the straight circle technology in ShopTurn, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of chained straight circle cycles.
Straight Circle: START
Straight Circle: END
Notes :
Page 3
B639
Section 2
Notes:

Description: A simple straight circle machining is to be programmed with ShopMill functionality.
Objective: A new sequential program is to be created and opened in the editor. The program header, a Straight line and circle and the program end are to be programmed. Afterwards the program is to be simulated. For this the following tool- and technology data are to be used: Tool data: Technology data: Cutter 20 mm (CUTTER_D20) Constant cutting speed V 80 m/min
2.1 Creating a new sequential program A new ShopMill program can be created from within the operating modes JOG, MDA and AUTO as follows: 1. Press the Program Manager-key on the keyboard. The program manager will be opened directly. - OR 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. Press the yellow HSK 1.4 Program manager. The program manager window opens. 2. Select a drive, where you want to create the program (NC, Local drive, USB). Press the VSK 2 New. The vertical softkey bar for creating new programs opens. Press the VSK 3 ShopMill to open the input mask for creating a new ShopMill sequential program. Enter a name for the program and accept with pressing the VSK 8 OK. The program is loaded to the editor and the parameter window for the program header is opened by default.
3.
4.
B639
Page 4

2.2 Example: Straight The following ShopMill program is to be programmed:
Section 2
Notes:
1.
Create a new ShopMill program, as described in section 2.1 and enter a new program name e.g. SM_STRAIGHT_CIRCLE_1.MPF The input mask for the program header is opened by default.
2.
Enter following values for the program header and confirm with the VSK 8 Accept:
The following program block is inserted into the work plan:
Page 5
B639
Section 2
Notes:

3. Program now the tool. For this, extend the horizontal softkey bar by pressing the Extend-key on the operator panel. The horizontal softkey bar 2 opens Press the HSK 2.2 Strght Circle to open the function Straight Circle with the corresponding vertical softkeys . Press now the VSK 1 Tool. The input mask for the tool parameters opens. 4. Enter following values into the input mask:
To insert a tool into the parameter window, press the VSK 1 Select tool, mark the desired tool (here CUTTER_D20) in the tool list with the orange selection cursor and press the VSK 1.8 OK. The following program block will be inserted into the work plan.
5.
Insert a straight line for positioning to the starting point of the milling operation. Press the VSK 2 Straight. The input mask for the straight parameters opens.
6.
Enter the following values for approaching the workpiece in a straight line into the input mask:
Press the VSK 5 Rapid traverse in order to position to the starting point in rapid traverse. 7. Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your input. The following program block is inserted into the work plan:
B639
Page 6

8. Insert a work step to approach the target position Z in a straight line. Press the VSK 2 Straight The window for the straight parameters opens. 9. Enter the following values into the input mask:
Section 2
Notes:
Press the VSK 5 Rapid traverse in order to approach the target position Z in rapid traverse. 10. Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your input. The following program block is inserted into the work plan:
11.
As next work step insert a straight line in Y-direction Press the VSK 2 Straight. The input mask for the straight line opens.
12.
Enter the following values into the input mask:
13.
Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your input. The following program block is inserted into the work plan:
14.
As next work step insert a straight line in Z-direction, to retract the tool. Press the VSK 2 Straight. The input mask for the parameter values for the straight opens.
Page 7
B639
Section 2
Notes:

15. Enter the following values into the input mask:
Press the VSK 5 Rapid traverse to execute the movement in rapid traverse.
16.
Press the VSK 8 Accept to confirm your input. The following program block is inserted into the work plan:
17.
Program the end of the program and simulate the machining. Place the orange selection cursor on the program block End of program and extend the program block by pressing the blue cursor-to-the-right-key on the keyboard. The input mask for the end of program opens. Leave the parameter Repetition on No, as shown below.
Accept the default value by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. In order to start the simulation, extend the horizontal softkey bar by pressing the Extend-key on the operator panel. The horizontal softkey bar 1 opens Press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to start the simulation of the program. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in Top view.
B639
Page 8
Section 2
Notes:
Page 9
B639
Section 3
Notes:

Description: A more complex program (die plate) is to be programmed, by using the technology Straight Circle.
Aim: The workpiece shown in the graphic below is to be programmed. Afterwards the program is to be simulated.
The following tool and technology data are used for the programming. Tool data: : Technology data: : Cutter 20 mm (CUTTER_D20) Constant cutting speed V 80 m/min As starting point for the machining the following position is specified: X - 12 Y Z - 12 -5
This point is approached in rapid traverse. The contour starting point (X5 and Y5) is approached in a straight line (F 100 mm/min, cutter radius compensation left).
B639
Page 10

3.1 Programming example: die plate The following ShopMill program is to be created.
Section 3
Notes:
1.
Create a new ShopMill program like described in section 2.1 in this module. Give the program the following name: SM_STRAIGHT_CIRCLE_2.MPF. The program, with the input mask for the program header opens by default.
2.
Enter the following values into the program header:
Page 11
B639
Section 3
Notes:

3. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block is inserted into the work plan:
4.
Inset now a tool (CUTTER_D20) into the program. In order to do this, switch to the horizontal softkey bar 2, by pressing the Extend-key on the operator panel. The horizontal softkey bar 2 opens. Press the HSK 2.2 Strght Circle to select the function Straight Circle. The operating area of the function Straight Circle opens. Now press the VSK 1 Tool to open the input mask for the tool (see picture below).
To insert a tool into the parameter mask, press the VSK 1 Select tool. Select the The tool list window opens. Here, place the orange selection cursor on the tool CUTTER_D20, by using the blue cursor keys on the keyboard and press the VSK 1.8 OK. The selected tool is inserted into the tool input mask like displayed below 5. Fill out the rest of the input mask, as follows:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block is inserted into the work plan:
B639
Page 12

6. Position now the tool to the starting position of the machining operation in a straight line. Press the VSK 2 Straight to open the input mask for the function Straight. 7. Insert the following values into input mask:
Section 3
Notes:
Press the VSK 5 Rapid traverse in order to position to the starting point in rapid traverse. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block is inserted into the program:
8.
Insert now another straight move into the program. Press the VSK 2 Straight to open the input mask for the function Straight.
9.
Insert the following values into the input mask:
Press the VSK 5 Rapid traverse, in order to move to the Z depth in rapid traverse. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block is inserted into the program:
10.
Insert now another Straight move into the program. Press the VSK 2 Straight to open the input mask for the function Straight.
Page 13
B639
Section 3
Notes:

11. Insert the following values into the parameter window:
12.
Define now the reference point of the polar coordinate system (pole) for the technology Straight circle. Press the VSK 6 Polar to open the input window for the function Polar. Press the VSK 2 Pole to open the input mask for the function Pole.
13.
Define the pole as follows:
14.
Insert now a Straight polar move into the program. Press the VSK 6 Polar to open the input window for the function Polar. Press the VSK 3 Straight polar to open the input mask for the function Straight polar.
15.
Enter the values as follows:
B639
Page 14

16. Insert another Circle polar move into the program. Press the VSK 6 Polar to open the operating area for the function Polar. Press the VSK 4 Circle polar, the input mask for the circle polar opens. 17. Enter the values into the input window like displayed below:
Section 3
Notes:
18.
Insert now a straight machining movement. Press the VSK 2 Straight to open the input window.
19.
Enter the values into the input window like displayed below:
20.
Define now a second reference point of the polar coordinate system (pole) for the technology Straight circle. Press the VSK 6 Polar to open the input mask for the function Polar. Press the VSK 2 Pole to open the input mask for the function Pole.
Page 15
B639
Section 3
Notes:

21. Enter the values into the input mask as displayed below:
22.
Insert another Circle polar move into the program. Press the VSK 6 Polar to open the operating area for the function Polar. Press the VSK 4 Circle polar, to open the input mask for Circle polar.
23.
Enter the values into the input mask as displayed below:
24.
Insert now a straight machining movement. Press the VSK 2 Straight to open the input window.
25.
B639
Page 16

26. Insert another Straight machining movement into the program. Press the VSK 2 Straight to open the input mask for the function Straight. 27. Enter the values into the input mask as displayed below:
Section 3
Notes:
28.
Insert the final straight machining movement into the program. Press the VSK 2 Straight to open the input window.
29.
30.
Program the end of the program and simulate the machining. Place the orange selection cursor on the program block End of program and extend the program block by pressing the blue cursor-to-the-right-key on the keyboard.
Page 17
B639
Section 3
Notes:

The input mask for the program end opens. Leave the parameter Repetition on No as shown below.
Accept the default value by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. 31. To run the simulation go back to the horizontal softkey bar 1. Extend the horizontal softkey bar by pressing the Extend-key on the operator panel. The horizontal softkey bar 1 opens. Press the HSK 1.7 Simulation to start the simulation of the program. The control calculates the simulation parameters and opens the simulation in the simulation window in Top view.
B639
Page 18

Section 3
Notes:
Page 19
B639
Section End
Notes:
B639
Page 20
B655
Measurement Milling ShopMill
Brief description
Objective of the module: Working with this module you become familiar with the technology Measurement milling by programming two sequential ShopMill programs. Description of the module: This module explains the programming of a simple and a complex measuring process of the workpiece with the function Measurement milling in ShopMill.

B655
B655
B655
Page 2
B655
Measure milling - Shopmill: Description This module explains the programming of a simple and a complex measuring process of the workpiece with the function Measurement milling in ShopMill.
Measure milling Shopmill: START
Measure milling Shopmill: END
Notes :
Page 3
B655
Section 2
Notes:

Description: A simple measuring movement with a 3d-probe to the top side of a workpiece is to be programmed under ShopMill. Objective: A new ShopMill program is to be created and opened in the editor. The program header, a measuring cycle and the program end are to be programmed. Later, the program is to be simulated. For this, the data below are to be used: Tool data: 3D Probe (3D_PROBE))
2.1 Creating a new ShopMill program A new ShopMill program can be created from within all operating modes as follows: 1. Press the Program Manager-key on the keyboard. The program manager will be opened directly. - OR 1. Press the MENU SELECT-key on the operator panel. Press the yellow HSK 4 Program Manager. The program manager opens. 2. Select a drive, where you want to create the program (NC, Local drive, USB). Press the VSK 2 New. The vertical softkey bar for creating new programs opens. 4. Press the VSK 3 ShopMill to open the input mask for creating a new ShopMill sequential program. Enter a name for the program in the Name field and accept with pressing the VSK 8 OK. The program is loaded to the editor and the parameter window for the program header is opened by default.
3.
B655
Page 4

2.2 Programming example: Measuring a surface The following ShopMill program with a measuring cycle is to be programmed:
Section 2
Notes:
1.
Create a new ShopMill program like described in the previous section 2.1 and give the program a name, for example SM_MEASURING_MILLING_1.MPF. The input mask for the program header opens automatically.
2.
Insert the following values into the input mask of the program header and confirm the input with the VSK 8 Accept:
Page 5
B655
Section 2
Notes:

3.
Insert a probe tool (3D_PROBE) into the program. In order to do this, you have to access the tool list window from the work area Straight Circle! Note: This is necessary, since the tool list is not directly accessible over the technology Measurem. Milling. Press the Extend-key on the operator panel to reach to the Straight Circle function The vertical softkey bar 2 opens. Press the HSK 2.2 Strght Circle, to get access to the function Tool. Press the VSK 1 Tool, to open the input mask for the tool. Press the VSK 1 Select tool. The tool list window opens. Mark the desired tool (here 3D_PROBE) by using the blue cursor key on the keyboard and press the VSK 8 OK. The selected tool is loaded into the tool input mask.
4.
Leave the value as follows:
Confirm your tool selection by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block is inserted into the work plan: 5. Program the approach of the tool probe in a straight line with rapid traverse. Press the VSK 2 Straight. The input mask for the technology Straight opens. Insert the following position values into the parameter mask:
B655
Page 6

Press the VSK 5 Rapid traverse, to set the federate to rapid traverse. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block is inserted into the work plan:
Section 2
Notes:
6.
Program the approach of the tool probe in a straight line in XY with rapid traverse. Press the VSK 2 Straight. The input mask for the technology Straight opens.
Insert the following position values into the parameter mask:
Press the VSK 5 Rapid traverse, to set the federate to rapid traverse. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block is inserted into the work plan: 8. Program the approach of the probe tool in a straight line in Z direction with rapid traverse. Press the VSK 2 Straight. The input mask for the technology Straight opens. 9. Insert the following position values into the parameter mask:
Press the VSK 5 Rapid traverse, to set the federate to rapid traverse. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block is inserted into the work plan:
Page 7
B655
Section 2
Notes:

10. Program now a measuring cycle (CYCLE978). Press the HSK 2.6 Measurem. milling. The work area Measurement milling with extended measuring functions opens. Press the VSK 4 Workpiece measure. The vertical softkey bar with functions for the measurement of workpieces opens. Press the VSK 4 Plane. The Input window for the cycle 1-pt.meas./ CYCLE978 opens. 11. Insert the following values into the parameter mask:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 OK. The following two program blocks are inserted into the work plan.
12.
Program the program end and simulate the measurement of the work piece. Place the orange selection on the program block End of program and extend the line by pressing the blue cursor-to-the-right key on the keyboard. The input mask for the program end opens. Here, you can decide to repeat the program run.
13.
Accept the default value and press the VSK 8 Accept.
B655
Page 8

Switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1 by pressing the Extend-key on the control panel. The horizontal softkey bar 1 opens. Press the HSK 1.6 Simulation to start the simulation of the program. The control calculates the simulation and opens the simulation window in Top view by default.
Section 2
Notes:
To view the simulation 3-dimensional press the VSK 1.4 3D-view.
Page 9
B655
Section 3
Notes:

Description: Another program to measure a square work piece is to be programmed in ShopMill. Objective: The program header, two measuring cycles and the program end are to be programmed. Afterwards the program is to be simulated. For this, the data below is to be used: Tool data: 3d probe (3D_PROBE)
3.1 Programming example: Measuring edges
The following program with two measuring cycles is to be programmed:
1.
Create a new ShopMill program like described in the previous section 2.1 and give the program a name, for example SM_MEASURE_MILLING_2.MPF. The input mask for the program header opens automatically.
B655
Page 10

2. Insert the following values for the program header into the input mask and confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept:
Section 3
Notes:
3.
Insert a probe tool (3D_PROBE) into the program. In order to do this, you have to access the tool list window from the work area Straight Circle! Note: This is necessary, since the tool list is not directly accessible over the technology Measurement Milling. Press the Extend-key on the operator panel to switch to the vertical softkey bar 2. The vertical softkey bar 2 opens. Press the HSK 2.2 Strght Circle, to get access to the function Tool. Press the VSK 1 Tool, to open the input mask for the tool. Press the VSK 1 Select tool. The tool list window opens. Mark the desired tool (here 3D_PROBE) by using the blue cursor key on the keyboard and press the VSK 8 OK. The selected tool is loaded into the tool parameter window.
Page 11
B655
Section 3
Notes:

4. Leave the value as follows:
Confirm your tool selection by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block is inserted into the work plan:
5.
Program the approach of the probe tool in a straight line with rapid traverse. Press the VSK 2 Straight. The input mask for the technology Straight opens. Insert the following position values into the parameter mask:
Press the VSK 5 Rapid traverse, to set the federate to rapid traverse. Confirm your tool selection by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block is inserted into the work plan: 6. Program the approach of the probe tool in a straight line in XY with rapid traverse. Press the VSK 2 Straight. The input mask for the technology Straight opens. Insert the following position values into the parameter mask:
Press the VSK 5 Rapid traverse, to set the feedrate to rapid traverse. Confirm your tool selection by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block is inserted into work plan.
B655
Page 12

7. Program the approach of the probe tool in a straight line in Z with rapid traverse. Press the VSK 2 Straight. The input mask for the technology Straight opens. 9. Insert the following position values into the parameter mask:
Section 3
Notes:
Press the VSK 5 Rapid traverse, to set the feedrate to rapid traverse. Confirm your tool selection by pressing the VSK 8 Accept. The following program block is inserted into the work plan. 10. Program now a measuring cycle (CYCLE978). Press the HSK 2.6 Measurem. milling. The work area Measurement milling with extended measuring functions opens. Press the VSK 4 Workpiece measure. The vertical softkey bar with functions for the measurement of workpieces opens. Press the VSK 4 Plane. The Input window for the cycle 1-pt.meas./ CYCLE978 opens. 11. Insert the following values into the input mask:
Page 13
B655
Section 3
Notes:

Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 OK. The following two program blocks are inserted into the work plan window.
12.
Program now a measuring cycle to measure the 4 edges of the workpiece. Press the VSK 4 Workpiece measure. The vertical softkey bar with functions for the measurement of workpieces opens. Press the VSK 1.7 Extend, to open the vertical softkey bar 2, where are more functions for measuring workpieces available. Press the VSK 2.2 Rectangle. The input window for the cycle Meas.rectang./ CYCLE977 opens.
13.
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 OK. The following two program blocks are inserted into the work plan window.
B655
Page 14

14. Program the program end and simulate the measurement of the work piece. Place the orange selection on the program block End of program and extend the line by pressing the blue cursor-to-the-right key on the keyboard. 15. The input mask for the program end opens. Here, you can decide to repeat the program run.
Section 3
Notes:
Accept the default value and press the VSK 8 Accept. Switch back to the horizontal softkey bar 1 by pressing the Extend-key on the operator panel. The horizontal softkey bar 1 opens. Press the HSK 1.6 Simulation to start the simulation of the measurement. The control calculates the simulation and opens the simulation window in Top view by default.
To view the simulation 3-dimensional, press the VSK 1.4 3D view (see following page).
Page 15
B655
Section 3
Notes:
B655
Page 16
B500
Cycles
Brief Description
Objective of the module:

With the help of this module you will get to know the various cycle parameters in ShopMill and ShopTurn.
Description of the module:

This module explains the various parameters that are called up in the cycle masks in tabular form . In the course of this the relationship and the differences of the parameters to the individual cycles and techniques are pointed out. Content: Fundamentals Turning Drilling Milling

This documentation was produced for training purposes. SIEMENS does not accept resposibility for the contents.
B500
B500
B500
Page 2
B500
Cycles: Description This module explains the various parameters that are called up in the cycle masks in tabular form . In the course of this the relationship and the differences of the parameters to the individual cycles and techniques are pointed out.
Cycles: START
Fundamentals
Turning
Drilling
Milling
Cycles: END
Notes :
Page 3
B500
Fundamentals
2. 1 Cycles Cycles are sub-programs (technology-orientated functions) for the execution of a repeatedly occurring operation on a work piece. Cycles can be selected comfortably via Softkeys and can simply be parameterised by means of input masks. Programmed cycles are inserted in G-Code or step-chain-programs as a program step and can be re-selected and newly parameterised at any time. The following functionality is available both in ShopMill and ShopTurn Technology-orientated cycle selection with help of Softkeys Input masks for cycle parameters (cycle masks) with help pictures and animations Context-sensitive online-help for every input window Support for the contour input (geometry processor)
Section 2
Notes.
Page 5
B500
Section 3
Notes:
Turning
Unit Plunge angle (Thread relief) 0 1 1 (Stock removal) 1 (Groove) 2 (Stock removal) 2 (Groove) P Allowance (Stock removal) Degrees
Starting angle offset Angle of the tapers Angle of the first edge
Degrees Degrees Degrees
Flange angle 1
Degrees
Angle of the second edge
Degrees
Flange angle 2
Degrees
Infeed taper (angle) Finishing allowance (only with finishing) Yes U1 contour allowance No
Degrees mm
Selection (Thread) B1 B2 Machining
Table value, e.g. M10, M12, M14,
Width of groove, bottom Width of groove, top Roughing Finishing Roughing + Finishing
mm mm
Machining Machining directions direction Planar Turning Longitudinal (Stock removal parting)
Machining direction (Thread relief)
Longitudinal Parallel to contour
B500
Page 6
Turning
Unit Machining direction Contourturning (Stock removal) Planar Longitudinal Parallel to contour From inside outward From outside inward From front to rear end From rear end to front
Section 3
Notes.
BL D D D1 (Thread) DA DI DIR (parting)
Blank description (contour, cylinder, allowance) Cutting edge number Maximum infeed depth (inc) First infeed depth Start-changing depth (inc) At 0 continuous cut Spindle rotation direction counter-clockwise (CCW) clockwise (CW) Infeed taper as a flank (inc) mm mm
DP (Longitudinal thread) DP (Groove) DX DZ Limit
Distance of back-cut (inc) DP is not displayed when N = 1
mm
Maximum infeed depth (only parallel to contour mm alternatively to D) Maximum infeed depth (only for parallel to con- mm tour and UX) Machining range limitation Yes XA: 1st limit XA XB: 2nd limit XB (abs) or 2nd limit referred to XA (inc) ZA: 1st limit ZA ZB: 2nd limit ZB (abs) or 2nd limit referred to ZA No
Page 7
B500
Section 3
Notes:
Turning
Unit F Feed mm/min mm/rev
Form (Thread relief) FR (Parting) FR (Stock removal) FS (Stock removal) FS FS1 FS2 FS3 FS4 FX FZ G Thread (Longitudinal thread ) H1 (Taper thread) H1 (Longitudinal thread ) Relief cuts (Stock removal)
Normal (Form A) Short (Form B) mm/rev
Reduced feedrate
Plunging feedrate for relief cuts
Chamfer (n = 1...3) alternative to R
mm
Chamfer width Chamfer width 1 Chamfer width 2 Chamfer width 3 Chamfer width 4 Feed in X-direction Feed in Z-direction Change of thread pitch per rev. Internal thread External thread
mm mm mm mm mm mm/rev mm/rev
Calculated from thread pitch Depth of thread obtained from thread table
mm mm
Machining of relief cuts Yes No Location of stock removal right top right bottom left top left bottom
Location turning (Stock removal)
B500
Page 8
Turning
Unit Location contourturning (Stock removal, parting) LR LW Multi-start front back internal external mm mm
Section 3
Notes.
Thread run-out (inc) Thread lead (inc) No 0 Starting angle offset Yes Nr. of thread starts are spread evenly around the circumference of work piece
N (Groove) N (Thread) NN (Thread) P (Thread relief DIN) P (Longitudinal thread )
Number of grooves (N = 1...65535)
Nr of thread starts
Number of dummy passes
Thread pitch (to be selected from DIN-table) or mm/rev entered manually
Selection of the thread pitch/-starts Thread pitch in mm/rev Thread pitch in inch/rev Threads per inch Thread pitch in modulus Rounding radius 1 Rounding radius 2 Rounding radius 3 Rounding radius 4 Radius (n = 1...3) alternative to FS Spindle speed Reduced speed Maximum rotary speed for constant cutting speed
mm/rev in/rev threads/" modulus mm mm mm mm mm rev/min rev/min rev/min
R1 R2 R3 R4 R S SR SV
Page 9
B500
Section 3
Notes:
Turning
Unit Table Selection of the thread table without ISO metric Whitworth BSW Whitworth BSP UNC Tool name Groove depth (abs) or groove depth referred to X0 (inc) Contour allowance Finishing allowance Finishing allowance in X Finishing allowance in Z Constant cutting speed Retraction distance (inc) Planar pass (abs) or planar pass (inc) mm
T T1 (Groove) U1 U UX UZ V VR VX (Relief cut) X0 (Groove) X1 (Relief cut)
mm mm mm mm m/min mm mm
Reference point (abs)
mm
Allowance in X (abs) or allowance in X (inc) mm
X1 End point of the thread (abs) or thread (Stock removal length (inc) Thread)
mm
X1 End point X (abs) or end point referred to X0 mm (Taper thread) (inc)
X1 Thread taper (Taper thread)
Degrees
X1 (Parting cut) X2 (Parting cut)
Depth for speed reduction (abs) or depth for mm speed reduction referred to X0 (inc) Final depth (abs) or final depth referred to X1 (inc) mm
B500
Page 10
Turning
Unit XA 1st limit XA (abs) (limiting)
Section 3
Notes.
XB 2nd limit XB (abs) (limiting) (Stock removal) XD (Parting) XDA (Parting) XDB (Parting) Allowance or cylinder dimension (inc) mm
1st parting-limit tool (abs)
mm
2nd parting-limit tool (abs)
mm
XF2 Relief cut (alternative to FS2 or R2) (Stock removal) XM Intermediate point referred to X0
mm
mm
Z0 (Groove)
Reference point Z (abs)
mm
Z1 End point Z (abs) referred to Z0 (Stock removal) Z1 (Relief cut) Z1 (Thread) Allowance in Z
mm
mm
End point of the thread
mm
ZA 1st limit ZA (abs) (limiting) (Stock removal) ZB 2nd limit ZB (abs) (limiting) (Stock removal) ZD (Parting) ZM Infeed Allowance or cylinder dimension (inc) mm
Intermediate point Z Linear: Infeed with constant cutting depth Degressive: Infeed with constant chip cross-section
mm
Page 11
B500
Section 4
Notes:
Drilling
Unit Lifting angle (tool orientation angle) (only for lifting the tool), spindle position for orientated spindle stop in the cycle. Rotation angle for the straight line, referred to the X-axis Degrees
0 1 (Pitch circle)
Degrees
Advancing angle (only for circular pattern pitch Degrees circle)
Lifting mode
No lifting The cutting edge is not retracted, but returns to the safety clearance with rapid traverse.
Degrees
Lifting The cutting edge is moved clear of the edge of the hole and is then lifted to the retraction level.
S X Y
Starting angle offset (only for tapping without a Degrees compensating chuck) Shearing angle X (only for the location patterns grid or frame) Shearing angle Y (only for the location patterns grid or frame) Centre drilling with reduced feedrate Yes No The reduced feedrate is executed as follows: Drilling feedrate F1 < 0,15mm/rev: Centre drilling feedrate = 30% of F1 Path feedrate F1=> 0,15mm/rev: Centre drilling feedrate = 0,1 mm/rev Degrees
Degrees
Centre drilling
Selection (tapping)
Selection of table value: M1 - M68 (ISO metric) W3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSW) G3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSP) 1" - 8 UNC; etc. (UNC)
B500
Page 12
Drilling
Unit Selection Coordinate system Machining (Drilling) Right-angled (Cartesian) Polar Chip breaking Chip clearing
Section 4
Notes.
Machining The following machining methods are avail(without comp. able: chuck) One cut only: (Tapping) The tapping takes place in one pass without interruption. Chip breaking: The drill is retracted by an amount V2 for chip breaking. Chip clearing: The drill is retracted from the work piece for chip clearing.
Machining (with comp. chuck) (Tapping)
The following machining methods are available: With encoder: Tapping with spindle encoder Without encoder: Tapping without spindle encoder selection with specification of the "pitch" parameter Single location: Drilling at the programmed location Location pattern: Location with MCALL
Machining location
Drilling depth Referred to Shaft: Drilling until the drill-shaft has reached the programmed value X1. The angle in the tool list is taken into account. Point: Drilling until the drill point has reached the programmed value X1.
Page 13
B500
Section 4
Notes:
Drilling
Unit C0 (Locations) Polar coordinates of the 1st location, with the selection "polar" longitudinal (abs) angle (abs) C1...C7 (Locations) Polar coordinates of further locations, with the selection "polar" longitudinal (abs) angle (abs) Drilling continues until the diameter has been reached (only with centring) Nominal diameter mm mm Degrees mm Degrees
(internal thread milling) D
Cutting edge number
maximum depth infeed (only with chip clearing or chip breaking) Lift-off amount (inc) (only for lifting, SN)
mm
D (Boring) DF
mm
Percentage for all further infeeds or amount for every further infeed
mm
DIR
Direction of rotation counter-clockwise (CCW) clockwise (CW) Dwell at final drilling depth in seconds Dwell at final drilling depth in revs Dwell at drilling depth in seconds Dwell at drilling depth in revs Dwell at the start point for chip clearing in seconds (only for chip clearing) Dwell at the starting point for chip clearing in revs (only for chip clearing) s rev s rev s
DT
DTB
DTS
rev
B500
Page 14
Drilling
Unit Through drilling Remaining drilling depth at path feedrate DX Yes No
Section 4
Notes.
Lift-off amount in X-direction (inc) (only for lifting, standard) Lift-off amount in Y-direction (inc) (only for lifting, standard) Lift-off amount in Z-direction (inc) (only for lifting, standard)
DY
DZ
Chip clearing Chip clearing before thread milling (Drill + thread milling) Yes No Retract to work piece surface for chip clearance before thread milling. F Feedrate mm/min mm/rev mm/min mm/rev %
F1
Path feedrate
FD1
Percentage feedrate for the first infeed
FR Drilling feedrate for remaining depth (Drill + thread milling) FR Feedrate for retraction
mm/min mm/rev
mm/min
FS
Finishing feedrate (only for down cut / up cut ) Down-cut (climb milling) Up-cut (conventional milling) Down cut / up cut (climb/conventional milling)
mm/min mm/tooth
Milling direction (Drill + thread milling) Thread
Thread sense Right-hand-thread Left-hand-thread
Page 15
B500
Section 4
Notes:
Drilling
Unit L0 Distance of the first location from the reference point (only for location pattern straight line) Polar coordinates of the first location with selection "polar" longitudinal (abs) angle (abs) L mm Degrees mm
L0 (Locations)
Distance between the locations (only for location mm pattern straight line) Distance between the columns (only for location mm pattern grid or frame) Polar coordinates of further locations, with selection "polar" longitudinal (abs) angle (abs) mm Degrees mm
L1
L1...L7 (Locations)
L2
Distance between the lines (only for location pattern grid or frame) Repeat of jump mark for location with compensating chuck without compensating chuck
LAB
Compensa- ting chuck mode N
Number of locations (only for location pattern straight line) Number of columns (only for location pattern grid or frame) Number of lines (only for location pattern grid or frame) Thread pitch in modulus: modulus = pitch/ in mm/rev in inch/rev in threads per inch modulus mm/rev in/rev Threads/"
N1
N2
Positioning Positioning motions between the locations (Pitch circle) Straight Circle PL Machining plane G17 (XY)
B500
Page 16
Drilling
Unit R RP Retraction Radius Retraction plane (abs) (only for machining with "Chip breaking") retraction amount SC SDE S/V manually automatically mm mm
Section 4
Notes.
Safety distance (inc) Direction of rotation after end of cycle Spindle speed or constant cutting speed Spindle stop position Spindle speed for retraction User entry of the input active feed, pitch is derived from the feed rate rev/min m/min Degrees rev/min
SPOS SR
Pitch (only for machining without encoder) T Table
Tool name Selection of the thread table: without ISO metric Whitworth BSW Whitworth BSP UNC mm mm
V1 V2 (Tapping)
Minimum infeed depth Retraction amount (only for retraction "manually") Amount, by which the tap is retracted for chip breaking. V2 = automatically: The tool retracts by one revolution.
V2 (drilling) V3
Retraction amount after each machining operation (only for machining "chip breaking") Pre-stopping distance (only for pre-stopping distance "manually")
mm
mm
Page 17
B500
Section 4
Notes:
Drilling
Unit Pre-stopping (only for machining "chip clearing") distance manually automatically VR XD X0 X1...X7 (Locations) Y0 Y1...Y7 (Locations) Z0 Z1 (Drilling) Z1 (Thread) Z1 (Drilling) Z1 (Thread) Z2 ZR Constant cutting speed for retraction Centre offset X-coordinate of the reference point X (abs) X-coordinate of further reference points (abs or inc) Y-coordinate of the Reference point Y (abs) Y-coordinate of further reference points (abs or inc) Reference point Z Final drilling depth X (abs) or final drilling depth referred to Z0 (inc) End point of the thread (abs) or thread length (inc) Final drilling depth X (abs) or final drilling depth referred to Z0 (inc) End point of the thread (abs) or thread length (inc) Retraction amount before thread milling Remaining depth for through drilling ("Yes" only for through-holes) mm mm m/min
mm mm
mm mm
mm
mm
mm
mm mm
B500
Page 18
Drilling
Section 4
Notes.
Page 19
B500
Section 5
Notes:
Milling
Unit 0 0 (circular slot) 1 (circular slot) 1 (Engraving) 1 (contour) 1 (circular slot) 2 (circular slot) 2 (contour) S (ThreadMilling) Rotation angle Degrees
Start angle
Degrees
Opening angle of the slot
Degrees
Text direction (only for linear alignment) Starting direction relative to X-axis
Degrees
Degrees
Opening angle of the slot
Degrees
Advancing angle (only for pitch circle) angle to previous element
Degrees
Degrees
Starting angle
Degrees
Retract mode Retract mode in plane (Path milling) Quarter circle: Part of a spiral (only for path milling to the left and the right of contour) Semi circle: Part of a spiral (only for path milling to the left and the right of the contour) Straight: Oblique in space
Retract strategy (Path milling)
Axis-by-axis spatial
B500
Page 20
Milling
Unit Lift mode (Centring) Lifting mode before a renewed infeed If for the machining several plunging points are required, the retraction height can be programmed: to RP (retraction plane) Z0 + safety distance mm
Section 5
Notes.
Lift mode (Path milling)
If several depth infeeds are required, the retraction height to which the tool is retracted to between the individual infeeds, can be specified here. (at the transition at the end of the contour to the beginning). Lifting mode before a renewed infeed No retraction to RP (retraction plane) Z0 + safety distance by safety distance
mm
Lift mode (Pre-drilling centring) (Pocket milling)
Lifting mode before renewed infeed If for the machining several plunging points are required, the retraction height can be programmed as following: to RP Z0 + safety distance X0 + safety distance
mm
Page 21
B500
Section 5
Notes:
Milling
Unit Approach (Path milling) Approach mode in plane Quarter circle: Part of a spiral (only for path milling left and right of the contour) Semi circle: Part of a spiral (only for path milling left and right of the contour) Straight: Oblique in space Vertical: Perpendicular to the path (only for path milling on the centre line path)
Approach strategy (Path milling)
Axis-by-axis (only for approach "quarter circle or semi circle") Spatial (only for approach "quarter circle, semi circle or straight")
mm
Removing (Rectangular pocket, only for roughing)
Complete machining: The rectangular pocket is milled out of the solid material. Re-machining: An already existing small rectangular pocket or a bore is enlarged in one or more axes. In this case the parameters AZ, W1, and L1 must be programmed.
Alignment (Engraving)
Linear alignment Curved alignment, arch at the top Curved alignment, arch at the bottom
B500
Page 22
Milling
Unit Selection (Threadmilling) Selection of table values:
Section 5
Notes.
M3, M10, etc. (ISO metric) W3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSW) G3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSP) 1" - 8 UNC; etc. (UNC)
AZ 1 2
Depth of roughing (only for re-machining) End-angle to X-axis Opening angle of the circle Roughing Finishing
mm Degrees Degrees
Machining (Planar-/ thread-milling)
Machining (Rectangular/ round spigot) (path milling)
Roughing Finishing Chamfering
Machining (Rectangular/ circ. pocket) (Longitudinal/ circ. slot) (multi edge spigot) (Rectangular/ circ. spigot)
Roughing Finishing Finishing edge Chamfering
Page 23
B500
Section 5
Notes:
Milling
Unit Machining plane Selection of the machining plane Machining type (Circular pocket) G17 (X/Y) G18 (Z/X) G19 (Y/Z) Centric: Clearing a circular pocket plane-by-plane Helical: Clearing a circular pocket helically Front Y: Machining on a front face with Y-axis Mantle Y: Machining on a cylindrical surface with Y-axis Front C: Machining on a front face with C-axis Front Y: Machining on a front face with Y-axis Mantle Y: Machining on a cylindrical surface with Y-axis Front C: Machining on a front face with C-axis Front Y: Machining on a front face with Y-axis Mantle C Machining on a cylindrical surface with C-axis Mantle Y Machining on a cylindrical surface with Y-axis Z0 Z1 Machining from top to bottom Z1 Z0 Machining from bottom to top
Machining face (Planar milling)
Machining face (Rectangular/ circ. spigot) Thread milling)
Machining face (Rectangular pocket) (Longitudinal/ circular slot) (Open slot) (Circ. spigot) (Engraving) (Path milling)
Machining direction (Thread milling)
B500
Milling
Unit Machining direction (Path milling) Machining in the programmed contour direction Forward: The machining takes place in the programmed contour direction Backward: The machining takes place against the programmed contour direction
Section 5
Notes.
Machining location (Rectangular pocket) (Longitudinal slot)
Single location: Milling a rectangular pocket at the programmed location (X0, Y0, Z0) . Location pattern: Location MCALL
Machining location (circular pocket)
Single location: Milling a circular pocket at the programmed location (X0, Y0, Z0). Location pattern: Several circular pockets are milled on a location pattern (e.g. full circle, pitch circle, grid etc.). Single location: Milling a rectangular/circular spigot at a programmed location (X0, Y0, Z0). Location pattern: Location with MCALL.
Machining location (Rectangular/ circular spigot)
Page 25
B500
Section 5
Notes:
Milling
Unit Machining location (multi-edge spigot) Single location: A multi-edge spigot is milled at the programmed location (X0, Y0, Z0). Location pattern: Several multi-edge spigots are milled on the programmed location pattern (e.g. pitch circle, grid, straight line). Single location: Milling a slot at the programmed location (X0, Y0, Z0). Location pattern: Milling of several slots on a programmed location pattern (e.g. full circle or grid).
Machining location (Open slot)
Reference point (Open slot)
Location of the reference point: Left edge Centre Right edge
Reference point (Engraving)
Location of the reference point: Bottom left Bottom centre Bottom right Top left Top centre Top right Centre left Centre Centre right
Reference point (Slot)
Location of the reference point: Left edge Inside left Centre Inside right Right edge
B500
Page 26
Milling
Unit Reference point (Rectangular pocket) The following various locations of the reference point can be selected: Centre Bottom left Bottom right Top left Top right Degrees
Section 5
Notes.
CP
Positioning angle for machining range (only for front Y) Positioning angle for machining face (only for mantle Y) Diameter of the pocket
C0
Degrees
(Circular pocket) (Circular spigot) (Threadmilling) 1 (Circularspigot, multi-edge spigot) 1 (Circular pocket) D Direction of rotation (Threadmilling)
mm
Diameter of the spigot
mm
Nominal diameter, Example: Nominal diameter of M12 = 12 mm
mm
Diameter of the blank spigot
mm
Diameter of pre-machining (only for re-machining)
mm
Cutting edge number of the tool (1 - 9) Direction of the thread rotation: Right hand thread A right-hand thread is milled Left hand thread A left-hand thread is milled Rotation clockwise Rotation counter-clockwise
Rotation (Milling)
Page 27
B500
Section 5
Notes:
Milling
Unit DX1 (Engraving) Character spacing or total width (only for linear alignment) for front face machining Maximum depth infeed Maximum plane infeed Alternatively the plane infeed can also be stated as a percentage ratio of plane infeed (mm) to the milling cutter diameter (mm) DY1 (Engraving) Character spacing or total width (only for linear alignment) for mantle machining Maximum plane infeed mm
DX DXY
mm mm %
mm
DYZ
mm
Alternatively the plane infeed can also be de- % fined as a percentage ratio of the plane infeed (mm) to the milling cutter diameter (mm) DZ Maximum depth infeed (only for roughing) Vertical: Vertical plunging to the pocket centre Helical: Plunging along a spiral path Oscillating: Plunging with an oscillating motion along the central axis of the rectangular pocket. mm
Plunging (Rectangular pocket) (Longitudinal slot) (Pocket milling)
Plunging (Circular pocket)
Vertical: Vertical plunging at the centre of pocket. Helical: Plunging along a spiral path
EP Maximum pitch of the helix (Rectangular/ (only for helical plunging) circular pocket)
mm/rev
B500
Page 28
Milling
Unit ER Radius of the helix (Rectangular/ (only for helical plunging) circular pocket) EW (Rectangular pocket) (Longitudinal slot) F Maximum plunge angle (only for oscillatory plunging) mm
Section 5
Notes.
Degrees
Feed
mm/min mm/rev
FR (Path milling) Milling direction (Open slot)
Retraction feed for intermediate positioning
Milling direction (other than plunge milling) Climb milling Conventional milling mm
FS Chamfer width for chamfering (Rectangular/ (only for chamfering) circular pocket) (Rectangular/ circular spigot) (Path milling) FX Infeed feed depth (Rectangular/ (only for vertical and pre-drilled plunging) circular for mantle C/Y pocket) (Longitudinal slot) FZ Infeed feed depth (Rectangular/ (only for vertical and pre-drilled plunging) circular for front C/Y machining pocket) (Longitudinal slot) Engraving text (Engraving) H1 (Threadmilling) Maximum 100 characters
mm/min mm/tooth
mm/min mm/tooth
Thread depth
mm
Page 29
B500
Section 5
Notes:
Milling
Unit I J Circular pattern (Circular slot) Circle centre point in X-direction (abs or inc) Circle centre point in Y-direction (abs or inc) Full circle: The circular slots are positioned on a full circle. The distance of one circular slot to the next circular slot is always the same and is determined by the control unit. Pitch circle: The circular slots are positioned on a pitch circle. The distance of one circular slot to the next circular slot can be determined by means of angle 2. mm mm mm
L1 (Rectangular pocket) L1 (Rectangular spigot) L1 (Path milling) L2 (Path milling) L2 (Circle)
Pre-machined pocket length (only for further machining)
Blank material length of spigot (only for further machining)
mm
Approach length (only for approach "Straight") Exit length (only for exiting "Straight")
mm
mm
(abs) Distance between pole and circle centre mm point mm (inc) Distance between the last point and circle centre point
L Position of the thread (Threadmilling)
Length of pocket, spigot, slot, straight Position of the thread: Internal thread: An internal thread is milled External thread: An external thread is milled
mm
B500
Page 30
Milling
Unit N (multi-edge spigot) N (Circular slot) NT (Thread milling) P (Thread milling) Number of edges
Section 5
Notes.
Number of slots
Number of teeth per cutter
Thread pitch in modulus: modulus = pitch/ in mm/rev in inch/rev in threads per inch The thread pitch depends on the tool used modulus mm/rev in/rev Threads/"
PL
Machining plane G17 (XY) G18 (ZX) G19 (YZ)
Positioning (Circular slot)
Positioning between the slots: Straight: The next location is approached along a straight line at rapid traverse. Circle: The next location is approached along a circular path at the programmed feedrate
R1 (multi-edge spigot) R2 (Path milling)
Rounding radius
mm
Exit radius (only when exiting contour with "quarter circle or semi circle")
mm
Page 31
B500
Section 5
Notes:
Milling
Unit R (Rectangular pocket/spigot) R (circular slot) R (Milling) RP (Centring) Radius correction (Path milling) Corner radius mm
Radius of the circular slot
mm
Radius of the circle
mm
Retraction plane
mm
Left (machining to the left of the contour) Right (machining to the right of the contour) OFF (machining tool centre path) Same machining direction
to the right to the top
Direction
Changing machining direction

meandering left/right meandering up/down
Spindle speed
rev/min
Stop-Position Input of the spindle position in degrees Starting point (Pocket milling) SW (multi-edge spigot) T Manually preset starting point Automatic starting point calculation
Spanner size A/F
Input of the tool (Name or number)
B500
Page 32
Milling
Unit Table (Threadmilling) Selection the thread table: without ISO Metric Whitworth BSW Whitworth BSP UNC Whirling: Circular motion of the cutter through the slot and back again Plunge milling: Sequential boring motions along the tool axis.
Section 5
Notes.
Techno-logy (Open slot)
TR Reference tool for rest material machining (Pocket Restmaterial) U (ThreadMilling) UX (Longitudinal slot) UXY UYZ UZ V Finishing allowance in Y and X mm
Finishing allowance depth
mm
Finishing allowance plane Finishing allowance plane Finishing allowance depth Feed constant cutting speed
mm mm mm m/min
Page 33
B500
Section 5
Notes:
Milling
Unit W (Rectangular pocket) W (Rectangular spigot) W (Longitudinal/ circular slot) W (Engraving) W1 (Rectangular pocket) W1 (Rectangular spigot) X0 (Rectangular /circular pocket) (Rectangular spigot) X0 (Planar milling) X1 (Planar milling) X1 (Rectangular/ circular spigot) X1 (Longitudinal slot) XFS Width of the pocket mm
Width of the spigot
mm
Width of the slot
mm
Character height
mm
Width of the pre-machining (only for further machining)
mm
Width of the raw material spigot (Important for mm the determination of the approach location) Reference point X (only for single location) mm
Reference point 1 X
mm
Reference point 2 X (abs) or reference point 2X referred to X0 )inc) Spigot depth (abs) or depth referred to Z0 or X0 (inc)
mm
mm
Slot depth (abs) or depth referred to Z0 or X0 (inc) Plunging depth of tool tip (abs or inc) (only for chamfering) Machining mantle C/Y Centre point X (abs) or centre point polar length (only for curved alignment) Starting point X (only if starting point is preset manually)
mm
mm
XM (Engraving) XS (Pocket milling)
mm or Degrees
B500
Page 34
Milling
Unit Y0 Reference point Y (Rectangular/ (only for a single location) circular pocket) (Rectangular spigot) Y0 (Planar milling) Y1 (Planar milling) YM (Engraving) YS (Pocket Milling) Reference point 1 in Y mm or Degrees
Section 5
Notes.
mm
Reference point 2 in Y referred to Y0
mm
Centre point Y (abs) or C (abs) (only for curved alignment) (only for machining mantle C/Y) Starting point Y (only if starting point is preset manually)
mm or Degrees
Z0 Reference point Z (Rectangular/ (only for single location) circular pocket) (Rectangular spigot) Z0 (Planar milling) Z1 (Planar milling) Z1 Height of blank material
mm
mm
Height of the finished item referred to Z0
mm
Final depth (abs) or final depth referred to Z0 or X0 (inc) Engraving depth (abs) or depth referred to Z0 or X0 (inc) End point of the thread (abs) or thread length (inc) Plunging depth tool point (abs or inc) (only for chamfering) (only for machining front C/Y) Centre point Z (abs) (only for curved alignment) (only for machining mantle C/Y)
mm
Z1 (Engraving) Z1 (Threadmilling) ZFS
mm
mm
mm
ZM (Engraving)
mm
Page 35
B500
B500
Page 36
B700
Drawings of programming examples
Brief description
Objective of the module: This module provides the means to carry out further exercises regarding the programming with ShopMill and to consolidate the programming knowledge so far attained. Description of the module: This module contains all the drawings that were used in the individual modules so far and additional work piece drawings as exercises for the consolidation of the acquired knowledge.
Content:
Shop drawings - Mould - Mould plate - Guide plate_1 - Mounting plate - Perforated plate - Housing cover - Longitudinal guide - Example_1 - Mould_2 - Exhibition example - Mould plate_2 - Excercise_12 - Flange - Pressure plate - Guide plate_2 - Kidney-shaped plate - Con-rod - Wing - Connecting piece

B700
B700
B700
Page 2
B700
Drawings of programming examples: Description This module contains all the drawings that were used in the individual modules so far and additional work piece drawings as exercises for the consolidation of the acquired knowledge.
Drawings of programming examples: START Mould_2
Con-rod
Mould Exhibition example Wing
Mould Plate Mould plate_2 Guide Plate_1 Exercise-12 Mounting Plate Flange Perforated Plate Pressure plate Housing Cover Guide plate_2 Longitudinal guide Kidneyshaped plate Example_1 Connecting piece
Drawings of programming examples: END
Notes :
Page 3
B700
Section 2
Notes:
Shop drawings
2.1 Mould
15
150 95
R2 0
75
M10
60
4
25
R6
5 0
A
120 145 30 75 5
- 12
- 12
Y X
B700
Page 4
100
50
30
20
40
Shop drawings
2.2 Mould plate
Section 2
Notes:
A-A
40 80 R15
25
35
15
10
3
R2
A
150 20
R3 0
R36
100
90
A
R5
60
Y X
70 100
22
22
Page 5
B700
Section 2
Notes:
Shop drawings
2.3 Guide plate_1
A-A
10 15
70
30
0 R2
30
0 R1
240
140
Scaling factor: 1,5
120
Y X
240
B700
Page 6
Shop drawings
2.4 Mounting plate
Section 2
Notes:
75
10
100
Y X
100
50
25
Page 7
B700
Section 2
Notes:
Shop drawings
2.5 Perforated plate
90
10
100 25
20
Y
30
20
X Alle nicht bematen Radien 5 mm
B700
Page 8
100
5 2
R5
25
Shop drawings
2.6 Housing cover
Section 2
Notes:
Section A-A
35 30
25
150
10
M1
R2
8
40
15
Y X
100
Page 9
B700
Section 2
Notes:
Shop drawings
2.7 Longitudinal guide
M10
10
11
10
A
0 4
20
100 130 150
Y X
B700
Page 10
100
80
61
Shop drawings
2.8 Example_1
Section 2
Notes:
84 27
R14
60
51
36
24
12
Y X
53 108
27
10
Page 11
B700
Section 2
Notes:
Shop drawings
2.9 Mould_2
10 5
15
150 95
R2
75
0
60
30
25
R6
A
120 145 30 75 5
Y X
B700
Page 12
100
50
30
20
40
Shop drawings
2.10 Exhibition example
Section 2
Notes:
100 90 70
R5
15
R5
5 R2
R4 5
30
60
70
30
15 30 M6 30
10
10 5
Y X
15
Page 13
B700
Section 2
Notes:
Shop drawings
2.11 Mould plate_2
A-A
15
10
10 100
10
(42.5)
R1
35
R2
2 ,5
30 R3 0
92.5
100
90
R36
R5
60
Y X
70 85
B700
Page 14
45
45
45
20
Shop drawings
2.12 Excercise_12
Section 2
Notes:
Section A-A
50
10
8,5
10
R1 8
R1 0
100 90
R15
120 150
Y X
100
80
20
70 60
15
Page 15
B700
Section 2
Notes:
Shop drawings
2.13 Flange
10
5
18 R10
R5
110
18
R2 5
R5 2
R4
20
8
132 150
Y X
B700
Page 16
100
50
82
40
Shop drawings
2.14 Pressure plate
Section 2
Notes:
140 115 83 20
60
40
10
15
40
R6
15
R5
15
15
Y X
15
10
90
R5
R5
5
0 R1
15
Page 17
B700
Section 2
Notes:
Shop drawings
2.15 Guide plate_2
Section A-A
10
M12
35
160 40
40 60
140
R20
20
A
90
Y X
B700
Page 18
160
40
5 R1
Shop drawings
2.16 Kidney-shaped plate
Section 2
Notes:
60 R80
R75 R10
30
50
R2 0
15
200
Y X
200
15
Page 19
B700
Section 2
Notes:
Shop drawings
2.17 Con-rod
Section A-A
18
A
R 18
22 20
R20
R5 6 12 20
Y X
B700
Page 20
1150,1
75
28
Shop drawings
2.18 Wing
Section 2
Notes:
110
10
25
R4 5
10
50
Y X
R2
R1
15
Page 21
B700
Section 2
Notes:
Shop drawings
2.19 Connecting piece
Section A-A
38 14H7 1 26 16 5
42,5
26 40 R3
A
116,8
12
10H7
Y X
B700
Page 22
15
Notes:
Page 23
B700
B700

EN - Complete Sinumerik Operate Milling - v26

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

EN - Complete Sinumerik Operate Milling - v26

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Operating and Programming Documentation

Milling 828D/840Dsl Sinumerik operate

Edition 2011.1 Training Manual

Sinumerik 828D Software 4.3 840D sl Sinumerik Operate Software 2.6

B604 Basics of Programming with programGUIDE

B609 Drilling programGUIDE

B608 Drilling Shopmill

General technology basics

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

Programming of the technology data

General technological aspect: END

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

Programming of the technology data

vf = 200 mm/min, n = 1000 min-1 Explanation: vf = 0,1 mm/rev , vc = 200 m/min

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

(Note: Further functions can be found in the annexure of this manual)

Effect of the switching commands M3 and M4 Example Milling Example Turning

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

Continuous control operation

G60 Exact stop

Usual preset starting status

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

General geometry basics

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

Right hand rule

Explanation of the axis assignments

Points and distances in the work space

General geometry basics: END

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

Right hand rule

Vertical turning machine

Horizontal milling machine

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

Defining of axis within a workspace

The axes U/V/W are parallel to the axes X/Y/Z.

The positive direction is that of the associated main axis.

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

Points and distances within the work space

Example: 2-axis turning machine

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

Points and distances within the work space

Example: 3-axis milling machine

XMR = YMR = ZMR =

XMW = YMW = ZMW =

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

G18 G19 -Y G17 +X

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

Simple contour elements

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

Absolute and incremental dimensioning, mixed programming

Rapid traverse motion

Straight line interpolation

Simple contour elements: END

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

Absolute and incremental dimensioning, mixed programming